D01 Deoiler Cyclones Rev 11-12

~.
"--
WIRELINE OPERATIONS
~....
TRAINING MANUAL
WrittenandCompiledby:RobertJ.Taylor
~
'AYLOR
RAINING
ONSUL TANTS
LIMITED
-
.
Oman: TTC Ltd, P. O. Box 5638, Ruwi, Sultanate of Oman; Tel: (968)592320/1/2, Tlx: 5064 DES ENG ON; Fax: (968)592065
~
, "",
INTRODUCTION
"-
""-'
'T.T.C Ltd wish to thank our clients for their support of the first edition of this manual, which
has made this second edition possible.
This manual has been upgraded where appropriate and is specifically designed to support the
wireline training course presented by Taylor Training Consultants Ltd.
Each topic is presented in the following format: r-
Theory - classroom sessions r-
I
- audio visual presentations
I
Practical 1
- under workshop conditions to reinforce class theory
- cutaway demonstrations
operations on training well (where available)
~ Projects to be completed prior to a test on each topic

'-.J information required is to be found in the text preceding each project,
from theory and practical sessions or by asking your instructor for further
clarification.
Test after each chapter to verify the individuals level of understanding.

- final test on completion of course to assess potential.
Aims and objectives of the course are:
- to improve understanding and awareness of equipment operation and

correct procedures.
to improve efficiency and to reduce downtime from insufficient

maintenance and/or preparation of equipment.
to improve on-site safety.
- .....
- to aid personnelinvolvedin purchase and inventorycontrol of wireline
tools and equipment.
'\.0., /
As a training aid the topics have been restricted to the equipment most commonly utilised on a
worldwide basis. However during our courses additional items can be included to suit
individual clients requirements.
Additional chapters and updated contents pages are available to upgrade previous editions. For
further information please contact your nearest TTC Ltd office.
Robert J. Taylor
Taylor Training Consultants
Registered Office: P. O. Box 301, Queen's House, Don Road, S1. Helier, Jersey, Channel Island, British Isles
Tel: (44) 534 75488; Fax: (44) 36206; Tlx: 4192169 CENTRE G
Singapore: TTC, P. O. Box 0220 Telok Blangah East P. O. Singapore 9109. Tel: (65) 8616664; Tlx: RS 50918 (East S) Fax: (65) 8617493
- ".."... Oman: TTC Ltd, P.O. Box 5638, Ruwi, Sultanate of Oman; Tel: (968) 592320/1/2 Tlx: 5064 UES ENG ON; Fax: (968) 592065
Brunei: TTC Ltd, Lot 4305, W3, Simpang 451, Kuala Belait, Brunei Tel: 673-3-32190; Fax: 673-3-35750
~ Sarawak: P. O. Box 1414, 98008 Miri, Sarawak, Malaysia. Tel: 085-417323 Fax: 085-417123 Tlx: AWATRA MA 74148
INTRODUCTION
..,
, -..
'T.T.C Ltd wish to thank our clients for their support of the first edition of this manual, which
has made this second edition possible.
This manual has been upgraded where appropriate and is specifically designed to support the
wireline training course presented by Taylor Training Consultants Ltd.
Each topic is presented in the following format:
Theory - classroom sessions

- audio visual presentations
Practical - under workshop conditions to reinforce class theory
- cutaway demonstrations
- operations on training well (where available)
r--
..
Projects to be completed prior to a test on each topic
- information required is to be found in the text preceding each project,
from theory and practical sessions or by asking your instructor for further
clarification.
Test after each chapter to verify the individuals level of understanding.

- final test on completion of course to assess potential.
Aims and objectives of the course are:
- to improve understanding and awareness of equipment operation and

correct procedures.
to improve efficiency and to reduce downtime from insufficient

maintenance and/or preparation of equipment.
to improve on-site safety.
- to aid personnel involved in purchase and inventory control of wireline

tools and equipment.
.1"- ,
As a training aid the topics have been restricted to the equipment most commonly utilised on a
worldwide basis. However during our courses additional items can be included to suit
individual clients requirements.
Additional chapters and updated contents pages are available to upgrade previous editions. For
further information please contact your nearest TTC Ltd office.
-
Robert J. Taylor
~ Taylor Training Consultants
Registered Office: P. O. Box 301, Queen's House, Don Road, St. Helier, Jersey, Channel Island, British Isles
Oman: TTC Ltd, P.O. Box 5638, Ruwi, Sultanate of Oman; Tel: (968) 592320/1/2 Tlx: 5064 DES ENG ON; Fax: (968) 592065
:I[r - . Brunei: TTC Ltd, Lot 4305, W3, Simpang 451, Kuala Belait, Brunei Tel: 673-3-32190; Fax: 673-3-35750
Sarawak: P. O. Box 1414,98008 Miri, Sarawak, Malaysia. Tel: 085-417323 Fax: 085-417123 Tlx: AWATRA MA 74148
'
I
~A',
This manual is for the internal use of T.T.C. clients and course participants only.
Material contained in this publication has been compiled from various non-copyrighted
sources and presented in a clear on concise format to enhance the transfer of technology
important to successful wireline operations.
While every care has been taken to ensure the enclosed information is correct, TTC Ltd
accept no responsibility for any malfunctions resulting from material contained in this manual.
If specific details or specifications for a piece of equipment are required it is recommended to

contact the relevant manufacturer.
I,-~
, ,
"-
INDEX
- "
Section Contents
Section 1 Surface Equipment 1- 1

Xmas Tree
Rig Up
Section 2 The Well 2- 1
Wireline
Wireline Unit
H2S Safety
Section 3 Toolstring 3- 1
Basic ServIce Tools
Section 4 Basic Pulling Tools 4- 1
Fishing Neck Sizes
Section 5 Lock Mandrels 5-1
Running Tools
Section 6 Plugs and Equalizing Subs 6-1
Section 7 Test Tools 7- 1
Section 8 Sliding Side Doors 8- 1
Shifting Tools
Separation Tool
Section 9 Surface Controlled Safety Valves 9-1
Control Panel
Section 10 Gaslift 10 - 1
Kickover Tools
Valves
Side Pocket Mandrels
I
I ,,-....... Section 11 Ameradas Gauges 11 - 1
I ' --- Soft Set Hanger
Section 12 Perforator 12 - 1
Bailers
Back Pressure Valves
Section 13 Wireline fishing 13 - 1
- Section 14
Section 15
Pack - Offs
Calculations & Conversion Factors
14 - 1
15 - 1
Section 16 Baker Equipment 16 - 1
'(',.'
0:::-"'-
J
REGISTRATION FORM
L~- ""
If you wish to register your ownership of this manual to enable us to provide you with future
training information, and news of manual updates, please fill in the registration sheet below and
mail to your nearest TTC Ltd. office or representative.
Name:
Company:
Position:
Mailing Address:
ph: fax: telex:

Please indicate how you come into possession of this manual.
D Direct Purchase D Company Issue

f'
D Reference Library D TTC Ltd. course
D Other
Yes No
Do you require further information on TTC Ltd. courses D D
Are you interested in future manual updates 0 0
If you have any comments to assist us in upgrading our training to the industry they would be
appreciated.
Comments:-
('
-- "'
Thank you for your assistance.
R J Taylor
~ Taylor Training Consultants Ltd
CHANNEL ISLANDS
Registered Office: P. O. Box 301, Queen's House, Don Road, St. Helier, Jersey, Channel Island, British Isles
Oman: TTC Ltd, P.O. Box 5638, Ruwi, Sultanate of Oman; Tel: (968) 592320/1/2 Tlx: 5064 DES ENG ON; Fax: (968) 592065
I'"
1
Brunei: TTC Ltd, Lot 4305, W3, Simpang 451, Kuala Belait, Brunei Tel: 673-3-32190; Fax: 673-3-35750
,'-~- Sarawak: P. O. Box 1414, 98008 Miri, Sarawak, Malaysia. Tel: 085-417323 Fax: 085-417123 Tlx: AWATRA MA 74148
SECTION 1 - SURFACE EQUIPMENT
""""'
"
I Introduction I History 1- 2
Surface Equipment - General 1- 3
- Stuffing box 1- 5
- Line Wiper 1- 6
- Grease Injector Head 1- 6
- Quick Unions 1- 8
- Lubricator 1- 9
- Wireline B.O.Po 1- 11
- Xmas Tree 1- 17
- Weight Indicator 1- 18
- Hay Pulley, Wireline Clamp 1- 19
~ - Rigging up 1 - 20
PROJECT INDEX
Project Topic Page
Stuffing box 1- 7
2 Quick Unions 1 - 10
r ....
3 Lubricator 1 - 10
4 BoO.P. 1 - 16
5 Weight Indicator 1 - 21
6 Rig Up Procedures 1 - 21
- Projects to be completed during course.
.
(' /'
1-1
l
:noR
-
WIRELINE OPERATIONS
~"'.. ",."
, RAINING
ONSULTANTS
" LIMITED
INTRODUCTION
The forerunner of the modern circular cross-section wireline was

the flat type graduated measuring line. The flat type was used only for measuring
the depth of shallow wells. Nowadays, not only are the depths of the deepest wells
determined, but bottom hole temperatures and pressures are measured,
tubing dimensions can be checked, wax deposits and sand can be removed, and a large
number of tools and items of equipment can be set, retrieved or manipulated to change
the well status using wireline techniques.
Wireline operations can save a great deal of time and money, when performed
efficiently and safely. Efficiency and safety can only be achieved through good
planning, and this includes employing highly skilled, conscientious operators,
trained to the correct standards and procedures, and using the correct tools and
(' equipment maintained to the highest standards. The skills can only come from
: i
good on-the-job practical experience, the knowledge behind the skills from
technical and safety courses and appropriate literature.
Supervisors and operators should be fully aware of the various constraints

imposed upon them during wireline operations. Perhaps the greatest of these
is that the operator is working "blind.. , and must work with indicators,
observations and modern instrumentation, which, together with his own skills,
I I
assist in developing improved "sensing.. It is, however, still difficult
when the tool being used is several thousand feet away at the end of a length
of wire, and possibly in heavy mud or crude oil. Other typical restrictions which
can affect wireline operations are:
I I Corrosion
Sand
" Scale
Well deviation
Equipment design limitations
Many of these can be minimized through good planning and a professional

approach to the complete wireline operation from the planning stage to the production
J I
stage. For example, corrosion can be minimized by correct equipment selection or
I
inhibition, and sand production can be minimized by efficient well control and completion
- design.
~ It is only through good records and careful analysis of data so obtained that
problems are highlighted and improvements can be made and solutions found.
Efficient well records are essential

Refer to these prior to a wireline job to check problems previously encountered.
'"'
-'-'
1-2
...
WIRE LINE SERVICE
;r-\
Wireline Service is a method whereby various well maintenance, remedial, control

and safety functions are accomplished, under pressure, in the wellbore below the
earth's surface. This is done by "running" and "pulling" the tools and
equipment into and out of the wellbore by use of a small diameter wireline mounted
on a powerful reel at the surface.
Some of the functions which are accomplished by use of the wireline are:
installing and retrieving safety valves, plugs and pressure regulators;
removing sand and parafin from the wellbore, running instruments to record bottom
-hole pressure. and temperature and installing and retrieving gas lift
valves.
Most wells upon which we perform Wireline Services will contain, or be

subject to, pressures of from a few pounds up to several thousand pounds per
square inch. This pressure is a natural condition of the underground formation into /]
which the well has been drilled and where the gas and oil is being produced
from.
To enable the tools to be run into the well under pressure we

require the surface equipment shown below:
Each component on the following list can be identified on p 1-4:
(1) Stuffmg box - (Alternate sealing Wiper Box, Grease Injector Head)
(n) Lubricator Bleed off valve.
(m) Quick Unions (Otis or Bowen)
(IV) BD.P.
(v) Tree Connection
(VI) Ginpole and Rope Blocks
(vn) Lifting Clamp ,--...
(vm) Wireline Clamp
(IX) Hay Pulley
(X) Martin Oecker Weight Indictor Sensor.
I.~
1-3
SURFACE EQUIPMENT
f'
STUFFING BOX
LUBRICATOR
LINE WIPER
f\ LIFfING CLAMP
---
GREASE INJECTOR HEAD
BLEED - OFF VALVE
TYPE '0' TYPE 'B'

0 BLOW OUT PREVENTOR
QUICK UNIONS
/'
TREE CONNECTION
HAY PULLEY
(' r
1 - 4
STUFF ING BOX
/I
~ ./
Sheave Guard
Sheave Wheel
r")
Oil Reservoir
Gland Nut
Top Gland
Packing
Swivel Bearings
/"""
Pressure Relief Valve

Bottom Gland
Internal RO.P.
Quick Union
~ Internal RO.P. Retainer

To use with different wire
diameter change:
(i) Top Gland
(ii) Packing
(iii) Bottom Gland
(iv) Internal RO.P. >~
OTIS WIRE LINE STUFFING BOX
1-5
~
'~" AYLOR
," RAINING
. '" "C ONSULTANTS
,,- WIRE SEALING DEVICES " UMITED
!r-- Wireline Sealing Devices fulfil one of two functions:
(a) Pressure containment. (Sealing).

(b) Pressure reduction on braided line (Partially Sealing).
(c) , High Pressure containment on braided line
(a) For solid wirelines, only pressure-containing stuffing boxes are utilized.
The standard stuffing box is rated for 5000 psi but they are available in 10,000psi and
higher.
The essential function of the wireline stuffing box is to ensure containment

or sealing off around solid wirelines, whether stationary or in motion, at the
upper end of the lubricator during wireline operations. In addition, most
stuffing boxes contain a BOP plunger, which seals off flow in the event that
the wireline breaks and is forced out of the packing section.
;- A swivel - mounted (3608 free movement) sheave wheel and guard are fitted to
the top half of the stuffing box. The wheel is positioned so as to maintain
the passage of the wire through the centre of the packing rubbers.
The sheave guard on the Otis stuffing box is designed to trap wire which
breaks on the surface before it drops downhole. a-Ring No = 91Q1338(International
a-Ring No = 2-338)
(b) Line wip.er(Wiper box, swabbing head)

Use: To partially seal around 3 I 16 braided line.
Seals: Split rubber elements
Limitations Maximum well pressure 500 psi.
Operation: The hydraulic packing nut is used to adjust the compression on the
rubber element to minimise leakage. A 100% seal is not achieved while
line is in motion as "squeeze" required would create too much
friction.
,... (c) Grease injector head
Use: To seal around 3 I 16 braided line at pressures up to 5000 psi.
Seals: Grease injected around wire as it passes through flow tubes.
Limitations: Difficult to achieve a 100% seal.
Operation: Flow tubes, machined to close fit to OD of line, are pressured
up with honey grease to a pressure slightly higher than well
- pressure. This prevents escape of well fluids.
In order to supply grease under pressure we require the following eqUlp-

~ ment to rig up the grease injector head.
1) High pressure grease pump. 5) Wiper box.
I
2) Grease reservoir. 6) Grease injector head assembly.
3) Compressor. 7) Sheave.
4) Hoses. Crane.
r 8)
1-6
PROJECT I - STUFFING BOX
, r
a. Slickline stuffing box.
l. What is the purpose of the standard box?
2. What is the pressure rating of the standard stuffing box?
3. List four points which you should check prior to using the stuffing box?
(1)
(11)
(m)
(IV)
~.
4. What is the purpose of the B.O.P. plunger in the Otis stuffing 'box?
b. WiRer box
l. When do we use this type of device?
')
"-. What is the maximum well pressure at which this can be used?
3. If we cannot satisfactorily contain well pressure which component must be

changed?
~
c. Grease Injector Head
I. List equipment required to rig up grease injector head.
(1)
(11)
(m)
I
-1
(IV)
(v)
(VI)
., (V11)
2. What is the maximum pressure which can be contained by. this device?
3. What are the disadvantages of this device?

~
1-7
....
QUICK UNIONS
r,
" .;/
The connections used to assemble the wireline service lubricator and related equipment
are referred to as "Quick Unions" ,. They are designed to be assembled by hand.
The box end receives the pin which has an a-ring seal. The collar has an internal
ACME thread to match the external thread on the box. This thread makes up quickly
by hand and should be kept clean. The a-ring forms the seal to contain the pressure
and should be thoroughly inspected for damage - replace if necessary. A light
film of oil (or grease) helps to make up the union and prevent cutting of the a-Ring.
Pipe wrenches, chain tongs or hammer should never be used to loosen the collar
of the union, If it cannot be turned by hand, all precautions must be taken to make
sure that the well pressure has been completed released.
The collar of the union will make up by hand when the pin end, with the 0- ring,
has been stopped by a shoulder matching a shoulder on the other end. When the collar
makes up completely, it should be backed off approximately one quarter turn
to eliminate any possibility of it sticking due to friction when it is to be
(' removed.
Rocking lubricator to ensure it is perfectly straight will assist in loosening

quick union,
PIN ~
rCOLLAR-+.
0 0
('.
"- ~
O-RING O-RING N°
5Yz - 4 = 2 - 345
91Q1236
(2-236) 43/4- 4 = 2 - 340
- BOX
~ OTIS
BOW EN
NOTE: differences between Otis and Bowen (i) External - Holes

(ii) Internal - angles
n
I
(iii) Pin. diameter (Otis 3.5", Bowen 4.375")
High pressure quick unions are welded to lubricator-not threaded.
1-8
LUBRICA TOR
A
The lubricator enables tools to be introduced to, and removed from, a well under
pressure. It is a tube with quick connections at each end. For low pressure (below
5000 psi) applications the quick unions are threaded. For high pressure use the quick
connections must be welded in position and x-rayed and pressure tested prior to use. All
lubricators should be x-rayed, magnifluxed for cracks and visually inspected at
regular intervals.
The pressure ratings of lubricator are:
Working press (psi) Test press (psi)

3000 4500
5000 7500
10000 15000
......
1 J
Note: H 2 S equipment must be used on wells containing more than 10 ppm H2S (0.001070)
The standard length of lubricator is 8 ft but shorter sections are available (4 - 5 ft)
They are usually positioned at the bottom.
The lower section must be of sufficient diameter to accommodate tool 1 equipment

being run. (Usually same size as tubing and wellhead). Upper sections are smaller
as only the toolstring is inside.
Total length must be sufficient to take total toolstring plus tools being recovered.
Maximum length recommended to be picked up with rope blocks on ginpoles are:

i) 3 sections- if lower section does not exceed 4 11 2"
ii) 2 sections- if both sections are 4 1 1 2" /\
If diameters exceed these sizes a crane must be used.
Common sizes are:
2,2 1/2",3 1/2",4 1/2", and 5 1/2"
MANUFACTURERS- CAMCO, HYDROLEX, OTIS, BOWEN, ELMAR

- WIRE TRACKING:
~ Caused by wire cutting into inside wall of lubricator. This can drastically
reduce. strength of lubricator and should be checked by visual inspection regularly.
"\
I'/
1-9
PROJECT 2 - QUICK UNIONS
~I "
'}-:':: -)
1. What is the visible (external) difference between Otis and Bowen Quick Unions?
2. What is the internal difference?
3. Can these quick unions be unscrewed by hand with pressure inside?
4. What is the Part No. of the 0 - rings required with on the standard (most
common) 3" Quick Unions.
-'~"
, \
t I j (1) Otis-
(2) Bowen-
5. For the Otis Quick Unions --what does the 5 - 4 refer to?
(1) 5 -
(2)4 -
I PROJECT 3 -LUBRICATOR
1. How many sections of lubricator should be used for each job?
1\\ 2. Why is there a bleed off valve in the lower section?

-' )
3. What is the working pressure of the standard lubricator?
4. Explain the difference between working pressure (W.P.) and test pressure (T.P.).
- 5. . How often should lubricator be tested?
..i 6. Explain" Wire Tracking"
,n,)
'-, I.
,t
--..----
1 - 10
~ ~ ... ~ ~-.'"'.-
...;... Lr =~ -:. ~~ ~-~~ .. -.--....
BLOW OUT PREVENTERS
f\
A Wireline BOP is always* installed between the tree connection and the lower lubricator
section. Under normal circumstances it is not actually used but it cannot be installed, only
when required, with wire in the hole as the lubricator will contain pressure.
Purpose: - to enable well pressure to be isolated without cutting wire by closing the master
valve.
- to permit assembly of wireline cutter above the BOP rams.
- to permit the dropping of a wirelinecutter if the toolstring becomes stuck in
the well.
- to permit "stripping" of the wire through closed rams when absolutely necessary.
*When running/pulling an SCSSV or a wireline retrievable HPV the BOP can be positioned
above the first section of lubricator. Alternatively a second BOP can be placed immediately
below the stuffing box. This provides a means of isolating the well pressure and recovering
the tools if the wire breaks at the rope socket and the tools drop across the Christmas tree valves.
'-j
Description: - Mechanicalor hydraulicforceis appliedto closethe rams whichsealagainst
the wire.
- Slickline(.092", .105"/.108")uses blind rams with rubber inserts on the sealing
faces to seal with or without wire across the rams.
- Braided line (3/16", 1/4" or conductor cable) uses rams with a semi-circular
groove in the seals to match the line diameter.
All of the above types of rams have centralisers to ensure that the wire is positioned centrally
on the sealing face as the rams close.
CAUTION: HOP's WILL ONLY HOLD PRESSURE FROM ONE :DIRECTION
Check visually, with the rams open, by looking down past the rams for the keyway slot on
the pressure (bottom) side of the body. Any wording on the casting should also be the correct
way up. Some brands have an arrow to indicate the top.
n
Types: Ram type BOP's, as described above, are manufactured by:
- Bowen
- Elmar
- Hydrolex
- Otis
An Omsco type is also available with rapid closing "butterfly" type semi-circular rams.
However these are no longer in common use.
~
1 - 11
WIRELINE BLOWOUT PREVENTER
,
I
n
Union Box
('
~
Ram Guide
('
By Pass Body
0 - Rings
Stem Retainer Screw
~.
"
1 - 12
PROJECT 4 - WIRELINE HOP
f
1. Under what circumstances can the Bap be omitted from the rig-up?
2. What is the bore (1.0.) of the standard 3" wireline valve?
3. Learn how to change the rams and redress the Bap.
4. Describe the procedure to pressure test:

(i) In the workshop, with and without wire in rams:
(ii) an the wellhead prior to running the toolstring:
r
5. Can the wire be stripped through a closed Bap? Explain your answer.
6. Why should you not 'man-handle' the Bap? (ie: Lift by hand)
7. Give two ways to visually check that the Bap is not installed upside down:
(i)
(ii)
8. Describe the difference between blind rams and 3/16 rams:

r
9. Should the equalising valve be left in the open or closed position? Explain your answer:
10. Should the Bap be transported with the rams open or closed? Explain your answer:
11. What Bap configuration is recommended if using braided line on a high pressure gas
well?
~
12. What is the purpose of the grease injected between the Bap's when using braided line?
"-
1 - 16
WELLHEADS
The followingare types of wellheadsin common use: r ,....-

Cameron
Mc Evoy
aCT
FMC
Valvesand major components are identified on the Cameron Christmas Treebelow:
Tree Connection
"
Upper Master Valve 1
To Production Line
Master Valve
TubingHangar
- Zero
Production F\
Casing Hangar
Top Bottom Flange -
- Surface Casing
~
Do not overtighten during opening or dosing.
NEVER USE MASTERVALVETO SHUT IN FLOWINGWELL - Use SWABor Wing.
Count valve turns when dosing - as check against jamming toolstring.
{'
I - 17
WEIGHT INDICATOR
(' Damper The MARTIN-DECKER instrument is

completely hydraulic. The sensing load
cell is attached to the Xmas Tree by a
chain as ~hown on p 1-4; a heavy duty
hose carries the signal to the fluid
filled gauge.
It is provided with connections at the

top to attach to the hay pulley and at
Scale available in: lb the bottom to attach to the Xmas Tree
kg forming a pull at 90 degrees. The system
DaN
is calibrated to this right angle pull
and accuracy will be slightly affected
" if this angle is not true, but the sensi-

tivity of the system is always main-
tained.
The gauge is a 6" fluid filled instru-

ment which can be fastened on the
winch. A damper is provided on the
gauge to set the pointer motion to the
3/8" LOAD GAP
required sensitivity. The fluid filled
case elininates severe vibrations and
also lubricates and protects the working
parts.
ENSATER
LOAD CELL
Check this gap before and during wireline operations. If fluid leaks out and this
0 gap closes reading on gauge will be incorrect.
In addition to preventing the overloading of the wireline the weight indicator will
also show changes in tension due to :
(1) fluid levels or changes in fluid density
(11) Jar action
(m) Position of downhole equipment
A different Martin Oecker Weight Indictator is used for 3 / 16" line because
of the higher pull which can be exerted. The load c~lI for this instrument
has a smaller cross - sectional area in the diaphram and is matched to the higher
range dial (gauge). The gauge load cell cannot be interchanged.
~ Maximum loading - standard = 2000 Ib (888 DaN)
- 3/ 16 Unit = 4000 lb (1777 DaN)
CAUTION: do not crush or cut hose.
ElectronicStrain gauges are availableas alternate types of weightindicators but are not in
(' such common use as the above hydraulictype.
1- 18
HAY PULLEY, WIRE LINE CLAMP
-
~}
HAY PULLEY:
Used to bring the wireline down from the stuffing box, parallel to the lubricator
(to reduce side loading), forming a 90° angle at the base, to the horizontal position
from there to the wireline winch drum.
It is hooked directly onto the eye in the weight indicator sensor.

Always install with locking pin up - to prevent the pin vibrating down and unlocking
hay pulley if pin spring is weak.
OTIS WIRELINE CLA MP.
Used to clamp. the wire to the lubricator while raising or lowering it. Or
during operations when the wireline string is left in the well. -......
,
The clamp is usually fastened - to a bleed - off valve located on the lowermost
lubricator section by means of a short chain.
Take care not to kink wire at any point during the rig - up as this will cause a
weak point which may break or stick in the stuffing box.
PUSH HERE _WIRE LINE
TO RELEASE CLAMPING
~- 1 JAWS
'o1~
/\
~
WIRELINE CLAMP.
')
1 - 19
_///
~
/' . AYLOII
RAINING
~ONSULTANTS
RIGGING UP ..w LIMITED
('
The lubricator, stuffing box, wire line, and wireline tool string is assembled
and positioned in the lubricator. With the pressure released from the wellhead,
the proper wellhead connection is installed on the wellhead. The box end of a
quick union on the top end fits the pin end of the union on the bottom of the wire-
line valve, which has been previously described.
The wireline valve is installed onto the wellhead connections, using the rope
falls and ginpole, crane or other hoisting means to hoist the valve. Do not
man-handle.
The union is made up to the union on the wellhead connection, the rams closed
and the closed valve on the wellhead opened allowing full well pressure to be
applied to the wireline valve rams and connections. If no leaks appear the wellhead
valve is closed, the pressure released and the rams opened.
""" The lubricator assembly is now raised to a point level with the union on the top
.
of the wireline valve, the hoisting device secured, the wireline placed into the
hay pulley and the slack in the wireline taken up on the wireline unit. The
clamp holding the wireline tool string suspended in the lubricator can now be removed,
allowing the tool string to be lowered out of the lubricator, controlled by the wire-
line unit, to a point convenient for attaching the required service tool. With
this tool attached and the odometer of the measuring head set on zero feet, the
tools are pulled back up into the lubricator and the assembly installed on to
the wireline valve.
Note: Reset counter to zero with bottom of wireline tools level with one of the following
reference points - as per the well schematic.
(1) T.H. - tubing hangar
(2) TBF - top of bottom flange
(3) RT or DF - rotary table or drill floor (if rig is in position)
SAFETY
£',
, Injury can occur easily through the use of unsafe practices, lack of concen-
tration and common sense.
MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT IN SAFE CONDITION.

MAKE SAFE WORK PRACTICES YOUR HABIT
BE AWARE OF DANGEROUS SITUATIONS.
PROTECT YOUR COLLEAGUES.
...,j
OBSERVE H2S PRECAUTIONS WHEN NECESSARY.
~ To lose a finger, a hand, a leg, your sight etc, is a painful experience.
Concentrate while you work and you will remain healthy and able to care and
provide for your family.
n
...",-.
1 - 20
PROJECT 5 -WEIGHT INDICATOR
,-...
~~"1. What is the maximum full scale deflection on the standard weight indicators?
2. What is the most important thing to check' before and during use of the weight
indicator?
3. If needle appears sluggish to respond to weight changes what 2 things should

the operator check?
(1)
(u)
4. What should be done on the dial, before picking up any weight across load
cell? " ~
5. When flushing I recharging with the recommended, Martin Oecker W- 15 fluid what
precautions should be taken?
PROJECT 6 - RIG UP
Personnel should be familiar with the' rig - up procedure.
1. List all items ,required for normal rig up.
(1)
(u)
r---.
(m)
(IV)
(V)
(VI)
(vu)
- (Vlll)
(IX)
~ 2. What size of rope is used for the rope falls?
3. Learn to tie clove hitch knot.
1 - 21
l ..
SECTION 2 -WELL COMPLETIONS/WIRELINE UNITS
,-...
'"
Typical Casing Schematic 2-2
The Wellhead 2-3
Completion Types 2-4
Tubing 2 - 5
Wireline Counter 2 - 12
Wireline Units 2 -14
~ H2S Safety 2 - 24
PROJECTS
I
Project 7 Completions 2 - 6
I
Project 8 Wireline 2 - 13
I
Project 9 Wireline Counter 2 - 13

I ('
Project 10 Wireline Units 2 - 23
Project 11 H2S 2 - 25
-
..
r
2-1
i
THE WELL
~
, .
Surface Conductor A basic understanding of the sub-surface design
" (or Riser)
26"
and components is essential to all wireline
operators. This will assist you to "visualise"
the action of your tools downhole.
-, .'.. .,' , '-.: The well is drilled in stages and "cased" to

"""':", prevent hole collapse. The number and size of
''-C","
, "" , . t,...
..t ."':'.""'.: ., casings is determined by the final well depth, the
. .. - ." '..
t ,
i formation conditions, and final well pressure and
'0 :. Co. .. -", I service (oil or gas etc). Common sizes have been
""'..' '0':, '.;,
."S""'-"i.!.
'.'. -, - - -- ." ,
chosen for this diagram.
0° t:) 0 This diagram shows a typical "three casing" on-
shore well. The choice of how much cement
~OO~OO "overlap" in each casing is determined by forma-
!G
'" t1 ~ 0 a tion conditions and well location. A good cement
I
~
~ ,
(JIJO
0 0
11
Surface Casing
20"
I
bond between formation and casing is essential
to prevent movement of fluids between producing
zones or to the surface.
O()O"O 0
, Intermediate A typical wellhead installation to suit this well is
Casing shown on page 2-3-
'- -.I
I
13 3/8"
Annulus
-t-
--l. \
~-r
-t--+
-
~+
~
-
- --
-
~ ~/ //~
"
I/~
/;;j~/;//
{tw///
./
2 - 2
CASING INSTALLATION
r)
The Christmas Tree is attached
,- Double Studded Adapter Flange to the top of the "Double Stud-
(DSAF) ded Adapter Flange (DSAF)"
shown here at the top of the
respective casing spools to suit the
completion type.
Tubing Hanger (TH)
This is a typical land well with
Tubing Hanger Spool (THS) the cellar base shown. This puts
the DSAF approximately at ground
Tubing / Production Casing Annulus level for ease of flowline instal-
lation and subsequent wellhead
Tubing
operations.
Casing Hanger
;J
Casing Hanger Spool (CHS)

Production / Intermediate Casing Annulus
Production Casing
Casing Hang~r
Casing Head Housing (CHH)
.- -- Intermediate / Surface CasingAnnulus

f\
Intermediate C.asing
Surface Casing
Cellar Base Note: Sizeshave been omitted

as these can vary with
well design / depth.
f\
2- 3
A WELL COMPLETION
"'~
,J-- -j
.--!--, ,
~ \ ,
To continue wIth the completion of the well,
...... the tubing and packer are now installed.
, The tubing is simply a smaller diameter pipe which
I S.C.S.S.V.
~-\ '-, NIPPLE is lowered inside the casing to a depth somewhere
---- above the perforations. Attached to the lower end
I I of the tubing, we see the packer.
- PRODUCTION
;'
I ,
- I I
I
~ CASING
,
-
I
The packer carries one or more sets of slips
(teeth) and one or more rubber seal elements
-G -r
~
which remain retracted until it is lowered
into the casing to the depth at which it is
to be set. Once the tubing and packer are at
-r +-\ -
+-t the desired depth, the slips and the rubber
seal elements on the packer are acti-
-i -r /:..
SIDE POCKET
MANDRELS
vated,
or
usually either by rotating the tubing
by applying hydraulic pressure through
;, l-t- /- \ the tubing bore. This causes the slips on

the packer to expand ~nd bite into the casing
+-1 J-
/, and also causes the rubber
ments of the packer to expand and seal off
seal ele-
-r-1- against the internal diameter of the casing.

i-+-
+ + 1-
fi The packer is now firmly anchored in place
and sealed off in the casing. The gas and
I 4+ oil entering the casing through the perfo-
rations will flow up to the packer, where
1= H-~
1+T it must now enter the tubing and flow to
the surface.
i+ L- h The tubing - casing annulus is the space
I- -+ \==-
\
between the outside diameter of the tubing
and the inside diameter of the casing above
+- t- -I I
SLIDING
the packer. It is usually filled with a fluid,
such as water, mud, or diesel. This fluid
nt- . i- SIDE DOOR
usually contains a corrosion inhibitor which
"I+- It- .l.. protects the tubing and casing from corrosion.
t~ --+-J
-PACKER
-, The hydrostatic pressure (weight) of the
fluid tends to help hold the packer in place
--Lj --1 --
and also provides a means of "killing"
j--- L:-
- XN NIPPLE the well, when necessary, by admitting the
PUP JOINT annular fluid into the tubing string.
-4\ RE ENTRY
--- GUIDE-
,1-
0 0 I) NOTE: Combination of SCSSV and gaslift only used
~PRODUCTION
~ :::>
::::=-- - -=;
--
:-=- I
.
D
0
0
0
0
I)
0
0 ~~
"--::; ZONE
offshore. Not common on land completions.
For purposes of illustration only.
~;://~~~
//
;v{ ;/
.
I /,,/
//
//l--~ ,rER~O/
I
/
/ / / / 7 //
U
/~ /
~ /
/
/
TIONS
2 - 4
TUBING
Ir;
As it is always the tubing in which wireline operations are carried out it is necessary
for the wireline Operator to know more about the tubing.
SIZE
======- - OD = the outside diameter of the pipe.
- ID = the internal diameter of the pipe.
- Nominal - approximate LD. rounded up to the nearest full size.
GRADE -Indicates the "strength.. and type of steel used to make the tubing.
It is specified by a letter followed by a number:
eg : H - 40, J - 55, C - 75, L - 80, N - 80 , P - 105.
the lower the number the ..softer .. the steel. This number
is the tensile strength in 1000 lbs per sq. in. i.e. : N - 80
with a cross sectional area of 1 sq. in will take a
load of 80,000 Ibs.
Wei~ht p'er foJ21 - determines the thickness of the tubing.

n,
Drift - is the "quality control"" LD. which a bar of steel 32" long and
machined to the 0.0. of the drift size will pass without hanging up in the tubing. ALL
tubing and components run in the well MUST be drifted. For practical purposes the
drifts used on the rigs are shorter than 32" (Wireline Drift is determined by
nipple bore size - refer to chart below)
Threads - EU = External Upset has collar on outside and internal recess
- NU =Non Upset but otherwise same as EU.
- Vam= Premium type thread seal with collar. No internal recess
- Hydril CS =No collar. Metal to metal 3 point seal. No internal recess.
The following tables shows common tubing sizes.

Nominal Wt 0.0. LD. DRILLING WIRELINE l\
SIze ft DRIFT DRIFT
2-3/8" 4.7 2.375" 1.995" 1.901" 1.875"
2-7/8" 6.5 2.875" 2.441 " 2.347" 2.313"
3 - 1 / 2" 9.3 3.5" 2.992" 2.867" 2.750"
4 - I / 2" 12.75 4.5" 3.958" 3.883" 3.813"

-
5 -I /2" 15.5 5.5" 4.919" 4.825" 4. 75{)"
r'\
2- 5
I
~
PROJECT 7 - COMPLETIONS
t) I. Why is casing run in a well?
2. How is casing attached to the formation?
3. Why is tubing run inside the casing?
(' 4. What is the purpose of a single packer?
5. What is the purpose of two packers in one well?
6. Explain why the casing must be perforated.
'"
7. Explain .'drift""as used by drilling.
8. Fill out the tubing ID and wireline drift for the following sizes of tubes.
LD. Wire Drift

~ (I) 2 - 3 I 8u ............................... ................
(11) 2 - 7 I 8" ................................ ,...........
(m) 3 - 1 I 2" "...... "..........
f' (IV) 4 - 1 I 2" . "................
2 - 6
WIRE LINE
J\
, .
Wireline may be referred to by a number of names. Solid single strand line may be
described as :
Slick line
Piano wire
Solid line
Wireline
Measuring line.
Multistrand wirelines are usually described as braided line (3 I 16" most common).
As well depths have increased over the years since the first measuring lines were
brought into use, accompanied by increased working loads, it has become necessary
to develop wireline having a high strength I weight ratio. There is a need
for strength to accomplish the operation without the wire breaking, and a need r")
to keep the diameter of the wire as small as possible for the following reasons-:
(a) It reduces the load of is own weight.

(b) It can be run over smaller diameter sheaves, and wound on smaller
diameter spools or reels without overstressing by bending.
(c) It keeps the reel drum size to a minimum.
(d) -
It provides a small cross section area for operation under
pressure.
The sizes of solid wireline in most common use are: 0.092 in and 0.108 in diameter, and
are obtainable from the drawing mills in one-piece standard lengths of 10000, 12000, 15000,
18000, 20000 and 25000 ft.
The most popular material for wireline is improved plow steel (LP .S.), because of its high
ultimate tensile strength, good ductility, and relatively low cost. Experience indicates that
improved plow steel usually performs better than the more expensive special steel lines, even
in corrosive conditions - although then it must be used with an appropriate inhibitor(Servo n
CK352 or CK356). For "Sweet Wells" IPS can be used with inhibitor for high loads and long
service. For "Sour Wells" IPS can be used with inhibitor for high loads and short operating
time.
When selecting or operating with wireline, various factors, such as the following,
have to be considered:
Physical properties Total stress

-- Resistance to corrosion Care and handling
Effect of bending
~ Due to the H2S content of many wells special materials such as 0.092" NITRONIC-50
manufactured by Briden Wire, or stainless steels are used. Although these are not as strong
as LP .S. they have an excellent resistance to H2S corrosion.
f')
2 - 7
~
AYLOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
WIRE LINE LIMITED
.---
r,
I
The bending stresses that the line is subjected to are the most common cause of breaking but
are generally the least considered. Bending occurs whenever a line deviates from a straight
i line condition, such as when it passes over pulleys or reel drum, or when it is flexed by hand.
It is necessary to employ specific mechanical equipment, such as the reel drum, hay pulley,
stuffing box pulley and measuring wheel, when carrying out wireline operations. Each time
the lin~ passes over a pulley it is subjected to two bending stresses - when it changes from
a straight to a curved path and again when it reverts to a straight path. It is subject to only
one when it leaves the reel drum. So, for each trip in and out of the well, the line probably
suffers a minimum of fourteen bending cycles.
Stuffing Box WIRELINE BEND IN G

7 6 CYCLES
r-
Hay Pulley Counter
5
4 2 Reel
It is a good work practice to cut and discard 50m of wireline each time a new knot is made.
NOTE: 6 "bedding" wraps of carefully aligned wire are recommended to provide firm base
and give indication of wire low level.
The following table shows the relative strengths of LP .S. (Improved Plough Steel) wire and
r H2S resistant alloy wirelines:
MATERIAL DIAMETER BREAKING RECOMMENDED WT/lOOOM CHARACTERISTICS

STRENGTH MAX LOAD DaN LB
DaN LBS (APPROX.)
DaN LB
LP.S. 0.092 688 1547 500 1125 33 74 For non-corrosive wells
-
0.108 937 2109 800 1800 41.5 93 Relatively cheap.
Nitronic-50 0.092 645 1450 300 675 33 74 Good in H,S & Chlorides up to
. 390°F. More sensitive to acid at
higher temps. than stainless 18-18-2. .
18-18-2 0.092 600 1350 444 1000 30.5 68.5 Good resistance to H,S.
Stainless 0.108 764 1720 622 1400 42 94
~ Supa 50 Alloy 0.092
0.108
644
884
1450
1990
489
733
1100
1650
30.5 68.5
42 94
Very good resistance to H,S.
()
2-8
l WIRELINE ~
i
AYLOR
RAINING
ONSULTAImi
UMITED
Fault and cause Result Correction
Damage to reels:
bending of flanges, Wire snagging during Use slings when handling
distortion of barrel. unwinding. reels or use ramps. Do not
Caused by dropping. drop.
Corrosion in store:
Carbon steel wire is oiled, Under worst conditions Alltypes ofwire: store reels
but if stored uncovered, there will be pitting of the upright(on edge) on level
corrosion willdevelop at surface and local reduction solidbase indry covered
varying rates depending in strength. conditions. Ifpermanent
upon climate. store is not available,
Alloysteels are for use Slight damage at this stage support reels offthe ground
under corrosive conditions, - scarcely visible - may under waterproof cover.
increase the.. risk of alloy Thelattershould be keptout ,.....
but they are not completely . . I
immune and where there wire corrosion In service. ofcontact with the wire and
are wind blown salts slight fastened down just clear of
damage may occur. the ground to allowair to
circulateand minimise
condensation.
Corrosion in service:
Thereare inevitablehazards There may be development When rewinding wire, wipe
of well conditions and of surface pitting. At worse off well contamination. If
environment. there may be stress- carbon steel wire reels are
corrosion or hydrogen to be put back into store,
embrittlement causing re-oilthewireduring rewind.
brittle failure. Do not leave any wireline
down-hole during shutdown.
Wire winding practice:

Wire damage may be caused at variousstages in windingon to service reel from supply .--...
reel or in rewind during use. To ensure good spooling,it is recommended that an I
intermediatecapstanisusedbetweenthe supplyreelandwirelineunitdrumto developa
high line tensionwithoutriskofcuttingdown.Practicesare followedinthe runningof
wirelines that have to strike a balance between operationalconvenience and wire life.
To the user some of the possibilitieslisted here may seem unlikelyto happen, but they
are given so that ifany should occur their significancewillnot be ignored.
I I
- 1) Uneven winding:
Variabletension and/or
poor control of wire
Wire pullsdown between Maintain a regular traverse
adjacent turns, preventing of the wire across the full
~ traversing the barrel. free running,causing snags width of the barrel to give
and possiblywire breaks. uniform build up of layers.
Coarse pitch and tension in
wind on to reel will minimise
risk of wire pulling down.
(but see 5 overleaf).
~
I
2 - 9
WIRE LINE
()
Fault and cause Result Correction
2) Loops, bends:
Insufficient braking on Over-running with risk of Whatever the method used
supply reel. snarls forming in looped to keep the wire under
wire. Even if the snarl is tension during winding, a
straightened out by hand brake on the supply reel is
there can be a significant desirable so that too much
reduction in strength. slack wire does not appear
Over-run wire may be between two reels.
pulled over a reel flange
and be sharply bent.
3) Wire abrasion:
Rubbing on ground, Reduction in wire strength Keep tension and always
caused by slack wire. as a result of loss of wind from 'top' to 'top' of
sectional area of steel. reels.
(\ In service, rewind on top of
reel.
Rubbing on reel side, Reduction in sectional area. Angle of wire during

caused by incorrect traverse and total traverse
traversing. must be controlled.
4) 'Wild' wire:
Caused by slack winding Wire may be difficult to Always wind wire in the
or by reversing the control and lead to tangles direction of its natural
natural curvature of the and snagging. curvature. Never wind from
wire. the top of one reel to the
underside of the other.
5) Wire indentation:
Caused by 'cross-cutting' Reduction in strength. Avoid excessive tension in
between adjacent layers winding and excessive
of wire. 'jarring' when operating
down-hole tools.
(' 6) Friction on pulleys:
Embrittlement of wire
Possible during 'jarring'. Avoid excessive 'jarring'.
surface.
Cutting back the wire
between uses minimises
the chance of cumulative
damage.
Shock loads can produce
high surges out of all
...,j proportion to the assumed
loads on the wire and may
cause failure.
~ 7) Fatigue cracks:
Caused by repeated Wire failure, particularly if Ratio of pulley and wire
bending under high other factors noted above, diameters should preferably
stress. are contributing. be 120: 1, to reduce the
significance of bending
stresses.
n
2 - 10
BRAIDED LINE
I/' ,
The use of multistrand wireline for "heavy" fishing jobs has become more popular over the
last few years. Because of the forces involved, a well is sometimes killed before the fishing
job is attempted. The most common size of wire used in 3/16 in, with occassional use of 1/4".
The conventional 3/16 in cable comprises 16 (9 + 6 + 1) strands. The core and the right
-lay inner wires are thinner than the left-lay outer wires. By using right and left lay the
twisting tendency of the wire under load is prevented.
0.04 in
Max breaking - 5062 lb (2250 DaN) for LP.S.
Working load - 4000 lb (1778 DaN) for LP.S.
.~~
3/:6 in n
3/16 in CABLE 0.03 in
A few years ago a British Ropes subsidiary introduced Dyform cable. Around the single centre
core are nine thinner right-lay wires, the outer wires are also right-lay, but thicker. The
finished cable is pulled through a die, and by doing this the following improvements are made.
- 20070increase in breaking load, because there is more steel in the same
diameter
- Smooth externalperiphery and closer tolerance of outside diameter, reducing
leakage at the stuffing box
- Higher crush resistance because of the increased steel content of the cable
Low twist tendency because of the Dyform process.
Max breaking - 6300 lb (2800 DaN) ~

Working load - 4800 lb (2133 DaN)
3/16 in ~
3/16 in DYFORM CABLE
~ CAUTION: Never carry out gas cutting, or welding operations near spools of wireline. Heat
or metal spray coming in contact with the wire could significantly change the
condition of the steel and cause early failure in use.
Never electric arc weld on a wireline unit with wire spooled on the drum. Serious
weakening of the wireline will occur.
r')
2 - 11
STANDARD WIRELINE COUNTER
()
The wirelinecounter isan essential component which accurately displays the depth of the wire-
line tools as they are run into the well.They are available to read metres or feet.
The most common design (refer page 2 - 13for details) is the standard counter-head.
Pressure Wheel
(' Counter Wheel
Pressure Wheel
For use with solid wireline (Slickline) up to and including 0.092" the wire is wrapped once around
the counter.
For use with braided line and slickline greater than 0.092 wire passes straight through and is
" held by one pressure wheel only.
For Braided line the following design is most common. A weight indicator is often incorporated
to measure the deflection force on the middle sheave.
Counter Wheel
- Pivot
Weight Indicator Cell
~ Tension
Pressure Wheels
r:
2 - 12
~
AYLOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
WIRELINE COUNTERHEAD LIMITED
'J
This design, in its various forms, is the most commonly used counter for solid wireline operations.
Before use check the following:-

Counter wheel is free to rotate
Rotation is being transmitted freely to the odometer.
Direction of rotation is correct.
Cable is not kinked.
Odometer is fully re-engaged after zeroing.
~ {jf rr0 ~I '!~

T fI
--1-
~-~ '~
./-~
~-
-
@ ~
~
.~ ~.I~£ 16 . I J
~ /' "'.
l~.J'" ~
ITEM
V
DESCRIPTION
"" "
@
OTY
'-: '~
1
2
WHEEL ASSY SHEAVE 0.092 IN DIA LINE MEASURES FEET
WHEEL ASSY PRESSURE 0.092 IN DIA LINE
1
2
It is essential that counter wheel matches
3 SPINDLE FOR SHEAVE WHEEL (DIRECT DRIVE) 1 the line diameter in use. An wheel of the
4 NUl'HEX-JAM-7/16-20 NF-PL 2
5 NUl'ELASTIC sroP-5/8-18 NF-PL 1 incorrect diameter, or a worn wheel, will
6 PLATE GUIDE BLOCK 2
give an unacceptable accumulated error,
~
7 BOLT TENSION BLOCK ID FRAME 2
8 SCREW-RH-MACH# 10-32NFx 3I8-PL 2 especially in deep wells.
9 FRAME-HEAD ASSY 1
10 BOLl'ARM ID BLOCK' 2
11 PIN-ROLL-1/8 x 5/8-#59-028-125-0625 2
12 COLLAR.:rENSIONBOLT 2 Counter wheel diameters:
13 BLOCK TENSION 2
14 BLOCK-SPINDLE& GUIDE-PRESSUREWHEEL 2
15 ENCLOSE BLOCK (FOR CABLE DRIVE) 1 7" Nominal for: 0.082/0.0921ine
16
17
BEARING-BALL-8503-.668B x 1.5740.0. x .563 W
RING-SPACER-OUTSIDE
2
1
16"Nominal for: 0.105/0.108/0.125
18 KEY-STEEL-# 5 WOODRUFF 1 & braided line
19
20
SPINDLE FOR SHEAVE WHEEL (CABLE DRIVE)
BEARING FOR PRESSURE WHEEL
1
2
J
21 SCREW-RH-MACH-# 10-32 NF 4
2 - 13
WIRE LINE UNIT
The wireline winch is your single most important piece of equipment. Its relia-
bility can be extended by making basic checks of oil and diesel levels etc. a habit
EACH TIME YOU RIG UP.
BEFORE STARTING CHECK THE FOLLOWING POINTS DAILY
Engine - Oil Level

- Water Level
- Fan belt (condition and tension)
- Battery fluid level.
- DIESEL
- Check Emergency Shut Down not tripped.
POWER PACK - Hydraulic Oil Level (should be above 1 12 full).
r~ REEL PACK - Ensure gear in neutral
- HandbrakeON
- Check drive chain tension - adjust as necessary.
Observe routine maintainance schedules which will prolong the life of

your equipment and minimize breakdowns on location. Maintenance is based on the
following guidelines:
50 hours - Change engine oil clean or change filters (oil, fuel, air)
150 hours - Grease and adjust drive chain
- Grease hydraulic motor bearing.
- Grease drum and drive shaft bearings.
500 hours - Change hydraulic oil and filters.
('\
You should know how to do basic maintenance and solve minor engine faults.
Everyone should be able to bleed diesel to the injectors in the "unlikely" event
that the unit runs out of fuel or has an airlock.
The following explanation/diagrams refer to a "Cameo" type unit which has a 2-way
and 4-way valve in the circuit. New Camco units, and many others use a 4-way valve
- and hydraulic relief valve only.

REMEMBER: Select direction with 4-way valve and use hydraulic relief valve and
I gears to control tension and sp~ed. 4-way valve SHOULD
used in partially shifted position.

NOT be
('
2 -14
HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
~
I
A. Refer to Hydraulic Circuit Diagram p 1-36
To follow the path of the hydraulic oil through the circuit start at the hydraulic
oil tank in the lower left corner.
(1) Oil is gravity fed to the hydraulic pump.
(11) The pump is a positive displacement vane type connected directly to the
output shaft of the diesel engine.
(m) From the pump, oil is fed through the high pressure hose to the Reel Unit.
NOTE: (R2V Relief Valve will dump pressure in excess of 1500 psi back to
return line).
'\
(IV)
,
R2V Relief Valve on Reel Unit is set to maximum (1500 psi) but can be
manually overridden by hydraulic bypass valve on control panel.
THIS CONTROL DETERMINES PRESSURE AVAILABLE AT THE
MOTOR i.e: FORCE ON THE WIRELINE.
(V) Main supply of oil is fed to the 4-way valve which determines
the direction of oil flow through the remainder of the circuit.
On Low Pressure Return :
(1) Returning oil passes through an oil cooler.
(11) From the cooler it passes through a micro filter - 3/4" Choke on filter
bypass ensure a portion of the oil constantly flows through filter.
(m) Oil returns to tank.
f)
CAUTION : If hydraulic oil level is permitted to drop insufficient retention

time will elapse prior to oil recirculating. This may result in trapped
air bubbles circulating through system. This will cause cavitation (noise)
in the system and will result in immediate loss of power.
- If not rectified immediately damage l:an occur to expensive hyaraulic

components.
~ ~ -~
2 -15
~ r-
- SUCTION
HIGH PRESSURE
LOW PRESSURE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,-- - - - - -,
]
BRAKE
2-WAY
'T
,:
.Li
i.) 0
-
CONTROLPANEL ~ ~~~~ONS
L. /
PRESSURE
GAUGE
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --,
MANUAL
~
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
"'"'"
I I I I
;J I I I
u I
OILCOOLER LP.
HOSE
:
I
~ I
"'"'"
u I I
,
I I I
u I .
"'"'"
I I I CHECK I
~ I I I VALVE I I.D
j I I I .......
~ I I I I
Q I I I I N
~ I I I I
== I I I I
~ I I I I
I REUEF I REUEF I
~ I VALVE VALVE I
"'"'"
~ I (1500psi) : (~anUal) I
~ I I I I
~ I I I I
J HYDRAUUC I I SH~~ I
I OIL I : OPEN ,)""" I
I TANK I I "I
I I I 2-WAY I
I VALVE I
I I H.P. I I
1';1'0 DIESEL I HOSE I I
L POWERPACK
J D r i" ENGINE
JI I REELUNIT
L
I
J
{; c c~
-- --~-
C~ I --.-
~ I
SUCTION CONTROL PANEL ~ ~~~7~ONS ~
2-WAY ~
HIGH PRESSURE ". ~ 4-VV,/
U .i MANUAL
LOW PRESSURE l' PRESSURE
- BRAKE
] (2)
PRESSURE
GAUGE
cfI
~
~ ADJUSTMENT
~
e
, , r ,
I I I I z
I OILCOOLER I LP. : '
z~
I HOSE I
z
I I
~
I , I I ~
I I I I z
I 1 I I
IV
I I I I e
Cl)
~
I I I
..... I 1 I MANUAL I Z
-J 1
I I PRESSURE I ~
I I ADJUSTMENT W
I CHOKE I I l
==
I I I ~
1 I
II
0
I FILTER RELIEF I RELIEF
VALVE VALVE
II
I
(1500psi) '(ManUal) 4-WAY I
I I I VALVE
I I I I ~~~
~
! HYDRAULIC : : OPEN ~ Cl)
lOlL I I I
I TANK HYDRAULIC
PUMP I: PRESSURE / '0' I
: I I GAUGE 2-WAY I
II I H.P. I
VALVE:
I
1';1'" DIESEL I HOSE I
L
I POWERPACK D r r ENGINE J
I REELUNIT
IL______----------------------- J .~
t:~~o
~~~"'
c.\ s~a
:) ) J y I ~
RUNNING IN
r;
B. RUNNING IN - Using Hydraulics to control speed.
Refer to diagram on p. 1-37
Set controls on panel as follows:

1. Put 4-way valve in NEUTRAL (centre position)
2. Put 2-way valve in SHUT position (towards Operator).
3. Engage top gear.
4. Release Brake
5. Ease 2-way valve towards OPEN position
(away from Operator) to control drum speed.
('\
"-'
fup.1anation of Oil Flow
(1) The weight of the tool string rotates the motor (now acting as a "pump" )
(11) Oil is drawn through check valve "C: Oil can also be drawn through
4-way valve which is open to all ports. (Oil will automatically be drawn
from the line of least resistance).
(m) Oil output rate is controlled by the 2 - way valve which directly controls
drum speed.
In SHUT position (towards operator) no oil can pass, so drum is stationary.

In OPEN position (away from operator) full oil flow, so drum will rotate
freely.
('"-' SPEED is controlled by varying the volume of oil permitted to pass
through the 2 - way valve.
('
2 - 18
PULLING OUT
-~--
n
c. PULLING OUT
Refer to diagram on p 1 - 40.
Set controls on panel as follows:

1. Back out Relief Valve UA' .
2. Pull both control levers back towards operator.

3. Engage required gear (1 - 2 - 3)
4. Screw Relief Valve UA' IN until pressure just begins to register
on panel hydraulic pressure gauge.
5. Release brake and adjust hydraulic pressure to control line force. 1)
Exp)anation of Oil Flow:
(1) When relief Valve UAu is backed- out all oil from power pack is by-
passed to return line.
(u) As relief valve UA' is screwed in oil is forced through the 4-

way valve,
(m) 4-way valve position (towards operator) directs oil through the check
valve, through the motor, back through 4-way valve to
return line.
(IV) In SHUT position (towards operator) 2 -way valve forces all of the oil
through motor.
f}
As this valve is opened oil bypasses motor (thus slowing drum speed)
and returns to the tanks.
-I
I
'}
2 - 19
SUCTION
CONTROL PANEL ~ ~~~~~ONS ~
HIGH PRESSURE
2-WAY
\ ~ 4-WAY .
LOW PRESSURE
]i 0
. ~~
~ I MANUAL
PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
BRAKE PRESSURE
'GAUGE
~
1- -- -
I
- - --I
I
r
I
- - -- - - ,
I
I OILCOOLER I LP. : I
I HOSE I
I I'
~ I I I I
~ I 11 I
0 I I I I
I I I I 0
~ I I I I
N
z
~ I I I I N
~ I I I I
~ I I I I
~ I I I I
~ I I
I
I
RELIEF II
FILTER RELIEF
VALVE I VALVE I
I
(1500psi) I (Manual) I
I I I
I
I I I
I I I I
I HYDRAULIC I I I
lOlL I I I
I TANK I : I
I I I 2-WAY I
I VALVE I
I I H.P. I I
1,;"" DIESEL I HOSE I I
I POWER PACK D i' r ENGINE I IL_-,
REEL UNIT I
L --3 J
["I c (, Cl
I -.
--- I - - --
SUCTION CONTROL PANEL ~ ~~~~~ONS.~

-
2-WAY ~
HIGH PRESSURE
MANUAL
LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE
ADJUSTMENT
BRAKE PRESSURE
, - --I r
l~ GAUGE
- --- - - ---,
I I I I
I OIL COOLER I LP. I I
I HOSE '
I !
I
I I I I >
I , I I ~
I I I , ~
N
I I I I ~
Z
I I I IN I ~
N
..... II I I ... I
I I ~\ I ~
I I I \::, I
I I I I ~
I I I I Z
I FILTER RELIEF RELIEF I
I
VALVE VALVE I
II (1500psi) II (Manual)
I I
I I I I
I I I I
I HYDRAULIC I I I
lOlL I I + I
II TANK HYDRAULICPUMP I I I
I
I I 2-WAY I
I ~~E I
I I H.P. I I
1,;/" DIESEL I HOSE I I
I POWERPACK D f( ENGINE I I REELUNIT I
L 3 L J
,) I. ) ) ->,
~
AYLOR
RAINING
'.' ONSULTANTS
JARRING D'OWN .,. LIMITED
(\
'"
D. RUNNING IN - USING ENGINE e.g. FOR JARRING DOWN.
Refer to Diagram on p I - 41.
Set control on panel as follows:

1. Engage required gear - check 2 way valve is back (towards operator)
2. Push 4-way valve forward (away from operator)
3. Push 2-way valve forward while releasing the brake.
4. Note: Relief Valve must be adjusted to provide desired force (speed).
Exp)anation of Oil Flow.

r"\
(1) 4-way valve directs oil flow to rotate motor in reverse direction.
(n) Check valves prevent return of oil to tank.
(m) Exhaust from motor is controlled by 2-way valve which thus controls
drum speed.
CAUTI~: Excessive speed in downward direction can cause wire to

unspool off drum faster than gravity will cause tools
to fall, or jars to close.
OBSERVE HAY PULLEY CAREFULLY WIDLE JARRING DOWN
GEARBOX PAITERN:
('
1-r-R towards
operator
3...J..-2 !
- I
(1) Engage Gears slowly - Mnudging- hydraulic controls if necessary to

mesh gears.
~~ (n)
.
Keep all braking I jarring movements smooth to avoid shock

I
loading wire.
(m) While pulling out reduce hydraulic pressure frequently to avoid
ove.milllif tools hang up.
(' NffiE: This gear pattern may vary with each type of unit
2 - 22
PROJECT 10 - WIRELINE UNIT
f'"
List the DAILY pre - start check points.

(I)
(11)
(111)
(IV)
(v)
(VI)
2. If the diesel engine will not start, what 2 things should you check first?
(I)
"
(11)
3. How many forward gears does the wireline unit have?
4. If the engine runs out of diesel what must you do to re - start?
5. What is the purpose of the "4 - way valve" in the hydraulic circuit?
r')
6. What is the purpose of the "2 - way valve" in the hydraulic circuit?
'I
2 - 23
"2S EMERGENCY TREATMENT
('. .
1. PUT ON BREATHING APPARATUS BEFORE ENTERING DANGER
AREA TO RESCUE A VICTIM OF H 2 S.
2. Move the victim to fresh air at once.
3. H2S is heavier than air so will be thicker at ground level.
4. If victim is not breathing, start artificial respiration and keep' it up until
he starts breathing or until a doctor arrives.
5. H2S in strong concentrations can kill your sense of smell instantly so your nose
is not an adequate warning device.
(' 6. Summon medical help.
7. If available, use a resuscitator.
8. Use your H 2 S monitors.
9. TOXICITY TABLE
ppm %
1 .0001 Can smell.
10 .001 Allowable exposure - 8 hours.
Danger!.ever - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
100 .01 Kills smell in 3 - 15 minutes
bums eyes and throat.
("'
~ 500 .05 Loses sense of reasoning and
balance, Respiratory disturbances
in 2 - 15 minutes.
700 ,07 Becomes unconcious quickly.
WOO .1 Unconscious at once. Permanent
brain damage may result.
~ POISON GAS
(1
Wear your breathing apparatus
2- 24
...
PROJECT 11 - H2S SAFETY
r.
From class discussion, manual and audio-visual presentation answer the following ques-
tions:-
1. What does H2S smell like?
2. Should you move an unconscious work mate to fresh air BEFORE or AFTER putting
on your breathing apparatus?
3. Explain your answer to Question 2.

"
4. Is H2S visible?
5. Will your nose always provide adequate warning of the presence of H2S gas?
6. Why is a gas detector necessary when working in potential H2S areas.
7. Is H2S heavier or lighter than air?
~
8. Would it be wise to jump into the cellar if H2S is detected?
'1
2 - 25
L
SECTION 3-TOOLSTRING COMPONENTS
r'.
Toolstring 3 - 2
Rope Sockets I Wireline Knot 3 - 3
3 I 16 Rope Socket 3- 5
Stem 3- 6
Lead - filled Stem 3- 7
Mechanical Jars 3- 8
Hydraulic Jars 3- 9
0 j
Spring Jars 3 - 11
Toolstring Preparation 3 - 13
Fishing Neck Sizes 3 - 14
Gauge Cutters 3 - 16
Knuckle Joints/Swivels 3 - 17
Blind Box 3 - 18
Impression Block (LLB.) 3 - 19
Swage 3 - 20
(~
1
Tubing End Locator 3 - 21
Quick Lock Type Connection 3 - 22
PROJECTS
~
Project 12 - Toolstring 3 - 15
Project 13 - Service Tools 3 - 23
('
3 - 1
TOOL STRING COMPONENTS
r
The basic toolstring is shown below, and is used most commonly in 1-112" and 1-7/8"
diameters.
Rope Socket
TOOL STRINGTHREADS
Dimensions Name
(1
1-I" 15 I 16" x 1Otpi 5 I 8 Sucker
2 Rod Thread
0'- Stem
1-7" 1-1" x 10 tpi 3 I 4 Sucker

8 16 Rod Thread
FISHING
NECK SIZE
. .
- Mechanical Jar
1-1
2
1.375
H
1-7" 1.750
8
{'
0
-.i
~ - Knuckle Joint (Optional)
0
.
A
3 - 2
ROPE SOCKETS
IJ
'"
3 Types in most common use:
(1) 0.092 regular knot type

(11) 0.092 no - knot type (tear drop)
(111) 3 I 16 braided
(1) 0.092 regular knot type.

FL T TOP SO THAT
/ CLTTER BAR WILL
PEEN WIRELlNE
i NC
FISHING NECK
SPRING
B
BODY
SPRING
-:SUPPORT
DISC
n
=
=..
A
c
A
D
The wire must first be run through the stuffing box. Then pass the end
of the wire through the wireline socket body, spring and spring support. Place the
disc in a vice and run the wire down between the jaws, behind the disc, and then
bend the end of the wire into a loop, or similar shape, that will be comfortable to
the grip. Hold the wire about five inches above the disc by wrapping wire around
the left forearm and gripping wire with gloved left hand. The disc should contact
the wire approximately ten or twelve inches from the loop.
Now, holding the wire taut, start bending the wire about the disc. The wire
f\
should go around the disc once, then be wrapped around itself, making sure there is
a minimum of slack in the wire when starting to wrap. These wraps should be made smooth
and even and should hug the wire closely, with the coils touching one another
(B). Continue wrapping in this manner until about nine or ten coils are made.
Now move the wire in the direction shown in order to twist off the free end
- (C). Be careful to keep the loop pointed in the same direction or slightly
twisted during this part of the operation so that the torque is focused on
the end of the last coil. The wire should twist off cleanly, presenting a neater
appearance, and should be a far better job than could be accomplished with a file
~ or other tools (D).
Place the disc crosswise in the vice or pliers and straighten the knot as well
as possible. Now, using the wire, pull the knot into the socket and check to see
that the socket swivels freely. The socket is now ready to be attached to the
upper end of a stem. 'l
=---
3 - 3
~
~ AYLOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
ROPE SOCKETS LIMITED
-~-~-~~-
r') (n) 0.092/0.105/0.108 no-knot type - Sometimes known as tear drop type because of
shapeof thimble. ~
BODY
--- THIMBLE EYE
FISHING NECK
('
THIMBLE
A ons TYPE
(\
NOTE:
FISHING Unlike the disc in the knot type
USE KNUCKLE JOINT NECK
rope socket, the groove in the
AS SWIVEL BELOW thimble of these sockets is not
- THIS TYPE OF
ROPE SOCKET.
BODY
deep enough to accommodate the
total thickness of the wire-
line. As the security of the
~ THIMBLE
wireline depends upon its being
"pinched" between thimble
and body, care must be taken
to ensure the correct size
of socket is selected for
the wireline in use.
('\
"'- B ALTERNATIVE'TEARDROP'TYPE
---
3-4
3/16 ROPE SOCKET
()
(in) 3 I 16"Slip-type braided line socket.
Manufactured by Bowen, this design is available for braided line up to 5 i 16"

diameter.
BODY PATHOF
~ A ALTERNA TI VE
SLIPS
WIRELlNE ~B
t)
SET SCREW FISHING NECK
There are two types of slip, the overload release type and the plain.
The overload type (A) is designed to cause the line to break under severe loading
at a specific percentage of the full strength of the line. Five breaking strength
slips are available, for 50%, 60%, 70%, 80% and 90% of line strength.
The plain type (B) is designed much the same as the overload type, except that
it does not have the overload release feature. Experience indicates that the line n
will usually break near the top end of these slips at approximately 90% of the breaking
strength of the line.
Always use a- knuckle joint between this rope socket and the stem to provide
swivel action. Toolstrings tend to twist as you run in the hole and if a knuckle
joint is not used this rotation is transfered to the wire, causing addi-
tional strain.
')
3-5
STEM
Sometimes refered to as ..sinker-bar" , stem provides weight to the toolstring

to enable the wire to run into the well against well pressure and stuffing box friction.
A ..rule of thumb" to determine the weight of solid steel stem is :
Stem o.D. 2 x 8/3 Wt (lb) per foot.
r Increasing stem weight increases impact force delivered by jars.

However do not" overweight""toolstrings as excessive mass dampens
..feel"'and premature shearing of pins can occur.
Flats for wrenches are provided and should be used. NEVER grip
on fishing neck or this will damage the sharp edge.
All connections should be clean and dry. DO NOT LUBRICATE

TOOLSTRING THREADS -
they will unscrew downhole during
extended jarrin~.
Following chart gives details of common Otis stem:
n PART NOM. THREAD

FISH
NECK MIN. MAX.
LGTH
APPROX WEIGHT
NUMBER SIZE CONN. REAcH O.D.
O.D. Ib kg DaN
44B2 1\-2" Isll6-10 1.375 1.44 1.50 2' 10.3' 4.7 4.6
44B42 1\-2" ls/16-10 1.375 1.44. 1.50 3' 15.4 7 6.9
44B43 1\-2" lSj16-10 1.375 1.44 1.50 5' 25.7 11.7 11.5
-
44B3 Pis" 1Y16-10 1.750 1.44 1.88 2' 17.9 8.15 8
44B44 1\1s" 1V16-1O 1.750 1.88 3' 26.8 12.2 12
1.44.
44B45 Pis" 1V16-10 1.750 1.44 1.88 5' 44.9 20.4 20
44B7 Pis" Is/16-10 1.375 1.44 1.88 5' . .44.9 20.4 20
~
Also available in 1%" & 2112"sizes.
Note: Jar weights equivalent to 3' stem of same size.
N + 9;81 = kg .
N + 10 = Deca Newton = DaN
n kg x 2.2 = lb.
3- 6
LEAD-FILLED STEM
A.,
To provide greater weight for the same diameter and length Otis manu-
~
,~
facture "lead - filled stem" . This stem has regular steel pin and box and a
tubular steel outer barrel. The inside is filled with lead to provide maximum
density.
This stem is used primarily to run flowing pressure surveys to
obtain maximum weight and minimum cross - sectional area to protect
against "floating" or being blown up the hole by pressure surges.
Other high density, heavy weight stem which is available includes:

tungsten, uranium and mallory filled (mercury alloy).
DO NOT USE LEAD - FILLED STEM FOR JARRING as lead will

tend to creep downwards and spljt outer barrel. r"""'\
I
Followin~ chart shows Otis lead~filled stem part numbers:
Approx. Weight
Part No. G.D. Connection Fish Neck Length lb kg DaN
45A017 11/2" 15/16-10 1.375" 5' 41.7 19 18.6
44A018 F/g" 11f16-10 1.750" 3' 24.6 11.2 11
44A019 F/g" lV16-10 1.750" 6' 48 22.4 22
"
-~
0
~
1)
3- 7
MECHANICAL JARS
Jars are a vital component in every toolstring. (except when runnIng

pressure surveys on wireline).
0 It is essential that the operator can recognise the precise opening and
closing point of the jars on the Martin Oecker weight indicator.
The force required downhole to manipulate tools and shear pins is

generated by the impact of the jars. If the jars are not being operated
correctly or if jar action is lost then very little force can be exerted
on the tools.
From the formula, F = ma (Force = Mass x Acceleration) it can be seen

('\ that the impact force can be increased by increasing
r (1) Stem weight (Mass)
IJ)
..... (n) Speed at impact (Acceleration)
::0
0
~ Stem weight is fixed after the tools are run in the well but speed can be
varied.
Jar down action is limited to maximum speed that gravity will close jars. .
In highly deviated wells and wells with thick viscous fluid downwards
jarring may be severely restricted.
Jar up action is more effective (with the same stem weight) as

speed can be increased by increasing spooling speed at the wireline
unit and by the use of long stroke jars (CAUTION - prone to "scis-
r soring in large bore wells).
(Hence it will be observed that shear up' tools have larger shear p'ins).
Following chart shows jarsl(lwith the Otis part No)
Part No. 0.0. Connection Fish Neck Closed Length Stroke

44AO12 1 - 1/ 4 15/16-10 1.187 38" 20"
44A02 1-1/2 15/16-10 1.375 38" 20"

~
44A04 1-1/2 15/16-10 1.375 48" 30"
44A03 1- 7 18 1 - I /16 - 10 1.750 38 - 1 1 8" 20"
44AO5 1-7/8 1 - 1 116 - 10 1.750 38 - 1/ 8" 30"

l"
3 - 8
HYDRAULIC JARS
('
Hydraulic jars, manufactured by Bowen and Otis, are placed between the stem and
mechanical jars in the toolstring when extra jar up action is required or anti-
cipated. This is especially important when conventional jar up action is dif-
ficult because of deviation or high viscosity well fluid.
Sizes: Available in I - I I 4': I - I I i: I - 3 I 4~
AL WAYS INCLUDE MECHANICAL JARS - provide downward jar action to shear
off if necessary. (run with shear down tool).
Hydraulic Oil - Jar Lube T.S. 190 or 10 W 30.

Oil viscosity may be varied to suit downhole temperatures. Jars should operate
after approx. 30 sec. of pull.
NEVER PLACE HYDRAULIC JARS BELOW MECHANICAL JARS

if hydraulic jars become "gassed up" (especially in H.P gas) they will act as
r
a shock absorber. In their correct position mechanical jars can still be used
to shear downwards to release tool.
°Reration - refer to p 3-10

A. Upward pull on wire compresses oil. Slow, controlled leakage past piston ~
permits jars to open slowly. Energy stored in "stretched" wire.

B. Piston reaches increased I. D. - no further resistance as oil rapidly bypasses piston.
C. Upward Impact as piston strikes top of cylinder.
D. Jars close under stem weight as check valve in piston permits easy fluid by-pass.
NOTE: Balance piston (green) to compensate for volume loss as piston shaft ",.
moves out.
CAUTION: AL WAYS CLOSE JARS as toolstring :s lowered from lubricator

BEFORE LAYING TOOLS DOWN.
Failure to do so may result in :-
- (I)
(2)
Bent I Cracked piston shaft.
Piston shaft* exposed to corrosion I damage.
~
I
* This surface is hard chromed to ensure seal against 0 - Rings. Any pitting will
impair operation of jars.
3 - 9
l
HYDRAULIC JARS
f' A B C D
Line tension beginning When fluid by-pass Upward Impact Resetting - stem weight
to open jars against area increases causes oil to pass
oil resistance piston moves upward check valve to return
RAPIDLY to upper cylinder
A
t
t ~
r Top Sub
~
----- ~ Piston
Seals
-----
/ ~ Cylinder
Piston
Rod
Check
Valve
0 Balance
Piston
~'
- DETAIl.;:
('
3 - 10
SPRING JARS
".....
(a) I
Fishing Neck
Roll pin
.
Jar Rod
Fluid Bypass holes

Main Housing
' DETAIL
r
I I
1- .
l
I
/ L--
Striking surface
(against top of
Main Housiing)
Line tension being
increased [similar to
About to release. -
trip keys about
I r-T -rl :
I
I
L_~ I--J
I I
I
I initial, static position]. to retract
I Ri
I I I
I Trip Keys
I
1
I
I
,- Disc Springs (c) (d)
(Belleville Type)
I ~
I
Spring Rod
Trip Housing
Trip Bushing
Cocking Spring
Fluid Bypass Holes
Bushing Nut
Bottom Sub
Limiter Pin Grub Screw

Released - Jar Rod Resetting --Weight
~i
I
r'-'-'1
i
i
i
i
I
Release Settings
accelerating upwards of sterm compressing
"cocking spring".
i (lbs)
i
,J
Calibration Key
"
3- 11
SPRING JARS
n
~,.
Spring Jars are an alternative to hydraulic jars to provide upward impact force. As with hy-
draulic jars they are ,installed in the toolstring between the stem and mechanical jars. Note:
Mechanical jars should always be included to enable downward jarring to shear if upward
jarring does not achieve the desired result.
Principle of Operation
An upward pull is applied via the wireline. With the pulling/fishing tool latched the line tension
is stored until a mechanical release mechanism retracts & permits rapid upward movement,
which creates an upward impact force.
Some designs permit adjustment of the release mechanism which alters the amount of tension
required to "fire" the jars. Hence the magnitude of the resulting impact is variable.
Sequenceof operation - Refer to diagramson p 3-11

r; (a) Increasing line tension moves "Jar Rod" upwards from its static position, slowly compres-
sing main "Disc Spring" via the "Trip Keys" and "Trip Housing". Amount of the tension
required is adjustable by rotating "Spring Rod" with "Calibration Key".
The "Jar Rod" & "Trip Housing" ate gripped together by the "Trip Keys".
(b) As the "Trip Keys" move upwards with increasing line tension they move outwards (ex-
pand) into the recess in the "Main Housing".
(c) "Jar Rod" is released and moves rapidly upwards to strike the inside of "Main Housing",
thus creating upward impact proportional to mass (stem weight) above jars and velocity
at impact. "Trip Housing" returns to central position as soon as "Jar Rod" releases.
(d) To reset jars back to original position (1) the weight of the stem forces "Jar Rod", and
"Trip Housing" down by compressing the "Cocking Spring". This causes "Trip Keys"
to retract into the lower recess in the "Main Housing". "Trip Keys" relatch groove on
"J ar Rod" and jarring cycle and be repeated.
Advantages of using Spring Jars.

", No a-Ring seals to leak and allow internal pressure buildup.
Fluid bypass permits free access of well fluids through jars.
Generally greater upward impact than comparable hydraulic jars.
Note: Use of fishing tools with greater area of "dog to fishing neck" contact is advisable.
Design Variations
Use of balls or segments in release mechanism.
Position of release mechanism (middle or bottom).
Adjustable release tension.
Use of Coil Springs or "Belleville" Disc Springs.
NOTE: It is advisable to close jars before laying down toolstring to prevent bending of
~ "Jar Rod".
n
3 -12
TOOLSTRING PREPARATION
r
Before assembling a toolstring the following checks should be carried out:
(a) Inspect the rope socket for burrs around the wire hole which could damage the wire
(b) Inspect all box and pin threads for damage
(c) Inspect fishing neck profiles for burrs and wrench damage
(d) Inspect mechanical jars for buckling, bending, bowing, and check for smooth operation
(e) Check hydraulic jars for leaks and correct operation
(f) Check integrity of roll pins in knuckle joints, and freedom of movement of ball
in socket.
n "-
Rectify any faults found, before assembling the string.
While it is inconceivable that wireline tools and equipment could be used

without sustaining some' wear and I or damage, it is inexcusable to carry' on
using them in a badly worn or damaged state.
Although all tools and downhole equipment should be inspected and tested
in base workshops before issue, they must also be thoroughly inspected on site
before and after use.
For Examp)e :
While a broken coil spring contained in an annular space will doubtless still
function, its operating pressure will be impaired. On the other hand a broken or
distorted leaf spring will almost certainly prove useless. ,, ,
. I
Inability to locate a running tool in a landing nipple, for example, could be caused
by weak springs in the locking mandrel. Otis recommend that the key springs in
their "X" and "R" type locking mandrels are replaced each time the mandrel
is run and pulled, to ensure the proper location of the locking keys.
When disassembling tools and equipment incorporating heavy duty springs, always
ensure that the correct jigs and tools are utilized, as the stored energy within
a strong spring can be considerable.
n
~'
3 - 13
STANDARD FISHING NECK SIZES
r TOOLSTRING SIZE
I NOMINAL
: TOOL SIZE TO LATCH
r
I - 11 2" I
I
I 2" Pulling Tool

I
I - 3 18" --. I - I 1 2" I
I
('
I
1-7/8"
I
+-1-3/4"---+ I
I 2 - I 12"' Pulling Tool
I
..- I - 7 1 8" -+-
I
(' J
I
I
I
2.313
I
3" Pulling Tool
.
I
I
I
I
I
~
\
3 - 14
PROJECT 12 - TOOLSTRING
r. I
I. Name the 4 components required to make up the standard 0.092 knot.

(I)
(11)
(m)
(IV)
2. Mechanical jars can be obtained with what two different stroke lengths?
(I)
(11)
3. Name one advantage and one disadvantage of the long stroke jars
ADVANTAGE """"""""""""""'"
.)
DISADVANTAGE
"""""""""""""""""""""""""""'"...........................
4. How do you know when hydraulic jars require redressing?
5. Give two reasons for CLOSING hydraulic jars before laying them down.
(I)
(11)
6. Fill in the correct sizes in the following chart :
Max. O.D. Fishing Neck Thread

Size: Name:
/\
I - 1/2"
Rope Socket
I - 7 / g'"
I - 1/2"
Stem
I - 7 / g"
I - I I 2"
Mechanical Jars
I - 7 / g"
I - 1/4"
Hydraulic Jars
~ I - 3/4"
I - I / 2"
Knuckle Joints
I - 7 / g"
?- What are the main advantages of spring jars over hydraulic jars? ')
I
I
3 - 15
,
l
GAUGE CUTTER
It is good wireline practice to run a gauge cutter before starting any operation in a well.
Uses:
- to check tubing LO.

- to tag total depth
- to locate nipple LO. and No - Go's.
- to locate restrictions.
- to cut sand, scale, parafin and other
deposits from tubing wall.
- to determine profile of a bridge (run
successively smaller cutters and plot
(0 depth v's size to establish shape of restriction).
'-
When selecting size of gauge cutter care-
fully consider LO. you wish to locate.
ego To tag 3 - 1/2 XN nipple:

Nipple Bore = 2.750"
No go LO. = 2.635"
Therefore gauge cutter must be between these two sizes:
ego 2.7"
r,
- CRITICAL 0.0.
1-0
.
I -~.-
3 - 16
KNUCKLE JOINTS / SWIVELS
I
Knuckle Joints are used to add flexibility to the
I
toolstring especially in deviated holes. They are
usually positioned immediately below the mecha-
I
nical jars. However, if additional flexibility is
required a further knuckle joint can be included
between stem and jars.
Knuckle joints should be used only when neces-

sary. Most knuckle joints permit approx. 15° of
movement each side of the vertical.
Swivels are used beneath braided line rope sockets

to permit toolstring to turn with tightening or
loosening line braids. r
1- Swivels permit approx 1%O of movement each

side of the vertical.
Caution: Knuckle joints should not be used in

place of swivels. If the line breaks, latching a rope
socket with knuckle joint leaning against the tubing
wall can be very difficult. Swivels permit suffi-
cient clearance to latch with fishing tool.
New brands such as those made by Eastern Oil

Tools have a second fishing neck on the lower
section to make retrieval easier in the unlikely
event of the knuckle joint breaking downhole.
.f\
Following chart shows Knuckle joints (with Otis part Nos)
-
.. Part No.
45B06
OD
1-1/4
Fish Neck
1.187
Thread
15/ 16 - 10
Length
10 - 3 / 8"
45B02 1-1/2 1.375 15/ 16 - 10 11 - 7 / 8"
45B03 1-7/8 1.750 1 - 1 / 16 - 10 11 - 1 / 2"
/')/
3 - 17
I
....
BLIND BOX
('
The Blind Box is used when heavy downward jarring is required to dislodge
a fish or push something down the hole, It is flat on the bottom and hardened to
reduce wear and damage,
It is available in a range of sizes to suit the

application,
As a "cutter - bar"' it is made up below a piece

of stem and rope socket and dropped in the
well to cut wire downhole (refer to
"FISHING' section 13,)
f'
-
~
() ,-'
3 - 18
IMPRESSION BLOCK
~
/ \r
I
The Impression Block (L. I. B. - Lead

Impression Block) is similar in appearance
to the blind box but it is filled with lead which
extends below the bottom edge. The
lead is "keyed" in position by a roll
pin or a hex-headed bolt. Either of these
are installed prior to pouring molten lead
inside.
~ to obtain "picture" of down-

hole blockage.
~
eg. : Rope socket - with or without wire.
Prong
Lock Mandrel
Parted tubing
Preparation:
Roughly flatten face with hammer then smooth

with course rasp. Finish with a smooth file
and a piece of steel shear stock rubbed across
face to give "polish" .
indentations in sur-.
hat there is no "overlap" around

s this could hang up in collars when ')
out and dislodge a chunk of lead.
CAUTI'
(/
~
\.
.~
J.
J
J
I
!
I;
3 -1/19
if
SWAGING TOOL
n
A Swaging Tool is used to restore light
collapse in the tubing string.
The O.D. of the swage = tubing drift.

Note fluid by- pass hole to pennit
passage of fluid when OD of swage fills the
tubing I.D.
Always run with HYDRAULIC JARS to enable
operator to jar up out of tubing if the swage
should jam.
(\
(',
~.
('
3 - 20
TUBING END LOCATOR
r
Used to locate the end of the tubing at the time as the completion as cross-referen'ce
check of tubing tally. Used also to correlate tag sand depth acculately from bottom of tubing
(depth known from completion records).
')
TUBING END lOCATOR
Usually has 2 positions for "finger" so that it can be n

used in 2% and 27/8or 31f2and 41f2Tubing
Take care pulling tubing end locator up into lubricator.

After tubing end locator passes out bottom of
tubing spring loaded "finger" / trips to horizontal
position. Pick up to obtain tubing end depth.
Jar up action shears 3116brass pin below "finger" and

allows tool to be removed.
~ CAUTION: Run gauge cutter flfst to ensure

tubing is clear. If tubing end locator has to
be pulled up with "finger .. in running position
it may catch in tubing or collar. Continued
upward movement in this situation will shear pivot
pin and drop "finger" and spring. In some cases
TUBING END lOCATOR the "finger"' has damaged or punctured -1"1
AND SAMPLE BAILER tubing.
3 - 21
QUICK LOCK CONNECTION
A faster method connecting toolstring components

is available using the "quick look connection".
One of the types currently on the market is shown
here.
To connect= The components are pushed together

and rotated 90 degrees. Once engaged the spring
loaded "blade" prevents rotation and release.
Movedown
to lift
blade To release: The blade is retracted, by using a punch
as shown, or by hand on some designs, and the
1 male connection is then rotated 90 degrees and
released.
Advantages are:
- speed of assemblyof toolstring.
- rapid changingof tools for each run.
- higher strength than sucker rod connections.
- wrenches no longer needed to make upjbr.eak
out tools. Therefore no sharp burrs, damage to
tools, or risk of damage to hands.
- prevent possibility of unscrewing downhole.
Blade
to prevent
rotation
('
Male Connection
("\
3 - 22
PROJECT 12 -SERVICE TOOLS
Al
1. List the recommended gauge cutter size for each of the following well
programmes:
(1) Tag 3 - 1 / 2 ,. XN nipple : """"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""'".............................
(11) Tag 2 - 7/8" X - Over below 3 1/2" XN nipple: ........................................
(m) Tag 2 - 7 / 8" XN nipple: .............................................................................................
(IV) Tag sand plug back depth through 2 - 7 / 8" XN : ..............................................

(v) Check drift on 3 - 1/ 2" N 80 tubing: ...................................................................
2. Why is there a hole drilled through a swage?

.('"'.
3. List 2 uses for a blind box:
(I)
(11)
4. Describe procedure to verify end of tailpipe using a tubing end locator.
~
5. To clean out a nipple bore which is suspected to be full of sand, what tool
should be used.
List 2 Precautions when filling and using an LLB.?

J 6.
(I)
-' 7.
(11)
From the Otis Part No. 9P42250 (top pin of 2 - 1 / 2 X Running tool)
we can determine what 2 vital pieces of information
(I)
(11) }
3 - 23
'"'"
SECTION 4 - STANDARD PULLING TOOLS
.
~
Standard Pulling Tools 4-2

Otis R Series 4-4
Otis S Series 4-7

Camco J Series 4 -11
Otis G Series 4 -14
Shear Pin Theory 4-20
0 - Ring Sealing Theory 4 -21
0 Tool Chart 4-22
PROJECTS
Project 14 - Otis R Series 4-9
Project 15 - Otis S Series 4-10
Project 16 - Camco J Series 4 -13

"
I
Project 17 - Otis G Series 4-19
-
~
f\
/
4 - 1
STANDARD PULLING TOOLS
'"
I
Pulling tools are designed to remove various subsurface equipment from the well.
They can only be used to retrieve an item of equipment that has a "standard" fishing neck.
If it is impossible to retrieve the equipment, the pulling tool can be released

by shearing a pin and returned to the surface.
Pulling tools may be designed for either external or internal fishing necks.
Shearing the pin may be achieved by jarring up or down depending on the type
of tool.
Examples: Jar Up, Ext. Fishing Neck - Otis RB, RS, Cameo JUC, JUS
I' Jar Down, Ext. FishingNeck - Otis SB, SS, Cameo JDC, JDS
Jar Up, Int. FishingNeck - Otis OR
Jar Down, Into Fishing Neck - Otis OS, Cameo PRS
Fishing_Necks:
-----
----
20%
;")
oris I BOWEN CAMCO
~
Pulling tools have correspondingly shaped dogs, hence a Camco Pulling Tool should
not be used to fish Oris, or Bowen equipment and vice -
versa as damage to the
Fishing Neck and pulling tool dogs can result.
4 - 2
STANDARD PULLING TOOLS
r\
It is essential that the operator select a tool which shears in the direction
OPPOSITE to which jarring is required to achieve movement downhole Le. : Jar
DOWN action is required to unlock mandrel so JAR UP TO SHEAR tool must be
used.
Therefore the operator must be able to immediately identify a tools shear dire-
ction. As an aid these features should be remembered to differentiate between R
and Stools:
('
-SLEEVE
on
'S'
-
RING- on 'R'
Construction of the tools varies internally.

R - Core is attached directly to top sub .s. - Skirt is attached to top sub
- Skirt is pinned to core. - Core pinned to skirt
, ,
'R' 1nl 5
Shear up Shear down
........
f1
4- 3
...
R SERIES PULLING TOOL
r- I
/
The R Series pulling tools are designed to engage an external fishing neck
and shear to release by upward jar action.
The R Series pulling tool (p 4 - 5) is used in three different versions or types,
which are the Type RB, RS and RJ. The difference in the three types is only in'
the length of the core which is installed in the tool. The Type RB uses the
longest core (i), the Type RS uses the intermediate length core (ii) and the Type
RJ, the shortest core (iii).
The reach of the pulling tool is detennined by the length of the core. Reach
is the distance from the lower end or face of the core down to the engaging shoulder
at the lower end of the pulling tool dogs. Therefore, the Type RB pulling tool,
which has the longest core, would have the shortest reach and the Type RJ pulling
tool, with the shortest core, would have the longest reach. Anyone of these
three tools (Type RB, RS or RJ) may be changed to either of the two other types
(\ simply by changing the core. All other parts of the three types of tools are iden-
tical and are completely interchangeable.
The type of lock mandrel or other downhole device to be retrieved will
detennine which type pulling tool must be used. The required type of pulling tool
will be shown in the relevant section for each type of equipment shown else-
where in this book. Most of the locking mandrels will require a specific type of
pulling tool and no other type pulling tool should be used. Be sure of the proper
type pulling tool before attempting to latch and retrieve any lock mandrel..
All shear up pulling tools have a larger shear pin than the equivalent shear
down tool (refer to mechanical jar action p 3 - 8)
(i) (H) (Hi)
("'.
0 0 0
B 5 J
~ .
f1,
REACH
{'
4 - 4
.']
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION - Refer to diagram p. 4-6
The Pulling Tool is attached to a standard wireline tool string and lowered
into the well. Upon contact with the subsurface control, the lower portion of
the Cylinder passes over the Fishing Neck or pulling flange; the Dogs are forced
outward, then spring inward to engage the pulling flange because of the force of
the Dog Spring. Upward impacts of the Jars are utilized to pull the sub-
surface control from the well.
The Shear Pin should withstand considerable
jarring before shearing. When the Pin shears,
the force in the Cylinder Spring acts between
the Sub and the Cylinder and moves the Core up
in the Cylinder. This moves the Dogs upw~
against the force of the Dog Spring. As the
Dogs move upward, their tapered upper ends
move into the Cylinder,
inward and there-by forcing the Dog's
forcing the Dogs
lower
n
end outward. This causes the Dogs to release their
grip on the pulling flange.
Pinning Tool
used to compress the
spring to replace
shear pin
The Releasing Tool,
Pinning Tool - used to compress the spring to replace shear pin.

~'JI
The followin~ are the R Series tools:
Part Size D.D. Fish Will Top Shear Reach

No. Neck Latch Thread Pin
RB. 4ORB14 1-1/2 1.430 1.187 1.187 15 /16 - 10 1/4 1.265
4ORB17 2 1.770 1.375 1.375 15 /16 - 10 5/16 1.219
4ORB18 2-1/2 2.180 1.375 1.750 15 / 16 - 10 5/16 1.203
4ORB19 3 2.740 2.313 2.313 1 - 1/ 16 - 10 3/8 1.297
~
RS. 4ORS5 1-1/2 1.430 1.187 1.187 15 /16 - 10 1/4 1.797
4ORS6 2 1.770 1.375 1.375 15 / 16 - 10 5/16 1.984
4ORS7 2-1/2 2.180 1.375 1.750 15 / 16 - 10 5/16 1.984
4ORS19 3 2.740 2.313 2.313 1 - 1/16 - 10 3/8 1.190 ,., ,
4 - 5
I. -
()
Top Sub
Locking Screw
Cover
n~
Mainspring
Core
Ring -(Shear pin cover)

Shear pin
Skirt (Cylinder)
Dog Spring
Spacer ring
Space to insert
releasing tool (A)
n"'"-
Dog
Reach
J
~
RS PULLING TOOL
n,
4-6
S SERIES PULLING/RUNNING TOOL
"
Top sub
Fluid Bypass Hole.
Sleeve (Shear pin Cover)
Core nut n
Main Spring
Skirt (Cylinder)
Shear pin
Dog Spring
Spacer Ring
~ Space to ins~rt
Releasing tool (A)
n
- Reach
.-
SS PULLING TOOL
')
4-7
S SERIES PULLING I RUNNING TOOL
r,
The S Series tools are JAR DOWN TO SHEAR (See p. 4 - 7). They are designed
to pull equipment by jarring up or to run and release equipment by jarring down.
Two cores are available for this tool:
B core - Short reach Score - Longer reach
0 0
B 5
~
r.
-,
!re:=
DOG t
POSITION L.-
Always check that item to be released has sufficient clearance on skirt to move
core upwards fully. Failure to check this may result in tool not releasing fully.-
NOTE: Shear pin in shear down tools is smaller than equivalent shear up tool.
Uses same Releasing and Pinning tools as R Series.
The following are the. S Series tools:
Size Top
I I I 0.0. Neck
Sh I Latch
Will I Thread I Shear
Pin I Reach
0=- 1.437 1.187 1.187 15 /16 - 10 3/16 1.297
40SB6 112
I SB. 4OSB1
1 - 1/ 2 1.766 1.375 1.375 15 /16 - 10 1/4 1.219
2.188 1.375 1.750 15 /16 - 10 1/4 1.281
40SB9 123 - 1 / 2
40SB2 2.734 2.313 2.313 1 - 1/ 16 - 10 5/16 1.380
SS. 140SS3 11-1/2 1.430 1.187 1.187 15 /16 - 10 3/16 1.780

40551 1/4 2.030
~
40552 2 11.770 11.375 11.375 115/16 - 10
12-1/22.1801.3751.75015/16-10
1 1/4 2.000
40554 3 2.840 2.313 2.313 1 - 1/16 - 10 5/16 2.210
ic
5M 40SM7 1.66 1.187 0.875 0.875 16/16 - 10 3/16 1.680
0 ..
For Gas Lift Valvesonly.
4 - 8
PROJECT 14 - OIlS R SERIES TOOLS
1.
I)
Name the two most common types of "R" tool.
(I)
(11)
2. Explain the difference between these two tools.
3. How can you recognize this tool by looking at the outside?
4. When the pin shears what part of the tool makes it release?
5. In which direction does the core move when you shear the tool? I'")
6. Why is there a thread in the bottom of the core?

(I)
(11)
7. Fill in the following sizes:
(I) Reach of 2" RH - .....................
(11) Reach of 2" RS - .....................
(m) Shear pin diameter for 1 - 1/2" RH.........
(IV) Shear pin diameter for 2 - 1/2" RS.........

8. ')
Write fishing neck size the following tools will latch :
(1) 1 -112"RH- ......................................................
(11) 2"RS """""""""""""""'"
(rii) 2 -112" RH - """""""""'" ......................................................

(IV) 3" RS - ............................................................
9. MeasUf,£the length and O.D. of the following tools (not including the 1" of thread).
~ (I) 1 -112" RH -
(11) 2" RS -
"""""""""""""""""""""""""""
............................................................
(m) 2 -112" RH - ......................................................
(IV) 3" RS - ............................................................
f)
-----
4- 9
~-~
PROJECT 15 - OIlS S SERIESTOOLS
r)
1. Name the two types of "S" tool.
(I)
(u)
2. Explain the difference between these two tools.
3. How can you recognize this tool by looking at the outside?
4. In which direction do you jar to shear the S series tools?
n 5. In which direction does the core move when you shear the tool?
6. Why is there 2 pin holes in the core?
7. Fill in the following sizes:

(I) Reach of 2" SB - ,....................
(11) Reach of 2" SS - ............................................................................
(m) Shearpin diameterfor 1 - 112" SB ..............................................
(IV) Shear pin diameter for 2 - 112" SS ,...........
(Note difference in shear pin size to R series - (p 3 - 9).
(\
8. Write fishing neck size the following tools will latch :
(I) 1 -1/2" SB - ,..........
(11) 2" SS - "........................................................................
(111) 2 -1/2" SB - """""""""""""""""""",""""""""""""..................
(IV) 3" SS - ........................................................................................
9. Measure the length and O.D. of the following tools (not including the 1" of thread).
~ (I) 1-1/2" SB - "..............
(u) 2" SS - ........................................................................................
(UI) 2 - 1/2" SB - .................................................................................
,"} (IV) 3" SS - ,.................................
4 - 10
CAMCO PULLING TOOLS
-
The Camco equivalent to the Otis tools are as follows:
JAR UP to SHEAR JAR DOWN to SHEAR
JU JD
$$.$ r$J."$J.
short med long 4= REACH~ short med
f)
- Core attached to top sub - Skirt attached to top sub
- Screw hole in top sub - ID feature - no hole in top sub
- Skirt pinned to core - Core pinned to skirt.
- Bigger shear pin than J .0. - Smaller shear pin than J.U.
JU can be converted to JD by changing the following parts.

(I) Top Sub
(n) Core Nut
(Ill) Retainer Screw.
Cores for JU and JD are identical.
Remember - Dog profile on Camco tools is 9(f

- Otis tools and equipment have 20° undercut (See p. 4-2). ()
--'
0.0. of Camco tools is larger than equivalent Otis tool.
Latching Sequence - p. 4-12: A, B, C.
No releasing tool required for Camco.
Same pinning tool as Otis. Remove top sub spring to insert shear pin.
;
n"
4 - 11
CAMCO PULLING TOOLS
-'
(\
LATCH OPERATION
JU JD
JAR UP JAR DOWN

---- /'-... -- @ - ./'.. -
<I!
\
fDI Fo
~
I
@
.J
n
, ww-
4 - 12
PROJECT 16 - CAMCO J SERIES
/) '7
1. What are the two most common CAMCO tools:
(1)
(11)
2. Identify (above) which direction they shear.
3. What external feature is on a JU and not a JD tool which permits identification?
fJ
4. Which components must be changed to convert a shear up tool to a shear down tool?
(1)
(11)
(111)
5. What are the disadvantages of the Camco tool compared to the Otis R and S Series?
(1)
(11)
6. What are the advantages of the Camco tool compared tb the Otis R and S Series?
(1)
7.
(11)
Complete the following chart :

" '"
(1) OD of 2" JDC ................................................................

(11) OD 1 - 1/2" JUC .............................................................
(111) OD I" JDC (used for gaslift valves)
(IV) Reach I - 1/2" .........................................................
JDC
...... (v) Reach 1 - 1/2" JUC .........................................................
(VI) Diameter shear pin 2" JDC ,.....................
~ (V11) Diameter shear pin 2" JUC ................................................
4 - 13
G SERIES PULLING TOOLS
The previous tools in this section are all designed to latch external fishing
necks, e. g. rope sockets, stem etc,
The GS/GR series are designed to latch internal fishing necks; e.g. X and XN
Locks, Soft Set Bomb Hanger etc.
The basic tool is the GS which SHEARS DOWN but the addition of a GU ADAPTER
converts the total assembly to a GR SHEAR UP tool.
This extended core version is required to pull the D Collar lock.
(\
GRL --extended core
('
To release the Pulling Tool from the Lock

Mandrel; grasp the Dog Retainer with the
~ thumb and forefinger and force it up to compress
the Spring, This should lift the Dogs enough
to allow them to retract against the smaller
outside diameter of the Core. Take the Mandrel
off the Pulling Tool. '.
"
4 - 14
GS PULLING RUNNING TOOLS
-'"i
GS PULLING/RUNNING TOOL - Jar DOWN to shear.
It is important to remember that the skirt must be moved UPWARDS by the fishing
neck of the equipment latched. If there is insufficient space for the GS to move down
inside the internal fishing neck it is NOT possible to shear off.
Latching.,: As the GS passes downwards into fishing neck the dogs move up and
inwards to pass LO. of fishing neck. Then the dog spring forces
them back downwards.
Pulling.: Upward movement is transmitted from toolstring, through the core to the dogs
which are now firmly expanded beneath fishing neck.
Shearing_: Downward jar force is applied to move the core downwards relative to the skirt.
The skirt, resting on the fishing neck, shears the pin in an upward direction. '1
Pinning:
~- GU adapter can be used as a pinning tool to re-align shear pin holes by
compressing spring.
If GU adapter is not available spring can be compressed by levering tool in a vice.
This will be done during your practical session.
Uses: Running/Pulling: G stops, G pack-oris
Pulling: Soft Set Bomb Hanger
Pulling: Soft Set Bomb Hanger.
F)
"
4 - 15
GS/GR PULLING TOOL
()
'-=.
Fishing neck
Shear pin cover

Shear pin
Retainer pin
('
Core nut
Fishing neck
Lock screw
Core
Top Sub
Shear pin b. aD - shear up adapter
Skirt
Main Spring
Spring Retainer
\' Dog Spring
Dog Retainer GR =GS +GU
- Dog
~
a. as -pulling tool
c. GR - pulling tool
n
~~--~,--
4 - 16
n.oR
GR - EXPLODED VIEW ~
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
LIMITED
n
, ,
I I
I
I
I Fishing Neck
I
- GU Body
I
I ([(@- Locking Screw
r Shear Pin:
'- I Top Sub
j'
';~
i ~ I
~Ic
c""
c
I
ccc
I
I
I Main Spring
Retainer Pin I /)
I
I
I
I Spring Retainer
I
I
- Core Nut
I
I
I
I
I
~ Dog Spring
I Dog Retainer
I , --,
I I
~ :
' " '~ '
c
I I
I I 'c'
I'CC
;cc
ccc'ccc
I I "-, c ,c., c
c
I
I I
> Cc F
Dogs
L I .c
c J >'f;c
c
cc
I ~
@jj
Cc cc
'_:'
cc
ccl .
I
Iccc
: I
I
I GU Adapter I
I
I
I
- Cylinder I
I
I
~ GR = GS + GU Adapter
I
I
I
I
I
~ I Core
[Not to scale]
,, ----..
I
,
4 - 17
GR PULLING TOOL
('-"--
. GR PULLING TOOL -Jar UP to shear.
Combinationof as and au adapter.

Pin MUST BE REMOVEDfrom as or tool will not shear in eitherdirection. -
Operating sequence is ~ as as except tool now shears in QpPQsite direction.
Shearing.: Upward jar action is transmitted through shear pin (larger diameter than
in as) until pin is sheared.
Downward jar action has no tendency to shear pin as force is transmitted

through main au body to skirt of as and onto fishing neck.
('
Pinning_: Back the au adapter off as and re --pin adapter. Screw adapter
back into position and main as spring will be recommended
to pinned position.
Uses:
~
aR is used to pull X and XN locks. Jar down side loosens
"set" on keys and makesthe lock easier to pull.
The following are the commonly used G series tools.
Nom Lock OD aR Part as Part au Part Will Max Top Tool

Size ref. No. No. No. latch I.D O.D. Thread Fish Neck
r
2" 1.875 4OGR18700 4ooS18700 4OGU18700 1.38 1.81 15/16-10 1.375
22V2 2.313 4OGR23100 4OOS23100 4OGU23100 1.81 2.25 15j16-1O 1.750

I
3" 2.750 4OGR27500 4ooS27250 4OGU31200 2.31 2.72 }l/16-1O 2.313
5" 4.562 4OGR45600 4ooS45600 4OGU45600 4.00 4.50 11/16-10 3.125
4 - 18
PROJECT 17 - orIS G SERIES TOOLS
1. Why do you add the GD adapter to the GS to convert it to a GR?

/)
2. Does the shear pin go in the adapter or the GS?
3. What happens if you pin both the GS and the GD adapter?
4. Describe PINNING PROCEDURE for GS.

n
5. Measure the tools and fill in the following chart :

SIZE TOOL LENGTH O.D. I.D.TOOL THREAD
(excl. threads) WILL LATCH SIZE
GS
2"
GR
GS
2-1/2"
GR r-.
GS
3"
GR
- 6. What happens to the dogs as the tool latches?
.,
7. Which tool has the bigger shear pin : GS or GR.
Explain why?
n
4 - 19
~i.
AYLOR
RAINING
. ONSULTANTS
SHEAR PINS LIMITED
~ RAD_IAL DRIVING
FIT
A c
RADIAL SHEAR PIN B RADIAL SHEAR PIN
SINGLE STRAIGHT SHEAR MINIMAL SHARP DOUBLE STRAIGHT SHEAR-
CLEARANCE EDGES DOUBLE FORCE NECES5ARY
r TANGENTIAL
1\ -
v
-.T - SHARP
EDGES
[J
RIVING
FIT
\
A L L-
D V / E
TANGENTIAL SHEAR PIN MINIMAL

EDGE SHEAR CLEARANCE
NOTE:
0 1
I
IN THE CASE OF LARGE DIAMETER PINS

,~
NOTE:
~~
)"ij
IN RELATIVELY SMALL DIAMETER COMPONENTS LARGER SHEAR AREA OF

THE SHEAR AREA IS SLIGHTLY LARGER THAN TANGENTIAL SHEAR PIN IiI
THE CROSS-SECTION AREA DUE TO THE COMPARED WITH RADIAL PIN
~
CURVATURE OF THE SHEARING SURFACES, OF SAME DIAMETER liil
AND THIS MUST BE TAKEN IN ACCOUNT
WHEN USING TABLES, ETC.
t
PIN STRENGTH ALUMINIUM lowest strength - 41,000psi D.T.S.

BRASS medium strength - 43,000 psi D.T.S.
STEEL highest strength - 58,000psi D.T.S.
f'\
4 - 20
I
~
0 - RING SEALS
1\
~
A correctly sized 'O'-ring, in a

correspondingly correctly sized
groove. The volume of the shaded
segment will be displaced when the
seal is in its operating position,
giving contact areas at a, b, c and d.
A larger 'O'-ring in the same size

groove would give much greater
contact areas at a, b, c and d when F)
in operating position, but it would
be almost impossibleto fit the two
components together without
damage to the ring.
c
Too small an 'O'-ring, or, as in this
illustration, too large a diametral
clearance, will give a much smaller
volume of ring to be displaced,
re!>ultingin poor contact. Contact
could be lost altogether at b or d
or both.
rt
,".
In the case of C, should the ring be

made of too soft a material, pressure
in the case of a static seal, or
movement in the case of a dynamic
- seal, will probably force the ring

into a distorted shape, allowing
pressure to bleed past C. A sufficiently
high pressure may force the ring
~ further (dotted lines), against angle e,

where it could sustain circumferential
damage. Fitting anti-extrusion or
'backing' rings (downstream only for
static, both sides for dynamic), helps
prevent this, but as these rings are of
greater outside diameter than the
recess they are subjected to damage.
')
4 - 21
L L
'AYLOR
INING
'NSULTANTS
WIRELINE EQUIPMENT CHART UMITED
I
I
II -
I 4-n
SECTION 5 -LOCK MANDRELS
r\
Introduction to Lock Mandrels 5 -2
W Slip Lock 5 -3
W Running Tool 5 -5
D Collar Lock 5 -8
G Element 5 -9
Nipple Locks ( S, X, XN) 5 - 14
X I XN Locks 5 - 15
,......
X Running Tools 5 - 21
Nipple Size Specifications 5 - 28
X I XN Pulling Procedure 5 - 29
PROJECTS
Project 18 - W Lock & Running Tool 5-7

0
Project 19 - D Collar Lock 5 - 13
Project 20 - X I XN Lock I Nipples 5 - 31
Project 21 - X Running Tool 5 - 33
('
5- 1
LOCK MANDRELS - INTRODUCTION
~
('.
A lock mandrel is a device which will ..grip" in the well to provide an anchor for
various flow control devices such as :- plugs, safety valves, seperation tools etc.
It ..grips" either by utilizing slips, dogs or keys. The lock mandrel also has a
means of sealing around its O. D. to hold pressure.
There are 3 main groups of mandrels:
1. Slip Locks - can be set anywhere in the tubing.

2. Collar Locks - can be set in tubing collar recess.
3. Nipple Locks - positioned in a nipple run in the tubing string during
completion.
1. Slip Locks (p. 5-3) were the first type of lock to be designed. They have
('. limitations which makes them less useful than the other types of lock mandrels:
1. Maximum pressure differential 1500 psi.
2. Will hold pressure from below only.:
3. Will not pass nipple bore (of same nominal size as tubing)
4. Can be unlocked by excessive flow from above.
2. Collar Locks (p. 5-9) are securely locked in the tubing collar recess by
dogs which extend outwards. It has the following features and limitations~
1. Will hold 5000 psi-from ABOVE and BELOW.
2. G. Seal Element is more effective than W used on slip Lock.
3. Will not pass nipple I. D.
3 Nipple Locks (p. 5-14)can be divided into the following categories.
n 1. Selective - due to nipple profile -S locks

2. Selective - due to running tool-X locks
3. No-go due to no-go ring in nipple-XN Locks.
They offer greater versatility, reliability and pressure rating than either
SLIP or COLLAR type locks.
(\
5- 2
W SLIP LOCKS
Running procedure is shown on p. 5-4.

n
Running Tool -W
Pulling Tool - RB + equalising prong.
Runnin.8:J?,rocedure -
A. - The slips slide along the tube wall during running in.
B. - When the anchoring depth is reached, pull up; then JAR UP.
- The taper forces the slips to grip the tubing wall.
- Continued Jarring up shears the pins which fIX the Mandrel body and
taper together. The body moves up and the lower conical shoulder
"
expands the packings, sealing against the tubing.
- Further upward jarring shears the pins of the Running Tool.
- Pull out of the well.
CAUTION: DO NOT SIT DOWN ON LOCK AFTER SETTING AS IT

MAY RELEASE
Pulling procedure - Attach correct pulling prong to thread in RB. core.
- Prong size depends on plug type (p. 6-5).
r-,
C. - Core strikes mandrel. JAR DOWN to release taper behind slips.
As mandrel moves down RB dogs simultaneously latch neck.
- Element is also released by this action.
- D. - Lock is pulled out of the well, hanging by the fishing neck which
ensures slips remain retracted.
NOTE:
~ The tendency to pull the W lock using an RS pulling
must be avoided. The Reach of the RS is such that the
tool
skirt
may push downward on fishing neck - tightening slips.
The mandrel must have room to move downward to release taper behind
slips. For this reason it is NOT advisable to run a collar stop or any ()
other restriction, below slip lock as this will impede downwards movement.
5 - 3
W WCK - RUNNING/PULLING SEQUENCE
.f)
~
A B c D
+ + t +
(")
(\
..I
--_u .--_. -- --- u_--
Running Setting Latching Pulling

,""'
(
5-4
W WCK -RUNNING/PULLING SEQUENCE
tr"')
1 2 3 4
t
"
'I
~
Inserting Pinning Running Releasing
f)----
5-5
W RUNNING TOOL
(\ Refer to diagram on p. 5-5
The W running tool is prepared in the following manner.
Check collect is free to move-remove old shear pins.

1. Install collet in W lock running neck
2. Insert 2 pieces of shear stock
3. Rotate shear pin cover to prevent pieces of shear stock falling on top of lock.
Down hole operation
4. Upward jar action shears pins and retracts core from collect, releasing the W Lock.
("\ The following are the most common W locks:
Part Tubing Slips Slips Min Fishing Running Pulling Thread

No. 0.0. I Expanded I Retracted 1.0. Neck Tool Tool Pin
0.0. Down
IOWOl8 .687 I 1.375 I -3/16 )C.14

.10\\:022. .875 1-9/16)1,12
IOW023 _1,375_ -..1l~L- 2XI2
lOW 1.750 1 2.750 2-1/4)(.12
:t.1
('
('
5- 6
~
AYLOR
- W LOCK
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
PROJECT 18 MANDREL LIMITED
Strip and Reassemble during practical sessions n

1. Measure a 2-1/2" W Lock (used in 2-7/8 tubing, similarly 3" for
3-1/2 tubing) and fill in the following sizes:
(I) Total length with slips retracted ...........................................................
(11) Maximum O. D. with slips retracted .....................................................
(m) Maximum O. D. with element expanded ...............................................
(IV) I.D. through mandrel assembly. ...........................................................

2. Why is the element pinned?
3. What is the size and type of this shear pin? I}

4. List the running procedure.
(I)
(11)
(m)
(IV)
5. Give two limitations of the W Lock Mandel
(I)
(11)
6. In which direction must you jar to release the W running tool? /)
7. For the 2-1/2" W running tool what is the size and type of shear pins?
8. Maximum O. D. of this tool is ..........
9. List 2 things to be checked before pinning this tool:
~ (I)
(11)
r;
5- 7
D COLLAR WCK
~
The D Collar lock is designed to lock in any collar recess of External Upset (EU)
and Non Upset (NU) tubing: (Red indicates sealing surfaces).
(\
EU NU
The D Collar lock will NOT set in premium type tubing such as Vallourec V AM or Hydril
CS because there is no collar recess in which to locate:
r~
- VAM Hydril CS
The collar lock has the following features.
.I
(I) Can be set in any collar recess (See limitations above)
(11) Will hold 5000 PSI from ABOVE or BELOW
" (m)
(IV)
Pressure set and pressure balanced element
Element expansion can be adjusted to seal in varying tubing weights.
5-8
G ELEMENT DETAIL
n
t
The 0 collar lock uses a type uG' element (also used on G Pack-off - see Section 14)
By varying the number of spacers beneath the expander element the amount of
expansion can be controlled to seal in various tubing weights,
Pressure set and Pressure balanced design refers to the split rings installed
in the a-Ring grooves either side of the element.
THESE RINGS MUST BE ON ELEMENT SIDE OF a-RING,
The pressure is permitted to act behind the element to 00energise" the seal.
As this pressure reaches the 2nd a-Ring it will be contained. A reversal of pressure
causes the by-pass to be effective from the opposite direction.
This feature ensures the optimum sealing against tubing well.

n
~)
- Spacers to adjust
~ element expansion,
5-9
/\
'-/
Fishing Neck
u.
Locking Sleeve
Collet Lock
Outer Sleeve
0 -Ring
Lock Mandrel
Dogs
Element Expander
0 -Ring
G Element
., SplitRing
Element_Expander
Spacers
Pack Mandrel
-~
i ~~ §
~p
l ~
---- ~ -~~--~ ~~ -~-- - ~ ~- -
-- ----------------------
*
1
1
I
1
, ~
~
-
VI
_Pin Sheared
- GRL (note long core)
D Running Tool
Running Tool
Pinned
below collet
Dogs Retracted
~ Element Retracted
(i) Running In (ii)Setting (iii) Jar up to shear running tool (iv) Pulling
-~----- ~-~ ~
~~- ---~~~--~~- ~~~
D WCK -RUNNING/PULLING
.
r'1 Pin D Running Tool so its collet is expanded ~ the "locking sleeve" in the
recess provided.
RunninK- refer to diagram on p. 5-11
1. Lower the assembly into the hole and stop approximately one joint above
the desired setting point.
2. Pull the assembly up slowly until a collar recess is located. Do Not Pull
More Than 80 DaN At This Point - at this step of the operation you are merely
locating a reference collar. Note the wire line measurement at this point and check
again at "target"' collar. This ensures you are in. collar -Ifeo you are I joint
lower than reference point.
3. To move downward again, tap downward slightly - then move down the hole
to approximately 3m below the desired collar recess. (A).
n 4. Pull the assembly up until the collar recess is encountered and place
approximately 140 DaN pull in the wire.
5. Close the jars slowly without any downward jarring.
6. A hard jar upward now is used to expand the element and fully lock the
collet. (B)
7. Prior to shearing pin in running tool, jar down slightly to check if the
assembly is set. If the plug moves downward, repeat steps 5 and 6.
8. If the assembly does not move downward, jar upwardly until the shear pin
is sheared and the running tool is freed. (C) After the shear pin is sheared,
do not tag the assembly again, as this may release the lock.
Pulling Procedure -Pulling Tool = GRL + equalising prong.

n 1. Choose equalising prong to suit plug attached to lock.
2. As G RL engages fishing neck prong activates equalising device. WAIT Fa R
PRESSURE TO EQUALISE (D).
3. JAR DOWN - Core extension on G RL pushes locking sleeve down,
releasing element and dogs.
4. Pick up and pull out of hole.
~ The following chart shows D collar locks:

Tubing
0.0./
Maximum
O.D./lns.
LockDog
Assembly
Element
Assembly
Inside
Fishing Bottom Thread Running Pulling
Inches Dogs Retracted Number Number Neck Adapter Down Tool Tool
2.375 1.843 3100037 3100047 310083 3100144 1'1\,-14 Pin 4IDOIO 40GR1
2.875 2.281 3100030 3100049 310075 3100145 1'/..-12 Pin 410011 40GR4
3.500 2.844 3100058 3100057 3100129 3100126 2-12 Pin 4ID09 40GR14
(' ....
4.500 3.800 3100067 3100068 3100153 None 311\,-12 SLB
BOX
4IDO15 40GR26
5 - 12
~
~ AYLOR
, RAINING
~ ONSULTANTS
PROJECT 19 - D COLLAR LOCK LIMITED
1. What are the types of tubing in which the type D mandrel can be landed?
(1
(1)
(2)
2. What is the pressure differential rating of the type D mandrel?
3. What takes place to lock the Type D mandrel in the collar recess?
i.e. Explain running procedure.
f)
4. Whatis the maximum O. D. ofthe 2- 7/8" type D mandrel with the dogs retracted? ..
5. What is the maximum O. D. of the 2 7/8" type D mandrel with the

dogs exp.anded? ~ '
6. What is the minimum I. D. through the bore of the mandrel? ..............................
7. What is the O. D. of the expanded element of a 2 - 1/2" Type D

mandrel? .'.
8. What is the total length of this Type D mandrel with the dogs retracted?
f1
9. What it; the proper pulling tool to pull a 2 - 7/8" Type D mandrel?
10. Describe the procedure for pulling the 2 - 7/8" Type D mandrel?
-
~
I
11. Why is a running prong not required? ()
, ",~.~~,
5 - 13
"
NIPPLE LOCKS
f' There are three types of nipple locks:
(I) Selective due to nipple profile - S locks.

(11) S'elective due to running tool -X locks.
(m) No-go due to restriction in nipple - XN locks.

Briefly - the S system relies on varying profiles in each
nipple starting with S-l at the bottom, to an S-5 near
the surface. The operator installs, below the lock, keys which
match the nipple profile in which the lock was required to
be positioned.
The Profile of S Nipples used for the S. O. D.' s is an S-4.
('. (11) The X Lock system uses identical nipples in each respective tubing size.
The operator can select which ,nipple the lock is to be set in by the
use of a selective running tool. (p 5-22)
Advantag£§ over previous designs of lock:
(I) V packing seal in polished bore of nipple.

(Note: S Lock also employed this method of sealing).'
(11) Holds pressure from both directions. (High pressure R & RN system
available)
(m) Identical nipples simplify installation and ordering.

(IV) Can be set in X profile of S.S. D.'s.
0 (v) Simple lock designs reduces maintenance.
Running Tool - X
Pulling Tool - G R
(m) The XN Lock is an X Lock with the keys changed to XN. All
other components are identical, including the running and
pulling tools.
~ The O. D. of the equalizing sub is too big to pass the No-go

nipple I. D. so serves as a positive stop to locate the nipple
keys.
')
5 - 14
X I XN LOCKS
X keys have a 90
. shoulder. XN have 45° shoulder. (I
x XN
An exploded view of the X lock is shown on (p 5 -16) identifying all components.
Prior to running an X (or XN) lock you should check the following: n
(I) All threads are tight - note hole in expander mandrel for a bar.
(DO NOT PLACE A WRENCH ON THIS SURFACE)
(11) Correct profile keys - X or XN
(111) Key spring tension - Keys should be :
- Fully retracted and firm il1 SELECTIVE
- Sprung forward evenly in.NON-SELECTIVE
(IV) Check internal fishing neck for wear 'damage.
(v) Check serrations on expander mandrel and keys. Replace if worn.
f)
nipple expander
mandrel
space for
downward
movement
~ t FORCE
The greater the upward force created by the pressure differential the greater the
"squeeze" by the keys onto the packing mandrel. This grips serrations to prevent
expander mandrel moving upwards and unlocking.
This can be observed by opening and closing a lock mandrel and comparing
the effort needed to repeat the opening sequence while squeezing the keys (\
inwards by hand.
5 - 15
X-WCK: EXPWDED VIEW
-
('
Fishing Neck (1)
Expander (3)
Mandrel
Locking Serrations
(' /'
Double acting (4)

key springs
Key (5)
Key retainer sleeve (2)
~ Packing mandrel (6)
V-Packing 'stack' (7)
~
[Not to scale]
("'
,--
\
5 - 16
3 POSITIONS OF XWCK
F)
"
Nipple
Tubing
Expander mandrel
Keys sprung serrations locked
Keys Fully out
behind key
Retracted
')
-
~
1. Selective Position 2. Non-selective position 3. Locked in nipple

.,
5 - 17
x LOCK POSITIONS
() Refer to p. 5-17
(1) Selective Position - Fishing neck and expander mandrel are fully extended
- Keys are FULLY retracted. Check before running
- It is recommended to replace double acting springs
regularly.
(n) Non-Selective Position - Fishing neck has been partially pushed into lock
(by action of running tool)
- Keys are partially expanded and 900 shoulder of
X keys will locate in X nipple (45. XN keys
will pass X nipple in this position)
(m) Locked in nipple Jar. down action has set expander mandrel behind
keys holding lock securely in nipple until fishing
(\ neck and expander sleeve are retracted by the
pulling tool (G R)
The Running Tool (p 5-22) positions the lock mandrel in the Selective or Non-
Selective position. A detailed explanation of the sequence is on p. 5-24.
The following are the most common X/XN Lock Mandrels:
Tubing Nipple No-Go X Lock No. XN Lock No. Running Tool Pulling Tool
Size LO. LO.
2 -3/ 8 1.875 I.791 IOXOI8700 IOXNI8704 41X05 4OGR I 8700

2-7/8 2.313 2.205 IOXO23 100 IOXN23 10 I 41X06 4OGR23 100
3 -1/2 2.750 2.635 IOXO27502 IOXN27503 41X066 4OGR27500
4-1/2 3.813 3.725 IOX0381O2 IOXN38106 41XOl5
5 -1/ 2 .4.562 4.455 IOXO45600 IOXN45601 41XO27 4OGR45600
I 4OGR36800
et Note: All above part Nos are for 9Cr- 1 Mo material - for H2S Service.
-
II
!
In
J
5 - 18
l
X I XN STRIPPING PROCEDURE
()
Components numbered below are identified on p. 5-16

1. Place the assembly horizontally in a vise. Grip on the Fish Neck. (1)
Remove the packing (7) from the Packing Mandrel. (6)

2. Insert a steel rod through the shear pin holes in the Packing Mandrel. (6).
3. Using the rod as a handle, pull the Packing Mandrel (6) away from the
vise. This moves the Key Retainer Sleeve (2) away from the Fish Neck (1)
and exposes the Expander Sleeve (3).
4. Insert a rod through the holes in the Expander Sleeve (3). Using the rod
as a handle, remove the Expander Sleeve from the Fish Neck (1).
CAUTION: Do not use a wrench on the Expander Sleeve (3). This n

could damage the special finish on the upper end of the
Expander Sleeve (3).
CAUTION: Do not use a wrench on the Packing Mandrel (6) or Key Retainer
Sleeve (2) when removing them from the Fish Neck (1). This will twist the
Key Springs (4) and damage the grooves in the Expander Sleeve (3).
5. Remove the Packing Mandrel (6) from the Key Retainer Sleeve (2).
CAUTION: Do not use a wrench on packing section of Packing Mandrel

(6). This could cause premature wear of the packing I.D.
and cause the packing to leak.
6. With the Expander Sleeve (3) in the up or ..unlocked" position, ()

the Keys (5) may be removed from the slots.
7. Pull the Expander Sleeve (3) out through the bottom of the Key Retainer
Sleeve (2). This allows the Springs (4) to fall free.
9. Clean and inspect all parts thoroughly for wear and damage.
CAUTION: NEVER grip key retainer sleeve in VICE or with a wrench as
this can distort the thin walls.
('
5 - 19
X I XN REASSEMBL Y PROCEDURE
i'" , 1. Install the Expander Sleeve (3) (small end first) into the lower end
of the Key Retainer Sleeve (2). Leave sufficient room to install Key Springs.
2. Align the spring grooves in the Expander Sleeve (3) with the slots in the
Key Retainer Sleeve (2).
3. Insert the Springs (4) through the top of the Key Retainer Sleeve (2)
and into the spring grooves in the Expander Sleeve (3). Check that the hooked
ends of the Springs are in the holes in the Key Retainer Sleeve (2). .
Hold in place with grease. (On big size locks with Shear-pin Retainer, check
that the pin hole in the Expander Sleeve is aligned with the pin slot in the
Key Retainer Sleeve.)
4. Push the Expander Sleeve (3) through the Key Retainer Sleeve (2) until
it engages and stops.
5. Install the Keys (5) through the bottom of the Key Retainer Sleeve (2)
and onto the Springs (4). The Keys (5) must be properly installed on
('0 the Springs (4).
6. Push the Expander Sleeve (3) down, moving the Keys (5) out into the
windows of the Key Retainer Sleeve (2).
7. Insert the Packing Mandrel (6) into the Expander Sleeve (3) and make
up by hand.
8. Grip the upper end of the Key Retainer Sleeve (2) in a vise. Tighten
the Packing Mandrel (6).
CAUTION: Do not place the wrench on the polished packing area of the
Packing Mandrel (6). This could cause premature wear
of the packing I.D.
9. Remove this assembly from the vise and place the Fish Neck (1)
in the vise.
(' 10. Make up the Expander Sleeve (3) into the Fish Neck (1) by hand.
11. Insert a steel rod through the shear pin holes in the Packing Mandtel
(6). Using the rod as a handle, pull the Packing Mandrel away from the Fish
Neck (1) to expose the Expander Sleeve (3).
12. Insert the rod through holes in the Expander Sleeve (3). Using the rod
as a handle, make up the Expander Sleeve into the Fish Neck (1).
CAUTION: Do not use a wrenc~ on the Key Retainer Sleeve (2).
This would twist the Key Springs (4) and damage the
~ grooves in the Expander Sleeve (3).
NOTE: Do not try to force the Fish Neck (1) downward. This may place the
tool in a locked" position.
13. Install the new packing onto the Packing Mandrel (6).
n
~ 14. Install new O-Ring onto the lower end of Packing Mandrel on locks 3 - 1/2" and
larger.
5 - 20
X-RUNNING TOOL
The X-running tool is to enable the X Lock to be run selectively into the profile
r;
req uired.
It has two positions, SELECTIVE and NON-SELECTIVE in which it has to be
manually set at the surface.
1) SELECTIVE POSITION - used when setting in any profile except top one or a
No-go (XN) profile.
2) NON-SELECTIVE POSITION - used when setting lock in top profile or a

No-go (XN) profile. Note: When an XN is below several X profiles of same size
it is advisable to run in SELECTIVE (to protect top shear pin while jarring
packing through profiles) and trip to NON -S ELECTIVEin last X profile above XN.
1. In SELECTIVE position
LOCK MANDREL (1) KEYS are FULLY RETRACTED. Running tool
holding the lock fully EXTENDED. I)
RUNNING TOOL (n) Nipple Locator dogs 0 UT.
(m) Lug Segments LOCKING Core to Main Mandrel
(IV) No GAP between fishing neck and spring
housing.
2. In NON-SELECTIVE position
LOCK MANDREL (v) Keys are SPR UNGforward to permit 90 degrees
shoulder to locate in nipple.
RUNNING TOOL (VI) Nipple locator dogs IN - now holding inner
mandrel in up position
(vn) Lug segments FREE to permit Core to move
when top pin shears. "
(vm) GAP between fishing neck and spring housing.
CHECKING RUNNING TOOL
Prior to pinning to lock, the running tool should be checked to ensure it trips
freely from SELECTIVE to N"ON-SELECTIVE. Place tool in NON-SELECTIVE
(as it would be after pulling out of hole), then:
Place tool in vice horizontally and grip G ENTL Y on dog retainer. Using a square
shank screwdriver (or other suitable tool) in gap between spring housing and fishing
~ neck increase tension on main spring. At the same time place thumb and forefinger
on upper end of nipple locator dogs and squeeze inwards and upwards against small
spring. Release screwdriver and tool should spring into SELECTIVE position.
If not: (1) Check nipple locator dogs were fully outwards when you
released tension.
(n) Gently tap spring housing in case spring is binding inside "
deformed housing. If too tight - replace prior to running.
5 - 21
~-~--- -~--~--~--- ~- -~ --~-- ~ --~
~_..
~
'.Z
'.Z
....
Z
fishing neck
~
(top sub)
top sub d
v. 0
~
N I
N
retainer pin tf'j
r? ~ 1/4" shear pin ~
"'C
lock pin
lock pin 5
'='
retainer pin ~
'='
Shear pin -1/4" steel <
i-(
main spring tf'j
spring housing ~
core
main mandrel
dog retainer housing
dog spring
recess for
split ring
lug segments
nipple locator dog.
lug segment
fishing neck recess for fishing

retainer dog neck retainer dogs I
~lug segments
I
I
~shoulder - to push -fishing neck
'on packing mandrel I retainer dog
5116'.' shear pin hole I
-- -- I
J
- - dog retainer housing
t'P",ring
If-,.., 5/16" hole for
]owo,(b~"'h=p,"
dog spring
nipple locator
dog
~ a) Sectioned
b) Exploded view of components.
X RUNNING TOOL
~
nOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
X RUNNING TOOL - PINNING/RUNNING LIMITED
,A With tool in SELECTIVE

Place tool in vice horizontally and grip G ENTL Y on dog retainer. Push nipple
locator dogs up (towards fishing neck). They should move inwards when at upper end of
travel and return freely to extended position. If they are not free the spring
is binding and tool needs redressing.
Pull fishing neck to outwards against spring tension. A bar or screwdriver can be
placed through slot above core to provide handles to exert force necessary.
Tool should trip into NON-SELECTIVE and remain in this position when tension is
released.
I
PINNING PROCEDURE
~ I 1. Check Running Tool is in NON-SELECTIVE position - otherwise core will be
.
I locked.
2. Place Lock Mandrel fishing neck in vice firmly. Close lock and insert running
I I (' tool. Push core downwards and hold in place with punch in top shear pin hole.
Extend lock mandrel and move running tool to line up bottom shear pin hole.
Pin with 5/16" brass (usually).
3. Insert 1/4" steel pin in top hole. Cross punch and center punch shear
pins to ensure they do not drop out.
4. Check that tool will trip from SELECTIVE to NON-SELECTIVE.
5. Check lock mandrel keys inSELECTIVE - fully retracted.
NON-SELECTIVE - spring forward.
. I
RUNNING PROCEDURE - to SELECTIVELY set X lock (See p. 5-25)
I. Set Running tool in SELECTIVE
2. Run into the well and JAR DOWN G ENTL Y to pass packing through upper nipple
profiles (Remember: In selective position the lug segments are protecting top shear
pin) - Diagram (1)
(' 3. Pass through nipple in which lock is to be set (lower approx lOM) )Nipple locator
dogs move up and inwards - then return to selective position).
4. Take pick up weight and remember amount for later reference.
5. Pull up to nipple-Iocator dogs will not allow tool to pass up through nipple.
Diagram (11)
-
I I
6. Pull over pick-up weight (point 4 above) approx 100-200 DaN.

This will trip running tool from SELECTIVE to NON-SELECTIVE as in Diagram (m)
~ Now the following points have occurred:
-lug segments retracted so top shear pin unprotected.
-there is a gap "between fishing neck and spring housing.
r' -nipple locator dogs retracted and holding tool in NON-SELECTIVE

-lock keys partially extended.
5 - 23
X RUNNING TOOL - RUNNING PROCEDURE
7. Lower down until X keys locate 90 degree shoulder in nipple.

8. Jar down GENTLY to p9sition lock fully in the nipple.
9. JAR DOWN to shear TOP pin. Diagram (IV)
- fishing neck retainer dogs released

- keys fully locked in nipple by expander mandrel.
10. Pick up approx. 100 DaN over pick-up weight. If weight drops off lock was
not fully set. Repeat from step 8.
11. If lock is fully set -Diagram (v)-JAR UP to shear BOTTOM pin and pull out
of hole.
To run XN lock - run in NON-SELECTIVE as XN lock WILL NOT pass XN nipple ")
to permit running tool to trip.
Running, Procedure - As for X but omit
steps 3, 5, 6, 7
Take pick-up weight above XN.
NOTE: If XN is below several X nipple profiles it is advisable to run in

SELECTIVE to protect top shear pin while jarring packing through nipple
bores.
Trip to NON-SELECTIVE in last X nipple above XN.
f)
r')
5 - 24
--~~ ~ - --~ ~~------ ------
------
(i) (u) (Ill) (IV) (V)

Locating nipple In non-selective over pull to
Running in Selective and trippling and located in Jarring down check set-then
nipple jar up
S
I
r.n
t'!'j
t'!'j
....
V> <
I t'!'j
N
V>
Z
A
Z
B ....
Z
r.n
t'!'j
,0
t'!'j
Z
C It'I'j
F F
0 0 G 0
Positions I Movement at labelled points
A Shearpin protectedby lug segments Pin unprotected Pin Sheared -
~ B
C Dogs Out
No Oap
I Dogs Locating
Oap Oap
Dogs holding inner mandrel in non selective position

Oap
D Lug segments locking core to main mandrel Lug segments release core by moving into recess in key retainer.
E Holding fishing neck df lock -will not release until cbre moved 80% Released fishing neck -core fully moved.
F Fully extended Partially compressed Closed
G Keys fully retracted Srrung forward to locate Locked. Locked

X RUNNING TOOL-STRIPPING PROCEDURE " AVLOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
LIMITED
()
~"
Ensure tool is in NON-SELECTIVE Position Le. Core free to move

1. Remove locking pin and upper cross pin.
2. Withdraw Core.
3. Remove fishing neck retainer dogs.
4. Hold tool in vice by fishing neck - vertically.
5. Back off key retainer housing from mainspring hou~ing - use of strap wrenches
advisable to prevent deformation.
6. Remove key retainer housing -manipulate dogs to permit removal.
" 7.
8.
Take care not to lose components as there is a tendency for them to fly apart.
Remove lug segments from main mandrel slot.
9. Unscrew main mandrelfrom fishing neck. -NOTE these are a matched pair -NOT
INTERCHANGEABLE. If tool is not going to be reassembled immediately store
these two components screwed together.
10. Remove spring housing and main spring.
11. Remove dog spring by squeezing flat between two hacksaw blades and with-
drawing through slots in retainer housing.
Check all parts for wear - grease lightly.
(\
5 - 26
X RUNNING TOOL - REASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
1. Put fishing neck in vice - pin thread down 0

2. Place spring housing and main spring on fishing neck just sit them in
position (thread upwards)
3. Insert main mandrel and make up - ensure milled slots are lined up. Main
spring is now compressed. Main mandrel and fishing neck are a matched pair and
care must be taken to be certain they do not become mixed.
4. Insert 2 lug segments - 45 degree chamfer up (i.e. towards bottom of tool)

5. Insert spring into dog retainer - Sandwich spring between 2 hacksaw blades,
insert through slots, turn 90 degrees and release blades. Manipulate spring into
position and check that the ends of the springs are not crossed.
6. Slide dog retainer housing over main mandrel - thread downwards.
7. Insert hacksaw blade through slot in dog retainer housing above the spring
and right through the slots in the main mandrel. f)
8. Lift housing to compress spring against hacksaw blade and insert file through
main mandrel to hold housing up.
9. Insert 1 split ring in lower inside of dog retainer housing - install
with slot towards upper edge. (grease on back of split ring will hold it in place)
10. Insert 1 nipple locator dog.
11. Insert 2nd split ring.
12. Insert 2nd dog - from inside at a steep angle to locate fingers in slots in
split rings
13. Hold dogs firmly while picking up gently on dog retainer housing to remove
file from slot.
14. Lower complete assembly until hacksaw blade is at end of slot. Remove blade
while gently supporting dogs with finger tips.
15. Turn dog retainer housing 90 degrees - to avoid fishing neck retainer I)
dog slots.
16. Manipulate assembly gently down over profiles on main mandrel and thread
into spring housing.
17. Tighten spring housing to dog retainer. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN as this can
deform these thin section components.
18. Pull upwards to dog retainer housing trip tool into CONTROL
...I
19. Insert 2 fishing neck retainer dogs - use grease to hold in place
20. Insert core -cannot be inserted if tool is in SELECTIVE position. (see 18).
I
21. Install cross pin.
22. Lift core upwards and insert locking pin through hole in fishing neck.
BRAD both ends to ensure this pin will not fall out.
23. CHECK TOOL OPERATION - Le.: Trip from NON-SELECTIVE to
SELECTIVE and back to NON-SELECTIVE.
n
5 - 27
L I
~ ) ) J
Tubing Size Wt. / Ft Nipple packing Bore I No - Go I OD
2 -3 / 8 4.7 1.875 1.791 2 -3/8

I I
2-7/8 6.5 I z
2.313 I 2.205 I 2-7/8 '""'"
~
~
~
3 -1/2 9.3 2.750 2.635 3-1/2 ~
rJl
'""'"
N
VI 4 -1/ 2 12.75 3.813 3.725 4-1/2 ~
rJl
N ~
00 ~
5 -1/2 15.5 4.562 5 -1/2 n'""'"
~
'""'"
~
~
'""'"
0
Z
rJl
All Otis nipples have an identification band machined into upper end EXTERN ALL Y
to ensure correct positioning when running tubing.
X I XN LOCK - PULLING PROCEDURE
(,
Referto diagramp. 5-30 (shown with X equalising sub)
NOTE: CORRECT PULLING TOOL IS GR-GS + prong in diagram is for illustration
only.
Pulling Procedure:
1. Check correct prong is attached to G R core

Check shear pin in GU adapter ONLY.
2. Run into the well with G R pulling tool.

Reasons for using GR instead of GS
- To enable downward jarring to loosen lock.
- To ensure we can shear off if lock is full of sand. I)
- REMEMBER: GS core must be able to move down to shear.
3. Latch lock fishing neck-wait for equalization if necessary.
4. Jar DOWN -to release "seC on keys (see p 4-15)
5. Jar UP to expand fishing neck and pull lock.
6. Pull out of hole. ")
If lock is extremely difficult to recover consider use of G H pulling tool (Hydro-

static version of GS) - See section 13.
1J
5 - 29
~ -~- ~- ~ ~-~ - -- ~-- - ~-~~ ~ ---~-~- --~
(i) Latching (ii) Pulling (Hi)Shearing.off

~ t
J.
S
~
~
I
~
v.
et'"
0
, -Z
t'"
C':J
~
~
0
~
~
~
e
~
~
a) Equalizing melon still b) Melon in lower c) Downward janing has
covering ports position allowing sheared OS and dogs are
equalization through now released from fishing
NOTE: While GS is shown here a
-=== ports neck
G R should be used to pennit
upward jarring to shear

if necessary.
"
\i ~~~
~pz
~
PROJECT 20 -X I XN I lOCKS I NIPPLES --
()
1. For a 2 - 7/8" XN nipple, complete the following.
(1) Packing bore I. D. ..................................................................................
(11) No-go I.D. ............................................................................................
(111) Nipple 0 D. """"'" ......................
2. For a 3 - 1/2" XN nipple, complete the following:
(I) Packing bore I. D. ..................................................................................
(11) No-go I. D. ............................................................................................
(111) Nipple 0 D. "'" """"
3. How many X nipples can be run in one size of tubing?
r
4. Where is the XN nipple located relative to the X nipples?
5. Name the two differences between X and XN nipples.

(1)
(11)
6. What must be changed to convert an X lock to an XN lock?
0
~
7. Measure the following dimensions on a 2-7/8 X lock
(I) Max O. D. with keys retracted .............................................................
(11) Max O. D. with keys ~p'anded ............................................................
(m) Length from top of fishing neck to bottom of packing (lock open) ....
- (IV) No of V-packings ..'.................
.I (V) O. D. of the V-packings ;......................
5 - 31
PROJECT 20 - continued
')
8. Measure the following dimensions on a 3 - 1/2 PXN Lock
(I) Max O. D. with keys retracted ...................................................
(11) Max O. D. with keys expanded ..................................................
(m) Max O. D. of equalizing sub .......................................................
(IV) No of V-packings . ....

(V) O. D. of the V-packings ..............................................................
9. List the procedure to reassemble a 3 - 1/2 X lock.
"
10.
"
Describe procedure for pinning an X Lock to an X running tool.
rot
5 - 32
PROJECT 21 -X RUNNING TOOL
()
1. On the 2 - 7/8" X Running Tool, measure the following:
(I) Max O. D. With dogs retracted "..i.e. NON-SELECTIVE
(11) Max O. D. With dogs lli.,anded i.e. SELECTIVE
(m) Length of core movement ..........................................................
(IV) Diameter of top shear pin ..........................................................
2. On the 3 - 1/2°'X Running Tool, measure the following:
(I) Max O. D. With dogs retracted i.e. NON-SELECTIVE
(11) Max O. D. i.e. SELECTIVE

n (m) Length of core movement ..........................................................
(IV) Diameter of top shear pin ..........................................................

3. What parts of the running tool LOCATE the nipple profile?
4. Describe the 3 positions of the nipple locator dogs during the selective setting
of an X Lock.
(I)
(11)
.
() (m)
5. Describe the complete procedure to selectively set an X lock in the

3rd nipple profile from the surface: (Indicate when pins shear, what position
you would set the running tool in at the surface, and any checks you would n.ake
during the procedure).
n
5 - 33
PROJECT 2t-continued - -
6. Describe the procedure for running an XN lock (Assume these are no X nipples
r
above the XN).
r'
7. What is the correct pulling tool for X and XN locks.
8. Give 2 reasons why the tool in question 7 is correct:
(1)
(11)
9. f"
Describe pulling procedure for a 3 - 1/2 XX plug.
~ 10. Prior to running an X lock selectively what 3 things should be checked

by the operator.
(1)
(11)
(m) ~
5 - 34
SECTION 6 - PLUGS
I)
Introduction 6 -2
D Plug 6 -3
Pulling prong chart DW, DD 6-5
XX plug assembly 6 -7
PX plug assembly 6 -9
(' PR mECTS
Project22 - D plugs 6 -6
Project 23 - Xx/PX Plugs 6 - 11
('
6- 1
PLUG and EQUALISING VALVE TYPES
" We have just looked at mandrels in this course but the lock mandrel is just a method
of attaching a "flow control device" to the inside of the tubing.
The flow control device can be :
(1) plug. eg D plug
(11) safety valve. eg DK
(m) Seperation tool
(IV) Test tool. eg Modified P.
(v) Amerada gauges. etc
Plugs are divided into 3 categories:
n ,~
(1) Hold pressure from below (eg. D)
(11) Hold pressure both ways (eg. XX: PX)
(m) Hold pressure from above only (eg. N test tool)
As we know, a slip lock will ONLY hold from BELOW, so it must always be used
with a plug which also ONLY holds from BELOW.
In the Otis system the initial describing the plug is followed by the initial
describing the lock mandrel.
ego D. W. - D plug on W lock.
EQUALISING DEVICE Whenever we install a plug in a well we must ~y~
run an equalising device in order to equalise the
pressure above and below the lock.
This equalisation must occur FULLY BEFORE UNLOCKING LOCK MANDREL.
Failure to equalise correctly by any of the following errors:

(1
(1) No equalising prong.
(n) Wrong equalising prong
(m) Equalising prong too short
(IV) Insufficient time allowed for equalisation
(v) Blocked equalising ports
Any of these conditions could cause the following:
(1) If high pressure below lock - tools could be blown up hole.

- lock could be difficult to unlock.
~
(11 ) If high pressure above lock - lock could be difficult to unlock.
CORRECT EQUALIZATION IS ESSENTIAL - Observe surface pressures.

('
6 - 2
D PLUG
rl
The 0 plug is designed to hold pressure from BELOW only. (see diagram
p.6-4)
The plug assembly consists of :
0 Equalizing Sub
Plug Bean.
Bean Cage.
It is used by P, O. O. below the W slip Lock and 0 collar Lock.
The" Hycar" rubber element ensures a seal at relatively low pressures while
the metal-to-metal seat seals at high pressures. The pressure rating of any
plug is determined by the lock mandrel on which it is run:
DW plug - max differential - 1500 psi

DD plug - max differen tial - 5000 psi I)"
A running prong is not required when running plugs on slip or collar locks, As
the element is not expanded until the lock is set there is sufficient fluid
by-pass around the outside of the lock.
Fluid by-pass effect is critical on nipple locks where the V packings seal -
on each nipple bore as the plug is lowered down the well. Due to the fact that
"fluid is incompressible" an alternate by - pass must be provided by holding
the equalizing device off seat while running,
WARNING -PLEASE NOTE

The wireline operator must observe any pressure changes on the lubricator
gauge and before jarring up - WAIT UNTIL FULL EQU ALIZA TION HAS
OCCURE O. .
I)
If there is doubt that the equalizing device is functioning pressure should be
applied above plug. - if pressure below is known. DO NOT OVERPRESSURE unless
pI ug is of check valve type.
Tubing can also be completely filled with fluid to reduce chances of being blown
up the hole.
- I
I There is no fixed rule to accurately determine the time required to equalise as there are many
variables to be considered. Where a plug has been used in these examplesit could also be an SSV,
S.P.M. etc. These variable are:
~ Amount of pressure differential across the plug.
Tubing size' - larger bore has larger volume to equalise.
Depth to plug - increased depth increases the volume to the surface.
Port sizesin equalising device.
Fluid viscosity.
n
6- 3
"'"
D PLUG
('
:nJ
;;:;
-
@ @
Ii"
0 0
0 0
0.....
6- 4
DW, DD PULLING PRONGS
r,
Remember' No running prongs required for above plugs because seal elements
are not expanded during running.
Running Pulling Pro ng Running Pulling Prong

Tool Tool Tool Tool
2 - 3/8 41 WO 13 40 RB 17 49P176 - - -
2 - 7/8 41 WO 14 40 RB 18 49P242 410011 40 GRL 4 49P
3 - 1/2 41 WO 22 40 RB 19 49P141 41 DO 9 40 GRL 4 49P1533
n
OW Pulling prong dimensions (inches)
No. A B C 0 Thread
- B
2 - 3/8 49 P 176 0.5 25 - 3/16 5/8 1/2- 13 NC
2 - 7/8 49 P 242 0.687 22 - 1/2 2 - 5/8 5/8 1/2 - 13 NC
3 - 1/2 49 P 141 1.125 23 - 3/8 2 - 5/16 5/8 5/8- 11 NC
uu; 0
A
DD Pulling prong dimensions (inches) f)
No. A B C 0 Thread
2 - 7/8 49 P 687 19 - 3/16 2 - 5/8 5/8 5/8- 11 NC
3 - 1/2 49 P 1533 1.062 20 - 1/4 4 5/8 5/8- 11 NC
~ NOTE: The DD plug above is not to be confused with the" DD Bridge Plug" which
utilizes a shear disc to hold pressure in both directions. Disc is sheared to
eq ualize.
6- 5
PROJECT 22 -0 PLUG
c;
1. What is the maximum differential pressure rating for the Type D bean
assembly on the following mandrels.?
a. Slip type mandrel -
b. Collar lock mandrel-
2. Explain how the D plug bean seals at :
(1) Low pressure -
(11) high pressure -

3. How is the Type D bean equalized?
(' 4. Describe how to change the packing on the bean.
5. To be sure of equalization, the prong length should be measured

with the Type D plug bean made up to a mandrel. Explain how to
measure this length.
6. What is the running tool for a 2 - 1/2 DW plug.
7.
\' What is the pulling tool for a 2 - 1/2 D W plug.
8. What is the pulling prong for a 2 - 1/2 DW plug.
('
6 - 6
XX PLUG
F)
There are two designs of plugs designed specifically for the X and XN Locks:
(1) XX plug
(11) PX plug
(1) The XX p..1ug See p. 6 - 8 is designed to be run in clean production wells.
Running - To permit FL DID BY-PASS when running the valve (melon) is
held off seat by a running prong attached to the
core of the X - Running Tool.
This valve is closed when Running Tool is sheared upwards
after setting the lock.
Pulling - A pulling prong is attached to the core of the G R pulling
tool to push the valve off seat and permit equalization
through the 4 points.
f)
CHECK - that pulling prong has not be inadvertantly shorted
by someone" redressing"threads.
In order to make a plug a ..Valve Cap" is run below equalizing sub. When
assembling onto running prong check and grease O-Rings.
NOTE: External recognition feature of X sub-equalizing holes close to NO-GO
shoulder.
The following are the most common X equalizing subs:
Nipple Bore Ref. X Equalizing Sub Valve Cap Running Prong Pulling Prong.
1.875 20XO1870l 20 R 208 49 Q 496 49 QO 35
2.313 20 XO 23100 20 R7 49 Q 1056 49 QO 44

')
2,750 20 XO 27504 20 R 181 49 Q 599 49 QO 43
3.813 20 XO 38104 20 R 59 49 P 640 49 P 641
The following chart is to aid prong identification:

REF 2" (1.87") 2 1/2" (2.313") 3"(2,750")
(;
A 4 15/16" 51/8" 5 1/2"
- Z
...... D-' -A
B
C
0,750" 1.095" 1.5"
Z 0.875" 1.220" 1.625"
Z D 0.965" 1.340" 1.71"
~ = =l THREAD 1/2-13 UNC 2A 5/8-11 UNC 2A 3/4"-lOUNC2A
0 G F
E 12 1/4" 13718" 13"
Z
...... t
QUill OI] F 0.97" 1.30" 1.713"
I I.
i iJ
G 0.5" 0.75" 0,75"
p.. E THREAD 1/2"-13 UNC 2A 5/8-11 UNC 2A 5/8-11 UNC 2A
n
6- 7
X EQUALIZING SUB
()
=
- NO - GO housing
0 - Ring
Equalizing holes.
Valve
0 - Ring (On 3 - 1 I 2 and

bigger sizes only)
('
Valve Cap.
()
6 - 8
P EQUALIZING SUB
(\
Prong
n-?
Fluid By - Pass Hole
No-Go Housing
Seal Elements
Equalizing holes
f)
0 - Ring (3 - 1/ 2" and bigger sizes only)
-
~ Valve Cap.
()
6 - 9
PX PLUG
('i
(n) The PX P.lug. - (see p. 6-9) was designed to. be run in wells containing
solids such as sand or pipe scale. The external fishing neck is easier to
retrieve if bailing is required and the bulk of the steel bar prevents sand
entering the lock and equalizing sub.
Running- : P prong is run on an SB (or T running tool). Prior to latching prong

CHECK running tool will shear correctly. The lock plus P equalizing sub
and valve cap is run and locked in the X (or XN) nipple prior to running
the prong (no running prong necessary as fluid by passes through sub)
i.e. it takes 2 trips to set a PX (or PXN)
NOTE: Hole up centre of P prong is for fluid by-pass WHEN

n ENTERING THE EQUALIZING SUB. As fluid is in-
compressible it would be impossible for prong to enter sub completely
without this hole.
-.Pulling P prong is pulled using an SB pulling tool. Equalisation

occurs during the time it takes to bring the prong to the surface and
to run back with a G R to recover the lock.
As for the XX plug - a valve cap is screwed below equalising sub.

NOTE: If diameter of standard equalizing holes (3/32) have been increased to
equalise in heavy fluid DO NOT USE IN HIGH PRESSURE
GAS OR THIN OIL - Rapid equalisation may blow tools up the hole.
The following. are the most common PX equalising subs:

n Nipple Bore PX sub Valve Cap -+cProng Fishing Running!
Ref. Neck Pulling Tool
1.875 24 PX 18711 20 R 208 1.375
2.313 24 PX 23105 20 R 7 1.375 2"
2.750 24 PX 27505 20 R I 8 I 1.375 40SB 1
3.813 24 PX 38107 20 R 59 1.375

~
~ Visually check this size - older prongs were 1.187.
The P prong is also available with 2 opposing sets of V-packings in place of the 'grommet'
type seal elements shown.
('
6 - 10
PROJECT 23 - XX I PX PLUGS
/\.
I
1. Indicate the way a XX and PX sub can be recognised by looking at the outside
of the body:
(1) XX .................................... . ................
(11) PX .........................................................................................
2. Explain under what conditions it is advisable to use a PX instead of an XX.
3. What is the disadvantageof a PX plug?
r'\.
I
4. For a 3" PX plug fill in the following:
(1) Fishing Neck diameter................................................................
(11) Nominal size and type .running/pulling tool
5. Is it possible to be.blown up the hole while pulling a PX prong?
6. Why does an XX plug require a running prong?
F)
7. What is the purpose of the hole drilled up the centre of the PX prong?
-
~
It
6 - 11
SECTION 7 - TEST TOOLS
,
0
Introduction 7-2
N Test Tools 7- 3
Modified PX Test Tool 7-5
X Selective Test Tool 7 -7
PROJECTS
('
Project 24 - Test Tools 7-9
" ---
-
~
('
7- I
TEST TOOLS
n
This is the final category of plugs:
i.e. Hold presure from ABOVE only.
Uses of test tools:
1. To test tubing - usually immediately after running tubing and prior to perforating.
2. Set hydraulic packer.
3. Protect lower formation while stimulating upper zone.
(' The actual types of test tools are:

(1) N Test tool (p. 7-3)
(n) X Selective test tool (p. 7-5)
(m) PX Modified (p. 7-7)
('
7- 2
'" ...
N TEST TOOL
n
Designed to run into XN nipple and seat against no-go ring while sealing in the packing
bore. As pressure will only be held from above all V-Packings face upwards.
A built in check valve permits easy equalizing. This check valve has a rubber
seal for low pressure sealing with a high pressure metal- to -metal seat included.
This same design of check/equalizing device is utilized also on the X Selective

and Modified P Test Tools.
It is usual to test against N test tool after removing the tool string from the
well. However if the wire and toolstring is to be left attached to the
N Test tool during the pressure test the following precautions should be observed:
(i) Pressure test lubricator assembly immediately- prior to running

N Test tool. This is to ensure there are no minor leaks which f)
could invalidate a tubing pressure test.
ii) Ensure tubing is dean - pressure testing "flexes" tubing and

will depositany scale and sand aroundtoolstring.
IF THEREIS ANY DOUBT- REMOVETOOLSTRINGDURINGTEST
(iii) After test:-Bleed pressure off SLOWLY while pulling a bind on

wire with hydraulics of wireline unit.
Running Tool - SSJ or SB

Pulling Tool - RB or SB
I
N Test tools:
It
Tubing Nipple N Test Running! Alternate
Neck Size
Size Bore Tool Pulling Tool Running Tool
2318 1.875 14 NO 4 1.38 40SSJ1 40SB1
27/8 2.313 14 NO 8 1.38 40SSJ1 40SB1
- 31J2
41J2
2.750
3.813
14 QO 4
14 NO 4
2.313
2.313
40SSB
40SSB
40SB9
40SB9
I
IIi
*' Note Q part No.: Original designed for heavy wall tubing
1\
7 - 3
iiiiio. ..
N TEST TOOL
0,
Fishing Neck
Roll Pin
Seal Retainer
n Drop (Dart)
/
/'
/
/
/
Cage /
I' - Seal Ring
I' '
/ '
/ ~
/ "."
I' "..
/ "..
I' "..
I' "..
I' ". "
,'1 ".. Seat Insert
0 - Ring
Packing Nut
Male Adapter
('8
V Packing
Female Adapter
J
.. Adapter Mandrel
(1-'
7 - 4
MODIFIED PX TEST TOOL
r)
Fishing Neck
- Packing Retainer
Roll Pin
Drop
Seal Ring
I)
Cage
- Seat Insert
0- Ring
Prong
I)
Sub V-Packing (Sealing face upwards)
7 - 5
MODIFIED PX TEST TOOL
n
The Modified PX test tool holds pressure from above ONLY.
For this reason the V-packing on the lock and the prong FACE UPWARDS.
The lock mandrel is run without keys so the position of the lock fishing neck
and expander mandrel can be open or closed. For this reason the prong can be
inserted into the plug and the whole assembly run on an SB.
When pulling it is possible occasionally to recover prong and lock together.

However if there is any sand or scale to hold plug the prong will be recovered
first and lock is recovered with a OS or OR.
Use of this plug minimizes the risk of being stuck beneath sand or scale after pressure
testing the tubing.
() Note: Hole thru bottom of sub
Prong is V-packing type - not element seal design.
('
~".-..
('""
7 - 6
---,
~.
:VLOR
RAINING
' ONSULTANTS
X SELECTIVE TEST TOOL . LIMITED
l"\
Qp.eration :
The Otis Type X Selective Test Tool tests tubing, locates leaks, or sets hydraulic
set packers. Designed to hold pressure from above, the Type X Selective
Test Tools may be set in compatible X or XN Landing nipples in the tubing string.
Keys retracted, the tool is run to a point below the desired nipple in
SELECTNE position, then picked up to trip to NON-SELECTIVE. This expands the
X profile keys and locates when the tool is lowered.
Pressure may then be applied from ABOVE.
Design Benefits:
1. Designed for high pressure ratings, 8000 to 10,000 psi (depending on size).
()
2. Located in the lowest nipple then moving up the tubing with the test tool to
minimize wireline trips.
3. Can be set in SSD profile.
4. Can isolate the section of tubing which may be leaking.
The following X Selective Test Tools are the most commonly used:
I I Keys Alternate
Assembly Nipple Fish Neck Running and f'
Expanded Running
Number SizelIns. O.D.lIns O.D.lIns. Pulling Tool Tool
11
14xO18710 1.875 1.375 2.19 4OSSJ1 4OSB1
14x023110 2.313 1.375 2.62 4OSSJ1 4OSB1

.
14x02751O 2.750 1.750 3.19 4OSSB 4OSB2

: I
14x03851O 3.813 2.313 4.12 4OSSJ3 4OSB9
r',
7 - 7
X SELECTIVE TEST TOOL
n
Fishing Neck
Valve
Seat Assembly
\'
~
X-Profile keys
V-Packing
(' 0
0
Main Spring
i:>
Dog Spring
.I Locator Dogs
Main Mandrel
()
7 - 8
PROJECT 24 - TEST TOOLS
f\
1. List the applications of test tools
a)
b)
c)
2. How is an N Test Tool set?
3. How is an N Test Tool pulled?
4. What precautions must be taken if the operator stays on the test

tool while pressuring up?
n
(1)
(11)
5. What precautions must be taken if the operator stays on the test tool when
pressure is released?
6. List 3 types of test tool:
(1)
(11) r----.I
(m)
7. What is the max. pressure differential which can be placed across a

test tool?
I (1) From ABOVE................................................................................
~ (11) From BELOW ................................................................................
8. Describe running and pulling procedure for Modified PX.

I
7 - 9
SECTION 8 - SSD's
~
I
Introduction 8 -2
XO- SSD 8-3
XD- SSD 8- 5
-
XA SSD 8 -7
B Shifting tool 8-9
Selective Downshift Tool 8 -12
Separation Tool 8 -14
Side Door Choke 8 -16

r',
PROJECTS
Project 25 - Sliding Side Doors 8 - 17

Project 26 - Shifting Tools 8 - 19
Project 27 - Separation Tools and Side Door Choke 8 - 21
('
8 - 1
SLIDING SIDE DOORS
f)
Alternative names: - Sliding Sleeve

-SSD
S.S.D.'s are installed in the tubing during well completion to provide a means
of communication between the tubing and the annulus.
The most common uses are as follow:
1. To provide circulation path:
(1) When putting a well into production after drilling or workover

operation by circulating the drilling fluid into the casing
and replacing it with a lighter fluid in tubing.
(' (11) To kill a well prior to pulling the tubing during workover operation.
Reverse of above procedure.
2. To allow production to enter tubing from the desired production zone.
3. To provide access to the formation for stimulation.
Types in common use:
(1) XO - Standard open down SSD.

(11) XD - Larger flow area, open down SSD.
(m) XA - Open up SSD.
QReration : SSD's are available from Otis in either jar down to open, or jar up to
open designs.
(' The most common are the jar down to open such as the XO and the XD.
Any number can be installed and opened selectively using the 142 BO
Selective Downshift tool.
All SSD's now being installed have an X profile in their upper bore
(designated by the letter X in title). This permits the installation of plugs,
separation tools, and X selective test tools as may be required.
All Otis SSD's have an equalizing feature whereby movement of the inner
sleeve towards the open position first uncovers a small port. Constant
~ monitoring of the surface pressure (lubricator gauge) will indicate when
SSD has moved into this equalizing position. WAIT UNTIL PRESSURE HAS
EQUALIZED before continuing jarring.
8 - 2
XO SLIDING SIDE DOOR
-
n
The Type" XO" Sliding Door is designed with a' Type .,X' Nipple Profile
above and a polished pack-off area below the inner Sliding Sleeve. With the
inner sleeve in the closed position, sealing off the side ports, the lower zone
can be produced through the essentially full-open bore. To produce the upper zone
and close off the lower zone, the inner sleeve is opened to 'provide com-
munication between the casing annulus and tubing string.
The Type "XO" Sliding Side-Door is opened by downward jarring; a feature

that increases the versatility of this tool for use with the entire X-Line of sub-
surface equipment, The Sliding Side-Door shifting tool is designed not to lock in
the Type "X' Nipple nor are the running/pulling tools for the Type "X"
Lock designed to affect the sleeve,
The Type "XO"' Sliding Side-Door may be located anywhere in the tubing
string where it is required or may be desirable to provide communication to the
tubing/casing annulus, The sliding side door is a valuable aid in such completion
n
and production procedures as circulating, washing, alternating production
zone of any selective or multiple completion.
It may be run into the hole with the sleeve in either the open or closed position,
The sleeve is then closed or opened as necessary using standard wireline methods,
The following are the most common sizes of XO-SSD's:
ASSEMBLY NO. 121 XO I 121 XO 3 121 XO 54 I 121 XO 80
SIZE 2 - 318 2-718 3-112* 4 - 112

MATERIAL 9CR - IMO 9CR - IMO 9CR - IMO 9CR - IMO
THREAD EU EU EU EU
REF PART NAME

I Top Sub I 121 X I 121 X 8 121 X 58 121 X 475
2
3
4
Nipple
0 - Ring
Db!. Male Adapter
I
2
I
121 X 39
91 Q 1229
121 A 18
121 A 645
91QI234 -H
121 A 21
121 X 57
91QI237 - H
121 X 51
121 A 508
91Q1246 - H
91 V 4219
I n
5 Split Ring Segment 4 121 A 43 121 A 48 121 X 53 121 A 511
6 -
0 Ring I 91QI331 - H 91Q131 - H 91QI198 - H 91Q1246 - H
7 Female Adapter 4 121 A 17 121 A 644 121 X 54 121 A 509
8 Closing Sleeve I 121 A 41 121 A 1435 121 X 56 121 A 510
9 V - Packing ( ) 91V83 (10) 91V84 (12) 91V 3329 (8) 91V 4768
10 0 - Ring I 91QI331 - H 91Ql31 - H 91QI98 - H 91QI64 - H
11 Bottom Sub I 121 A 2 121 A 9 121 X 55 121 A 476
13 Bottom V Packings () - - 91V 5042 (4) 91V 5038 (4)
Length 33.94 37.93 44.88 49.67
I 0.0. I 3.09 I 3.75 I 4.28 I 5.5
LO. Nipples 1.875 2.313 2.750 3.813
Flow Area (sq. in) 1.459 2.446 4.459 5.560
Shifting tool (std.) 42 BO 116 42 BO 118 42 BO 147 42 BO III
Selective Shifting tool
* Also availablein 2,813nipple bore: uses 42 HO 146,

142 BO 4 142 BO 3 142 BO I 142 BO 7
n
8 - 3
XO-SSD
A
..
OPENS DOWNWARD
Female Adapter
-_4. Double Male Adapter
~5. Split Ring Segment
-12. Female Adapter
(' UPPER PACKING DETAIL
- 2. Nipple
3. O-Ring
8. Closing Sleeve
3.0 -Ring - 7. Female Adapter
0 _9. V -Packing
LOWER PACKING DETAIL
-SLIDING
n XO SIDE DOOR
8-4
XD-SSD
(1
OPENS DOWNWARD
7. Female Adapter
Coupling
9. V-Packing
4. Double Male Adapter
Upper End
Identificationband - 5. Split Ring Segment
I. Top Sub
UPPER PACKING DETAIL

')
2. Nipple
3. 0 - Ring
LARGE DIAMETER
HOLES
8. Closing Sleeve
3. 0 - Ring 12. Female Adapter
9. V - Packing I)
10. 0 - Ring
11. Bottom Sub 9. V - Packing
12. Female Adapter
- LOWER PACKING DETAIL
~
XD - SLIDING SIDE DOOR
'I
8-5
XD - SLIDING SIDE DOOR
,~
The XO has larger flow ports between the tubing and the annulus. The LO. through
the bore is the same as the XO.
It is identical in operation to the XO (ie same overall dimensions, opens down).
It was developed for oil wells with heavy crude so that SSO ports would not restrict
flow of oil from the formation of the tubing.
Compare the flow areas in the following chart with the flow areas of the
same size XO (p. 8-3) and XA (p. 8-7)
The following are the most common sizes of XO-SSD's:
r"
". ASSEMBLY NO. 121 X D 23 121 XD 2 121 XD 3 121 XD 7
SIZE 2 - 3 /8 2-7/8 3 - 1/2 4-1/2

MATERIAL 9CR - IMO 9CR - IMO 9CR - IMO
THREAD ED ED ED
REF PART NAME Qty

I Top Sub I 121 X I 121 D 13 121 D 58 121 D 149
2 Nipple I 121 D 37 121 D 8 121 D 18 121 D 30
3 -
0 Ring 2 91 Q 1229 H - 91QI234 -H 91QI237 - H 91Q1246 - H
4 Db!. Male Adapter I 121 A 18 121 A 21 121 X 51 91 V 4219
5 Split Ring Segment 4 121 A 43 121 A 48 121 X 53 121 A 511
6 -
0 Ring I 91QI331 H - 91Q1335 - H 91QI98 - H 91Q206 - H
8 Closing Sleeve I 121 D 5 121 D 9 121 D 17 121 D 25
9 V - Packing ( ) 91V83 (10) 91V84 (10) 91V 3329 (12) 91V 4768 (12)
10 0 - Ring I 91QI331 - H 91Q131 - H 91QI338 - H 91QI64 - H
II Bottom Sub I 121 X 2 121 D 14 121 X 55 121 A 148
Length 33.94 41.00 44.88 46.00

('
~~
O.D. 3.09 3.75 4.28 5.5
I.D. (Nipple Bore) 1.875 2.313 2.750 3.813
How Area (sq. in) 2.854 4.200 5.900 12.60
Shifting tool (std.) 42 BO 116 42 BO 118 42 BO 147 42 BO III
- Selective Shifting tool 142 BO 4 142 BO 3 142 BO I 142 BO 7
. Refer to drawing on p. 8-5 for part identification

* Also available in 2.813 nipple bore: use 42 BO 146.
('
8 - 6
XA - SLIDING SIDE DOOR
n
The XA-SSD opens UP. I.e. : the .9lm°site direction to the XO and XD.
It was a design progression from the original OOTypeA' sleeve by adding an

X profile in the top sub.
The advantage of an "open up" SSD is that it is easier to open in heavy oil
or drilling mud, because upward jar action is more effective than jarring down.
The disadvantage is that the shifting tool is above the flow ports when the sleeve
opens so there is a greater risk of being blown up the hole.
The following are the most common sizes of XA-SSD's:
ASSEMBLY NO. 121 XA 40 121 XA 38 121 XA 281 121 XA 38182

n
SIZE 2 - 3 /8 2-7/8 3-1/2* 4-1/2
MATERIAL Alloy Alloy 9CR - IMO 9CR - 1MO
THREAD EU EU EU EU
REF PART NAME Qty (l2IXAI8719) (l21XA23 180) 12IXA27560)

I Top Sub I 121 X 309 121 X 286 121 X 89 121 X 1363
2 Nipple I 121 A 720 121 A 723 121 A 57 121 A 977
3 0 - Ring 2 91 Q 1331 - H 91QI234 -H 91QI237 - H 91QV1246 - H
4 Db!. Male Adapter I 121 A 18 121 A 21 121 X 51 91 V 4219
5 Split Ring Segment 4 121 A 43 121 A48 121 X 53 (6) 121 A 976
6 -
0 Ring I 91Q1229 H - 91Ql31 91QI338 - H 91QVI64 -H
8 Closing Sleeve I 121 A 592 121 A 46 121 X 56 121 A 1030
9 V - Packing ( ) 91V83 (10) 91V84 (10) 91V 3329 (12) 91V 4768 (12)
10 -
0 Ring I 91Q1229 - H 91Ql31 121 X 51 9IQVI64 H -
11 Bottom Sub I 121 X 310 121 X 285 121 X 88 121 X 1364
Length 34.00" 35.62" 44.88" 49.48"

.~
0.0. 3.09 3.75" 4.28" 5.5"
LD. Nipples 1.875" 2.313" 2.750" 3.813"
Flow Area (sq. in) 1.459" 2.446" 4.459" 6.000"
Shifting tool (std.) 42 BO 116 42 BO 118 42 BO 147 42BO I11
- Selective Shifting tool 142 BO 4
Refer to drawing on p. 8-5 for part identification

142 BO 3 142 BO I 142 BO 7
* Also available in 2.813 nipple bore: uses 42 Ba 146.

~
~
--
8 - 7
XA-SSD
f'}
OPENS UPWARD
Coupling
Upper End
Identification band I. Top Sub
7. Female Adapter
9. V - Packing
2. Nipple
(\
9. V - Packing
7. Female Adapter
UPPER PACKING DETAIL
8. Closing Sleeve
3.0- Ring
12. Female Adapter

I l. Bottom Sub 6. 0 - Ring
5. Split Ring Segment
4. Double Male Adapter
~ 9. V - Packing
12. Female Adaptor
LOWER PACKING DETAIL

XA. SLIDING SIDE DOOR
f'")
8 - 8
B SHIFTING TOOL
-
(i
v
This end up to shift sleeve down
Locking Screw
Top sub
Collet
POSITIVE KEYS '-1
Steel Shearpin
Key Retainer
Spring
Standard Key
Self-releasing
Profile
Lower key retainer

)
With these keys the shear pin must be
sheared to retract keys & release tool
used:
(i) To operate drop sub after tubing Body
conveyed perforation
(ii) To open upwards one SSD only
below other SSD's. (Originally
used for XA SSD's)
~ This end up to shift sleeve up
OTIS B SHIFTING TOOL (42 BO )
8 - 9
DOWNSHIFf POSITION (e.g. OPENING XO, XD)
.. .. .. .
inner sleeve
00 shifting
keys
0 retracted
when pin
shifting key shears
positoned
in recess
releasing
feature
==
Latched in position If sleeve is too tight Spacer ring can be Releasing when Tool cannot latch
- pin will shear inserted. S.S.D. has moved fully. when pulling up.
DOWNSHIFrING ONLY
(see below)
UPSHIFf POSITION (e.g. CLOSING XO, XD)
. .. ..
NEVER
DO
THIS
- L..J
-' Latched in position Releasing when
SSD has moved
Keys retracted when
pin sheared if SSD
Use of spacer ring in UPSHIFr
position is JlQl.p.ermitted
fully. is too tight. Tool can be permanently jammed
in SSD if sleeve will not move.
C ~J
~ ~ z,
~~~
I
~
-~
---~~- ~ ~ - ~---,-----
B SHIFTING TOOL
('
Refer to diagram p. 8-9.
The Otis B Shifting Tool was designed to open or close all of the Otis SSD's. Charts
on each page will show the correct tool for each respective size.
This tool has two pin connections to permit either opening or closing of the sleeve
by inverting the tool.
(1) With the 90 degree shoulder on keys facing DOWN.

Opens -XO, XD
Closes - XA
(u) With the 90 degree shoulder on keys facing UP

Closes - XO, XD
(\
Opens XA-
NOTE: To open an XO or XD sleeve which is BELOW another SSD the SELECTIVE
DOWNSIDFf tool must be used See p. 8-12
Operation: Refer p. 8-10
(1) Select direction in which tool will shift sleeve and install on toolstring
with 90 degree shoulder facing direction of required movement
(u) Run into SSD and locate.
(111) Jar against sleeve in desired direction. If moving sleeve

up, jars cannot be closed to hit a lick: -rUli into the SSD from below,
adjusting speed to give desired impact.
(IV) Observe lubricator gauge pressure CAREFULL Y. Stop when pressure

(' changes and ~ until pressure is equalised. Pressure should be fully
equ~lised through the 4 small ports in the sleeve prior to main flow
ports being opened.
(v) Continue jarring to fully open SSD. Tool wil1 automatically release
when the raised portion of keys is ..squeezed" by the ID of the polished
bore.
I
(VI) Tool should be passed completely through SSD three times to check SSD
fully open (or closed).
~ (vu) Pull out of hole

SHEARED.
and VISUALLY CHECK TOOL HAS NOT
If the steel shear pin has sheared sleeve MAY NOT be fully open
Re-pin and re-run tool. It is good operating practice to
checkjreplace pin before each run a~ pin could be partially
('. sheared from previous jar action.
8 - 11
SELECTIVE DOWNSHIFT TOOL
J--'"
I
This tool was designed to ..Selectively" open XO, and XD SSD's by passing
through the upper sleeve(s). It will ONLY shift sleeves DOWNWARDS and should
never be inverted (hence only one pin end) as it could get stuck below a tight
sleeve.
NOTE: this tool does not have a shear pin.
See components on diagram p. 8-13

(1) Selective - Shifting keys retracted to pass upper SSD's.
-locater dogs extendedto locatepackingbore.
(11) Non - Selective - Shifting keys extended to locate in SSD.
To set tool in Selective:
1. Grip bottom of main mandrel in vice.

n
2. Insert Screw driver in slot through the hole (A) in upper end of
Spring housing and lever housing downwards compressing mainspring.
3. At the same time as (2) above squeeze the upper end of locator dogs inwards
and release screwdriver.
4. Tool should move partially to SELECTIVE position.

5. Using the handle of the screwdriver strike the lower ends of
each shifting key inwards.
6. Tool should snap into Selective. If not repeat from (2) above.
Ogeration :
1. Tool is run in SELECTIVE to below SSD to be shifted.
~)
2. Pull upwards through SSD to trip to NON - SELECTIVE
3. Sit down in SSD and jar down. OBSERVE EQUALISATION PROCEDURES -
AS FOR B SHIFTING TOOL.
4. When SSD has moved fully tool will automatically pass through SSD.
5. Check by passing 3 times through SSD.
6. Pull out of the well.
~ NOTE: Selective Downshift tool has a box thread at its lower end. *
* This is to permit a B shifting tool to be run in the UPSHIFT POSITION to

. close SSD as tools are picked up. It is advisableto run a 2 ft piece of stem between
the two tools as a spacer.
* Use only in special circumstances. f)
8 - 12
SELECTIVE DOWNSHIFT TOOL
Fishing Neck
Upper Key Retainer Key
n Keys
Key Spring
Lower Key Retainer
Spring
Spring Housing
Dog Retainer
('\ Spring
Split Ring
Nipple Locator Dog
Main Mandrel.
.0
8 - 13
~ - -_. -- .
SEPARATION SUB
r.
.
"-
" "-
"-
"-
""
"-
Equalizing Valve" "-
"
" n
"
Body Weldment
Equalising slots
/
/
/
/
/
/
Weld /
/
/
/
/ ./')
/
/ Flow
/
"/
Restriction
to limit equalization rate
-
~ t
X
No flow
8 - 14
SEPARATION TOOL
('
Refer to Diagram p 8-14
The separation tool is made up of :
(1) X Lock
(11) X Separation Sub
(m) Spacer pipe (Mandrel Extension)
(IV) Packing Mandrel
It is designed to plug lower zone and permit flow from upper zone.
While this same result could be achieved by plugging lower zone in lower
nipple and flowing well through the S.S.D. this may cause a problem in sand
(' producing zones.
As the production and sand enters the SSD the abrupt change in direction will permit
some of the sand to settle out onto the plug. This can make recovery of the plug
difficult and time consuming if a sand bailer must be used.
By running a separation tool directly into the SSD the same effect is achieved.
i.e. : bottom zone plugged; upper zone flowed. However, there is insufficient space-
between flow ports in separaticlllsub and the integral plug to allow sand to accumulate.
Runnin~ : Procedure same as for XX plug (refer p 6-7)

A running prong must be used to provide fluid by-pass while
runnIng In.
PullinB:: Using GR and equalising prong (as for XX plug refer p 6-7) Wait for pressure
to equalise before pulling.
0. CAUTION: Some separation subs still in use have V-thread connections. Care must be
taken to ensure lock is compatible.
(Newer locks have square threadform).
NOTE: It is advisable to plug the lower zone prior to opening upper SSD
and installing the separation tool for the following reasons.
.. (1) To prevent flow from one zone to another if there is a pressure

differential across the zones.
(11) To prevent excessive + or differential across the

separation tool when it is pulled.
~.
tJ
8 - 15
SIDE DOOR CHOKE
0
Similar in appearance to a separation tool assembly a Side Door Choke uses an X
equalizing sub in place of a Separation Sub. All other components are the same.
The purpose of the Side Door Choke is to plug a leaking SSD. While its installation
does reduce the flow area through the SSD it permits continued production of lower
zone without communication with the upper zone.
Running and Pulling procedure is identical to XX plug and separation tool.
t
f)
X equalising Sub
I)
f "
X X No flow
~
How
'}
8 - 16
PROJECT 25 - SLIDING SIDE DOORS
()
1. In which direction do the following SSD's open?
(1) XO ............................................................................
(n) XA ,. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .
(111) XD .............................................................................
2. What type of internal profile do all of these SSD's contain?
3. Using the table on p 7 - 3, complete the following information for a 3-1/2"

XO-SSD.
('. (1) O.D. ....................................................................................
(n) I.D. .
(nl) Length ..................................................................................
(IV) Standard Shifting tool Part No.' """""""""""""""""""""""""
(V) Selective Shifting tool Part No. : """""""""""""""""""""""""
(VI) Flow Area. .
4. When opening an SSD what precautions should you take?
(l
5. Using the table on p.7-6 complete the following information for a 3-1/2" XD-SSD
- (1) O.D.
(n) I.D.
....................................................................................
~ (In) Length. """"""""" """"""'" .......
(IV) Standard Shifting tool Part No.' ..................................................
(V) Selective Shifting tool Part No. : .................................................
n- (VI) Flow Area. """""""""""
8 - 17
PROJECT 25 - continued
6. Name the 3 p'ositionsin the Otis SSD's:

n
(1)
(11)
(111)
7. How many XO-SSD's can be run in a tubing string?
8. When is it advantage to run an XA-SSD rather than XO?
r)
9. What is the difference in flow area between:
(1) 3-1/2 XO ......................................................................................
(11) 3-1/2 XD ......................................................................................
10. Calculate the cross-sectional flow area through the bore of a 3-1/2 SSD.
Area of circle = Trr 2 where 11" = 3.14.
11. What is the purpose of the second polished bore at the bottom end of all
Otis SSD's.
~ (1)
(11)
(1
8 - 18
PROJECT 26 - SHIFTING TOOLS
\~
1. Name the two different types of Otis shifting tools in most common use:
(i)
(11)
2. Name three SSD's these tools will shift.
(1)
(11)
(m)
3. On the 42 BO type why are there two pin threads?
n
4. On the 14.2 BO Type why is there a pin thread on one end only?
5. What is the purpose of the box thread in the bottom of the 142 BO type?
6. Why has the 42 BO type got a shear pin?
7. Why does the 142 BO ~ have a shear pin?
('
8. What causes both these shifting tools to release when the SSD inner sleeve has
shifted fully?
-
..
9. How do you check the SSD is fully open?
('
8 -19
PROJECT 26 - Continued
r)
10. Describe the procedure to open the lower XD-SSD in a well without
opening the upper SSD.
11. What should you check on the 42 BO Shifting tool immediately after you pull
it out of the well?
fJ
n
,
8 -20
J
PROJECT 27 - SEP. TOOLS AND S. D. CHOKES
n
1. Name the 4 components which make up the separation tool.
(I)
(11)
(11)
(IV)
2. Why is separation tool used?
tJ 3. Does the separation tool have to be run with a running prong?
If yes, why?
4. Does the separation require a pulling prong?
5. When would a side door choke be used?
n-'"
6. Which component must be changed to convert a separation tool to a side door choke?
('
8 - 21
SECTION 9 -DOWNHOLE SAFETY VALVES
I.-J\,
Introduction 9 -2
D.K. 9 -3
OK - Operating Sequence 9 -5
- Ball and Seat Detail 9-7
- Pinning Procedure 9 - 10
- Running procedure 9 - 11
- Pulling procedure 9 - 12
Control Panel. 9 - 13
0-
,
PROJECTS
Project28 - OK 9 - 16
~oject
, 29 - Control Panel 9 - 17
('
-
~
('
9 - 1
SAFETY VAL VES
n"
There are 3 main categories of safety valves
(1) Surface Controlled Subsurface Safety Valves (S.C.SSV)
(11) Direct Controlled Subsurface Safety Valves (D.C.SSV)
(m) Surface Safety Valves (SSV)
The subject of this section is S.c.S.S.V. However we will briefly look at each of
these categories.
(1) S.C.S.S.V. - as their name suggests, these valves are run below the surface but can be
controlled from the surface. This control is achieved by hydraulic
pressure transmitted from a control panel on the surface to the valve by
n stainless steel tubing.
We will look at this installation in detail
(11) D.C.S.S.V. - originally known as "Storm Chokes" these valves, also run into the
tubing, are designed to detect an abnormal situation or emergency
and shut in to protect the well and the environment. The two basic
designs either detect an increase in FLOW (Differential type)
or a DECREASE in p'ressure (Ambient type) above or below
normal limits. Although they have generally been replaced by
the S.c.S.S.V. type they can still be set in place of an S.C.S.S.V.
if the control line develops a leak.
(m) S.S.V. - Designed to automatically shut in the well on the surface in an emergency.
Various sensors maintain the pressure to the ..actuator ..

(' mounted on the Xmas tree (usually a wing valve). Should any
abnormal situation be detected the well is automatically
shut in. If this actuator is on the upper master valve
it must be physically locked out of service before running
wireline through the valve.
-
~
(1
9 - 2
DK S.C.S.S.¥
n
~gn:
The DK safety valve uses a ball and seat which effectively shuts in well when
rotated a 1/2 turn.
The DK is a normally closed valve - i.e: when not subjected to any pressure above
the piston the internal spring holds the valve in the closed position.
°p.eration :
When installed in the XEL Nipple, control line pressure' is applied between
the 2 sets of V-packing and enters a port in the housing. This hydraulic pressure
then acts on the piston which moves downward against the spring force, thus
rotating the ball to the open position.
fJ
Prior to commencing to rotate the ball, the piston pushes the secondary sealing
surface off its seat which permits EQUALIZATION. With approx. 1:1 ratio the
well pressure equivalent will need to be applied to control line.
Control line pressure should be maintained 1000 psi above well shut-in pressury.
Limitations:
The standard DK is designed to operate in wells up to 5000 psi shut-in pressures.

It is also available in 10,000 and 15,000 psi models.
Maximum depth is determined by the hydrostatic head of the control line fluid.
When the force on the piston created by this pressure is greater than the upward
spring force the valve will no longer operate.
With a 0.35 psi per ft. gradient fluid this depth is approx. 500 ft.
n
If greater installation depths are required 2 additional spring modules can be
added to increase working depth 500 ft per module.
The new model, DKD, has a smaller piston area plus 2 internal springs which
increases its installation depth to approx. 2500 ft.
9- 3
DK-CONTROLLED SUB-SURFACE SAFETY VALVE
()
Top Sub
Hydraulic
1/8" NPT thread Pressure
Piston
Housing
(\
] V - Packing
Packing mandrel
Spring
Extension Spring
(flow sleeve) Compressed
(' Equalizing port
Adapter Sub
Body Secondary Seat
- Seat
Control Arms
Sleeve Weldment Primary Seat

~ Ball
0 CLOSED OPEN
9 - 4
-_£ I --
FLUID
(I) (11) (m) (IV)
./
Hydraulic Hydraulic
Pressure Pressure
0
(Partial)
~
0
~
~
\0 ~
....
Z
VI ~
00
~
Secondary ,0
Seat ~
~
Primary z
Seat n
~
CLOSED EQUALIZING OPEN IN AN EMERGENCY
Spring force closes ball Secondary Seat Open Hydraulic force, Fluid can be pumped
above piston greater from above to open ball.
than spring force
~~0~5
..zz"
3:~z
~~CI
) ) ) ) 0~
DK - OPERATING SEQUENCE
r) Refer to diagrams (1) to (IV) p. 9-5
(1) CLOSED When hydraulic pressure is bled off at the surface the
spring force pushes upwards. The ball is moved up-
wards and a slot in the ball causes the ball to
rotate against 2 fixed pins in the sleeve weldment
(see detail p. 9-8)
The ball seals against its

seat which has been lapped
to ensure a 100% seal - this is the .p..ri!n.ill.xseat.
On the top side of the seat the secondary- seat
seals against the connector.
(n) EQUALISING Hydraulic pressure moves piston down until secondary

r seat opens and permits equalisation
ports in the flow sleeve. Observe point at which
through the
pressure increases at surface and isolate hydra-

ulic pressure immediately. This will allow valve
to fully equalize through secondary seat prior
to being opened fully.
DO NOT OPEN RAPIDLY WITHOUT EQUALISING

AS THIS STRESSES BALL AND CONTROL ARMS.
(m) OPEN After equalisation is complete, pressure control line to well

pressure plus 7000 Kpa (1000 psi).
Ball will be held open unless control line pressure
is bled off.
(\ DO NOT USE BALL VALVE TO SHUT -IN A FLOWING WELL.
This valve is for EMERGENCY USE ONLY.
(IV) Pumping through a DK:-this should be avoided unless absolutely necessary.
The following are examples of situations where this may be considered necessary.
(1) To kill a well through at a DK which is stuck in the nipple.
(n) To open the ball to latch DK with a pulling prong if control line
~ is leaking and ball cannot be opened by hydraulic pressure.
\'
9 - 6
~
YLOR
..- RAINING
DK - BALL AND SEAT DETAIL
.. ONSULTANTS
.
. .. LIMITED
'\
Refer to diagrams p. 9-8
(i) Exploded view. In sizes up to 3 -1/2" the ball and seat are manufactured as
a matched set and should not be interchanged.
The control arms are identified as left and right by engraving
which matches left and right on the ball. Ensure ball is installed
correctly - i.e. : Normally closed. (Ball can be installed
operating in reverse by mistake).
(ii) Closed Holding pressure on primary and secondary seats. .

~ : Sleeve weldment has moved fully YRwards.
(iii) ~ualising- Partial hydraulic pressure opens secondary and moves sleeve
weldment down. The pins in the sleeve weldment provide the rotation
force for the ball so there is no movement of the ball until sleeve 1\
weldment comes against the body.
(iv) Qp-en Ball fully rotated. ..Wiping" action of ball across seat when opening
and closing ensures I00% seal. Sealing surfaces of ball and seat are
protected from flow when in full open position.
Note: Sleeve weldment fully down against body.
Care should be taken when stripping and reassembling ball valves to ensure no
damage to components.
,......
fJ
9- 7
'AYLOO
INING
,NSULTANTS
DK-BALL AND SEAT DETAIL LlMITI'O
by-pass slots
assembly pin
-~>i.'
~--- - Section through sleeve
weldment
control ann
t .
I secondary seat
seat
assembly pin
~ ~
slot
sleeve weldment
against body
(i) Exploded view of (ii) Ball closed - sealing on (iii) Equalising- sleeve weldment (iv) Open - ball fully
ball and seat assembly primary and secondary seat moving down with ball and rotated open
seat assembly.
9 - 8
I -.
flow coupling -GR Pulling tool
control line
X locking mandrel
X Running Tool
\D
(Core)
\D
Upper Seal Bore

XEL landing nipple
'Swage loc coupling

RUNNING PRONG
5 112" OK ball valve
Lower Seal Bore
-
~ Brass tip
to prevent
damage to ball
PULLING PRONG
5 1/2" OK in XEL Nipple
--- ~_.
DK PINNING PROCEDURE
(1
1. Check both sets of V-packing. Replace if necessary .
Note: Spring compressor not required to change V-packings.
2. Check sealing 0- Ring on lower lock mandrel thread, and tighten to X Lock.
3. Pressure up DK using adapter threaded into port in housing (1/ 8 NPT thread).
If hydraulic pump is not available aI/ 8" zerk type grease nipple and
grease-gun can be used to apply pressure.
('. 4. While maintaining pressure, position the running tool plus running prong
(to press down on upper end .of piston) and insert 5 / 16" brass pin.
5. Pressure can now be bled off.
6. Complete pinning of X-Running tool and check that it is in NON-SELECTIVE

position.
Size Running Tool Running Prong

2-7/8 41 XO 6 49 P 833
3-1/2 41 XO 66 49 P 862
('
~
4-112 41 XO 15 49 P 856
The following chart is to aid prong identification:
2Yz" (2.313 nipple bore) 3" (2.750" nipple bore)

:;0
c:: Overall Length 3.5" 4.325"
Z
Z o.D. 1.230 1.625"
.....
Z Thread 5/8-11UNC 2A 3/4-10UNC 2A
0
Overall Length 401/8" 43'/8"
~ 'i:1
c::
t"""
ShaftO.D.
Brass
0.625" 0.625"
t""" 10". 12'"

..... Tip Length
Z
0 Tip o.D. 0.940" 1.390"
Thread 5/8-11UNC 2A 5/8-11UNC 2A
()
9 - 10
DK - RUNNING PROCEDURE
r)
1. Prior to landing safety valve in the nipple; activate pump with control panel to :
(1) Flush control line of any well fluids
(11) Check pump operation.
(m) Ensure control line not plugged.

2. Shut in needle valve on tree and check panel pump pressure setting.
This will also check that internal panel relief valve is not leaking.
Do not shut in control panel with Sigma Valve because well pressure will flow through control line
to oil reservoir. This will put well fluids I gas back in control line which is not acceptable.
3. Locate valve in nipple and jar down. Provided XEL nipple is not deeper
than approx. 80m a distinct "hammering" sound should be heard when the ')
90 degree shoulder of the X keys engage the 90 degree shoulder in the nipple.
(If running on an RQ lock (4-1/2") the same sound will be heard when the
No-go ring is fully seated)
4. After shearing top pin (check by picking up) open needle valve on control line.
5. Wait until control panel pressurizes control line and pump stops cycling *
then jar up to release running tool and pull out of the well.
* If pump continues to cycle check the following:
1) Relief Valve in panel not leaking.
2) D-Valve seals not leaking.

~
3) V-packings on S.C.S.S.V. not holding.
Close needle valve on tree to see if leak is in surface components or downhole.
If difficulty is experienced with V-Packings it is advisable to replace the 2

double male adapters with a-Rings to provide initial seal to expand V-Packings.
9 - 11
~
c AYLOR
c RAINING
ONSULTANTS
DK - PULLING PROCEDURE LIMITED
t)
1. Ensure valve is in open position by putting into service at the control panel
(check needle valve on tree).
2. Run into the well with a GR pulling tool plus pulling prong with brass tip.
3. Latch lock mandrel.
4. Jar down to loosen bond between key expander mandrel and keys.
5. Close control needle valve to maintain control line pressure$ this procedure
eliminates chance of damaging ball while jarring up with ball closed against
the prong.
6. Jar up to recover S.C.S.S.V.
n;/ =Note: * If S.C.SSV is difficult to recover, slowly bleed
control line pressure down to equal well pressure.
This will relax V-packings and assist in removal from the nipple.
7. Pressure up 1/8 NPT port in housing to remove pulling tool and prong.
Size Pulling Tool Pulling Prong

2-7/8 40 GR 23100 49 PO 125
3-1/2 40 GR 27500 49 PO 128
40 GR 36800 49 PO 135
14-1/2
n For pulling prong identification refer to chart on p. 9-10.
-
~
I
I
I
I
()
I
.
I
9 - 12
~
:vLOR
RAINING
~ ~ ONSULTANTS
CONTROL PANEL ~, LIMITED
r'\
To supply the pressure to the control line needed to keep the downhole safety
valves open a Surface Control Panel is used.
. I
These self contained units provide high pressure oil output from a low pressure
air or gas input. Through the use of various sensing devices (such as pilots and erosion
monitors) the input pressure to the safety valve is blocked and the control line pressure
bled off; allowing the downhole valve to shut.
A circuit schematic is shown on p. 9-14 and 9-15
The major components are as follows:

1. Sigma valve: - Senses a pressure drop in the pilot line when an abnormal
pressure or condition causes the pilot to vent pilot line
r\
pressure. This causes the Sigma valve to. close, blocking
incoming air pressure and bleeding pressure from the
top of the "D Valve"
To reset, the Sigma valve must be physically held open

until input air has passed through small port to
reach at least 30 psi in pilot line.
2. D Valve: - When air !'ressure above diaphram is bled off, by Sigma
valve, spring moves piston upwards. This blocks incoming
hydraulic pressure and bleeds pressure from control line
back to the reservoir.
Downhole valve then closes.
3. Haskel &,ump- : - Converts input air pressure to hydraulic pressure.
Air acting on large area of piston is converted to high pressure
'\
oil (low volume) by small area of hydraulic piston. This
pump can operate under ..stalled" condition indefinately,
and pump when required.
4. Regulators: - used to adjust pilot line pressure and pump input (direct
ratio to output oil pressure).
..J
')
9 - 13
TYPICAL PANEL CIRCUIT - IN SERVICE
()
Supply - CompressedAir
....
1! - Nitrogen
~ - Natural Gas Air operatedhydrauli~ ~
- H2S (in sour service panels only) pump with manual override
Pump Supply
Pressure
Pump Outlet
Pressure
Inlet/Supply
Pressure
('
Pneumatic 3-way
Block & Bleed Valve
3-way
HydraulicBlock
& BleedValve
r
..-
==
Pilot Pressure
Supply Pressure
Return Pressure
Pilot Line
Pressure
Pressure
Relief
Valve
- ControlPressure
Fusible Plugs
..
Emergency Shut Down Valves
Wellheads - S.C.S.S.V. or S.S.V.
(Single or multiple wellheads)
('
9 - 14
TYPICAL PANEL CIRCUIT - OPERATED
f)
Supply - Compressed Air

...
.::
Q) - Nitrogen
~ - Natural Gas Air operated hydraulic
- H2S (in sour service panels only) pump with manual override
Pump Supply
Pressure
Pump Outlet
Pressure
Inlet/Supply
Pressure
'I
Pneumatic 3-way
Pilot Supply Block & Bleed Valve
Pressure
3-way
Hydraulic Block
& Bleed Valve
Pilot Line
Pressure f}
Pressure
- PilotPressure Relief
Valve
II1II SupplyPressure
- ReturnPressure
== ControlPressure
Fusible Plugs
~
Emergency Shut Down Valves Wellheads - S.C.S.S.V. or S.S.V.
(Single or multiple wellheads)
9 - 15
noR
f@ RAINING
...ONSULTANTS
,
PROJECT28 - DK UMITED
)
1. What are the 3 positions of the OK ball?
(1)
(n)
(111)
2. What lock mandrel is used to hold a OK?
3. What is the correct:
(1) Running tool ............................................................................
(n) Pulling tool ...................................................

('
4. Why must the OK be run with a running prong?
5. Why must we use a pulling prong when we pull a OK?
6. What is the type of nipple used for the OK?
7. Describe the running procedure for a OK:
(\
I
I
...J
~ 8. Give 3 reasons for pumping through the control line BEFORE we set the OK:
(1)
(n)
n ..;-' (111)
9 - 16
, !
PROJECT 29 - CONTROL PANEL
n
r,
1. What is the purpose of the control panel?
2. What causes the control panel to shut in and bleed pressure from downhole
safety valve?
3. What is the purpose of the "Haskel Pump" ?
n
4. What is the purpose of the 3 way pneumatic block & bleed valve.
5. What is the purpose of the 3-way hydraulic block & bleed valve.
6. How can we control the hydraulic pressure in the control line?
t
7. If pump continues "stroking" when needle valve for control line on well-
head is closed what 3 items could be leaking
(1)
(11)
- (111)
()
9 - 17
SECTION 10 - GASLIFf
r"
Gaslift Introduction 10 -2
Continuous Gas Lift 10- 3
Side Pocket Mandrels 10 - 5
Kickover Tools 10 - 7
Kickover Tool - sequence of operation 10 - 8
Latches 10-'10
Running Tools -JK, RK-l, JC-3 10 - 12

Pulling Tools -JDC, SM. 10 - 14
10 - 16
~I
I Valves - R 20, R 28
- RD, ROO 10- 20

- BKF-6 10- 22
- BKF-3, E Dummy 10- 23
- E. Dummy 10- 26
- LK 3 10- 28
- DCK-2 10- 29
Valve Reference Chart 10 - 30
Gaslift Equipment Summary Chart 10 - 31

r-
PROJECTS
- Project 30 - Gaslift 10 - 32
10- 1
GAS LIFT - INTRODUCTION
'" ,
"
When the formation pressure is insufficient to overcome the hydrostatic head

of the fluid in the tubing, the well will not flow.
This can be the situation with a new well or with an existing well where the bottom
hole pressure (B.H.P.) has declined while producing.
In both of these cases gaslift can be utilized to flow the wells.
To understand the principle of gaslift you must be familiar with the meaning of
hydrostatic pressure and gradient:
!;!ydrostatic p"ressure: Pressure exerted by a column of fluid due to its height and
specific gravity.
Gradient:
0 Pressure (Kpa) exerted per meter of vertical height
the fluid. Gradient increases as specific gravity
of
of
the fluid increases.
Gaslift was first used in Pennsylvania in 1865 but did not gain popularity until
it was introduced in the Gulf Coast area of the United States in the early 1900's.
PRINCIPLE OF GASLIFT :
Gas is introduced into the oil as deep as possible. This is usually from the casing
and into the tubing, but sometimes this is reversed (i.e. gas down the tubing and
flow up the casing e.g. AI-Huwaisah).
As the gas mixes with the oil it reduces the specific gravity of the oil,
which means that the gradient has been reduced. By reducing the gradient the hydro--
static pressure is reduced to a point where the formation pressure is greater than
r the B.H.P.
As the oil and gas column moves upwards the finely divided particles of gas
expand; thus further reducing the hydrostatic pressure.
Provided the correct amount of gas is injected it will remain in solution until
the oil reaches the surface. The gas can then be separated and re-injected.
- If too much gas is injected it will break out of solution and return to the
surface without bringing any oil with it.
Many fields in North and Central Oman are gaslifted. Some are casing. flow and others
~ are tubing flow. This procedure may be reversed on the same well as the produ-
ction requirements change.
Types of side pocket mandrel and valves used will be described later in this section.
0/
10 - 2
CONTINUOUS GASLIFT SYSTEM
rI
Refer to diagram p. 10-4
Descrip.tionof Unloading SeQuence:

1. Well is ready to unload with casing and tubing full of fluid.
2. Gas pressure has U-tubed fluid from casing to tubing through the valves,
depressing the casing fluid level to a point just above the first valve. Gas has
not entered the tubing, which is full of fluid.
3. Casing fluid level has been lowered below first valve and gas has entered
the tubing. From this moment, gaslifting commences even though only load
fluid is being lifted. Fluid feed-in from the fonnation does not commence in this
illustration until gas is passing through the second valve. fl
4. Casing fluid level has been lowered by U-tubing to just above the second
valve. Gas injection is maintained at the' first valve only.
5. Casing fluid level has been lowered below the second valve and gas inje-
ction commences through the second valve. As flow is established from the second
valve, the tubing pressure gradient opposite the first valve decreases and the
first valve closes. At this step in the unloading sequence, the back pressure on
the formation has been decreased to the point where fonnation fluid starts feeding
into the well bore and fluid in the tubing gradually changed from load fluid to
formation fluid. The formation fluid will be contaminated by load fluid being
transferred from the casing as unloading continues.
6. The casing fluid level has been lowered to just above the third valve. The
transfer of fluid from the casing to the tubing is the only change in the condi-
tions established in (5). f)
7. Casing fluid level is below the third valve and gas injection commences
through the third valve. As flow is established from the third valve, the second
valve closes. Injection through the third valve lowers the back pressure on the
formation further and additional fluid flows into the well bore from the
formation.
- 8. Casing fluid level has been lowered to just above the fourth valve. The
transfer of fluid from the casing to the tubing is the only change in the condi-
.. 9.
tions established in (7).
The fourth valve has been uncovered and injection commences at

this point. Tha third valve closes and flow stabilizes at the maximum rate possible
for the installation.
A I
~
10 - 3
n- r;=n
(\
1 2 3 4 5
r;=n r;:::;t r;==;'I
('
-
~
(1 6 7 8 9
10 - 4
CAMCO KBMG SIDEPOCKET MANDREL
n
Weld
No go
Slot
Orientating sleeve
-
with No go for
trigger.
Weld
n
Oval profile
Weld
tool discriminator with

smaller opening than tubing bore
to prevent wrong
tools from entering pocket. -~
n
Side pocket
Section AA
f---- -1
-
~
I
11 I
10 - 5
'"
GAS LIFT EQUIPMENT
('
The most common method worldwide, is the use of side pocket mandrels. The main advan-
tage is that they do not obstruct the tubing I.D. so plugs, RH.P. surveys etc. can be run to
the bottom of the well without disturbing the gaslift system.
The types of valves which are installed are designed and calibrated to achieve the precise effect
required. These will be described individually.
TYp'esof Side Pocket Mandrels in most common use:

MMA
............... Still in use in some of the older wells.
This S.P.M. accepts 1- 112" valves on RA latch.
It has no orientating sleeve so a non-orientating kickover tool
must be used: Type R (+ 20 - 9116" Spacer), L (+ 4 - 3/4" Spacer).
r MMG
====- Accepts 1- 112" valves with RK latch. Similar to MMA
but with the addition of an orientating sleeve * and tool
discriminator *
Kickover tool: OM-l (+ 11 - 114" Spacer), L (+4 - 3/4" Spacer) R (+20 - 9116" ,
Spacer)
KBMG Accepts I" valves on BK-2 latch similar internal design
to MMG - including orientating sleeve and tool discriminator.
Kickover tool: OK-l and L. (See section p.9-5).
KBUG Accepts 1" valves on BK-2 latch. Similar to KBMG except it is available
with slightly reduced I.D. and O.D. to run in dual completions.
Kickover tool: OK-I and L.
('a * Orientating sleeve - positions the kickbver tool in right

direction to kick to pocket when pulling
upwards.
*Tool discriminator - a built-in "deflector which ensure tools of

larger OD than the gaslift valves do not
"hang up" in side pocket.
r
10 - 6
KICK0 VER TOO LS
The following kickover tools are used for the side pocket mandrels on p. 10-6. '1
OK-I: - for 1" OD valvesin KBMG(2 - 7/8") and KBUG (3 - 1/2") Mandrels.
OK-5 :
==== - newer version of OK-l (using detent balls in place of shear pins).
OM-l : - for 1 - 1/2" OD valves in MMG Mandrel.
Pulling - 11.25" Spacer+JDS
=R: - for 1- 1/2" OD valves in MMAMandrel.
Pulling- 20 - 9/16" Spacer + JDS

L:
....
- for 1- 1/2" OD valves in 3 - 1/2" MMA.
Use 4 - 3/4" Spacer when pulling

~
Merla TMP: for 1" valves in 2 - 7/8" KBMG and 3 - 1/2" KBUG Mandrels.
Merla TP : for 1- 1/2" valves in MMG Mandrels.*
* in 3 - 1/2" needs 12" Spacer.

*in 4 -1/2" needs 7" Spacer.
Kickover Tool Quick Reference Chart.
Kickover S.P.M. Latch I Running Pulling Pulling

Tool Tool Spacer
OK - I 2 - 7/8 KBMG BK -2 JK -2 I - 1/4mc

3 -1/2"KBUG 1.66" SM
OK -5
-
OM -I I MMG RK RK -I I -5/8" mc +Core
Extension 11.25"
,
I - 1/2" SB
R 3 - 1/2 MMA RA JC - 3 2" JDC 20 - 9/16"
2" SB
2 -1/2 KBUG BK - 2 JK - 2 I - 1/4mc
1.66"SM
MMA RA JC - 3 2" mc 4 - 3/4"
L 2" SB
MMG RK RK-I I - 5/8 JDS + Core
~ Extension
I - 1/2SB
4 - 3/4
MERLA 2 - 7/8 KBMG BK - 2 JK - 2 I - 1/4mc -

TMP 3 - 1/2 KBUG 1.66" SM
MERLA 3 - 1/2 MMG RK RK - I I - 5/8 ms +Core 12" Spacer
TP Extension
4 - 1/2MMG I - 1/2 SB 7" Spacer f\-
,..
10 - 7
---,----------- -- --- -- --
~ t t
'f t ~
-
~
~
~
trj
upward jarring
shears trigger pin
~
and permits tool to
be pulled d
out of hole. 0
~
~
0 ~
trj
00 -
Z
1Jl
~
Shear pins in
arm will be t"
sheared. t""
~
-
0
tool now in a
Z
1Jl
position to jar
down into the this pin doesn't ~
have to be 0
pocket
,heared at ~
this time. trj
Z
~
~
lower knuckle
now in line
with pocket.
latch
(I) Tools will pass (u) Pull up to align (m) Latch into side (IV) Shear trigger pin
through KBUG tool and activate
kickover function.
-
pocket jar down and pull out of
hole.
Jar up to shear
running tool.
KICKOVER TOOL - SEQUENCE of OPERATION
0
Refer to diagrams (I) to (IV) p.JO-8
Before running check if you have the correct kickover tool and latch for the side
pocket mandrel.
(I) Run into the well and lower the tool string past the side pocket into
which the valve is to be set.
(11) Pick Up. Kickover tool trigger will turn tool to face the pocket.
This is caused by the orientating sleeve which also guides the trigger
into the no-go slot. Pull up (approx. 80 DaN) to lock tool into the kickover
position. (Note: the amount of overpull increases with tool size and
deviation)
Lower toolstrlng down to locate valve in pocket.
(\.
~ (m) Jar down gently to ease valve into pocket. The exact amount of downward
jarring is at the operators discretion but must be sufficient to position the
latch beneath the latch profile in the side pocket.
(IV) Jar up. This shears the 2 tangential pins on the running tool and the shear
pin on the lower arm. Also the internal shear pin shears as the trigger hits
the no-go slot. This releases the tool to pull out of the hole.
Note: A valve catcher should always be set below side pockets to ensure valves
do not drop into casing.
..
()
~.
n
10 - 9
LATCHES
n
Designed to screw onto the top of each gaslift valve and to "latch" the
valve into the side pocket mandrels. The internal design of the S.P.M. and the
a.D. of the valve determines the correct latch
Note: KB Series mandrels have lower profile which will also accept integral
latch used if upper profile becomes worn.
I"') ,
Type RK Type RA Type BK
The following latches are used in the side pocket mandrels on p. 10-6.
Valve Latch Running Running Pulling Pulling Max

n
Latch S.P.M.
Size Design Neck Tool Neck Tool a.D.
BK-2 KBMG I" RING 0.750 JK-2 0.875 1V4JDC 1.358

KBUG 1.66SM
15/8JDS
-
.
RK MMG 11/2" RING 0.937 RK-1 1.187 1.176
11/2SB
2" JDC
RA MMA 1V2" CAM 1.359 JC-3 1.370 1.75
2" SB
1V4JDC-1
1.100"collect
Integral KB-- I" Collect 0.875 GA-2 0.875 11/4JDC +
core ext. 1.130" top sub
n
10-10
I
l
BK-2 LATCH
r,
NOTE: Excessive downward jarring during

setting can distort latch body
,'- '1
r"""""-1 .
r -'---t-jar down
1I +-,- Jar up
(\ rI ;'i JK running tool r
I
1
I
"
I r--- -, I (shear up) 1r 1+--JDC pulling tool
I 1 1 I I1 I1
I I ' I I1 I1
I I 11 II
I I
II I
I ,.-' I
I ', 2. tangential II : 1
I ) I 1
I I Shear pins 1 I
I I I I
L) J
I I.
I .
I :
, 1
L
n Latch profile
- No-go
in pocket
~ Setting Latched Pulling
(Shear pin sheared).
n
~
~
~-_.-
10-11
JK RUNNING TOOL
r
upward jarring
NOTE: Excessive downward jarring during
setting can distort latch body i
"
jar up action
shears these 2 pins
running tool no - go'es

15/16 -.10 thread to
here when jarring down
suit kickover tool
2 holes for
fluid by _. pass
latch locks beneath '"'"
I
profile in side pocket
. 2 Tangential
Shear pins
No go shoulder
- No go in side pocket
..
CAMCO JK RUNNING TOOL SHEARING OFF AFTER SETTING
~
;
~
10 - 12
---1
.,~...AYLOR
RUNNING TOOLS ~ ... RAINING

'...' ... ONSULTANTS
'.
. .,.
..,'
.
LIMITED
r....
I
The running tool is attached to the 15 I 16" - 10 thread on the bottom end of the
kickover tool arm. The type of tool used depends on the latch - refer to chart plO-lOo
All these tools jar down to set the latch in the pocket and jar up to shear 2
tangential pins (refer to p. 4-30)
"
('
-
~I
" JK-2 RK-1 JC-3

\
10-13
PULLING TOOLS
f)
The correct pulling tool for each type of latch and side pocket mandrel can
be determined from the chart on p 9-7. The Otis SM is the equivalent to the Cameo
J.D.C.
Attention should be paid to the use of the correct spacer bar (p. 10-7) as this provides
the correct leverage and reach to enable the pulling tool to engage the latch.
Operating sequence to pull a valve is similar to the running procedure (p. 10-9)except:
Refer to diagram (ii) p. 10-8.
(n) Tap down gently to engage latch - pick up to check pulling tool is latched.
(111) Jar up to pull valve from pocket.
CAUTION: IT IS POSSIBLE TO BE BLOWN UP HOLE by a pressure created

by a difference in fluid levels. 't
Operator should be prepared for this by :
(a) Maintain high engine speed.
(b) Ensure unit is in high gear BEFORE beginning to jar up.
(c) If weight indicator drops suddenly pull upwards IMMEDIATELY.
(d) Retain line pull after each upward jar stroke and observe
weight indicator to ensure valve is not free.
(IV) After pulling valve, shear trigger in no-go slot and pull out of well.
NOTE: It is a wise precaution to shift a circulation SSD to the open position prior to
pulling gas lift valves to ensure proper equalization between tubing and casing.
11)
n
I
10 - 14
~
:VLOR
.. RAINING
ONSULTANTS
1-1/4" JDC PULLING TOOL k... LIMITED
"
Top sub
locking screw
core nut
Core spring
core spnng expanded
core
(\
Shear pin
shear pin cover
spring retainer
dog spring. spring - compressed

skirt
n pawIs
(connect core to dogs)
when jarring
down latch dogs - released
I hits here
...J 2 dogs
~ .
Space for skirt
} whenBKjarring down
-.2 Latch
I (' (1) LATCHED (11) SHEARED
10 - 15
~.
R 20 VALVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
('
Tailplug
TUBING FLOW
Copper Gasket (CASING PRESSURE OPERATED)
Dill Valve
Nitrogen Pressure
V-Packing
Stem ()
Seat
- Casing Pressure
V-Packing
Check Valve
~
Tubing Pressure
10 - 16
GAS OPERATED VALVES - R-20/R-28
~-
~
,, ~
I
Description - Sensitive to (ie: operated by) injection gas pressure.

R-20 - gas injection from casing
R-28 - gas injection from the tubing.
Injection gas pressure acts on a bellows against the force of the pre-set
nitrogen pressure inside the valve.
NOfE: - the velocity check valve in the R-20 acts in an opposite direction to that in
the R-28. Gravity acts to hold the valve open in the R-20 and closed in the
R-28.
Installation - R~20 and R-28 valves are installed with the highest pressure valves nearest
to the surface. ie: Each deeper valve has a lower pressure setting than the
valve above. The orifice is installed at the bottom and this becomes the
"working" valve. The upper valves are used to "unload" the column of fluid
in the well only.
(l
Example: Valve Set Pressure. Depth (m) Hydrostatic Pressure.
1. 4785 Kpa 519 4095 Kpa
2. 4675 Kpa 812 6407 Kpa
3. 4560 Kpa 1028 8111 Kpa
4. 4490 Kpa 1206 9515 Kpa

('\
5. 7.9mm orifice 1287 10154 Kpa
The above pressures were calculated using an average 42 API
Explanation - Because casing hydrostatic pressure is less than the setting on valve #1 it will
not open until gas is injected into the casing and the total pressure exceeds
4785 Kpa.
~ At this point all the valves will be open unloading fluid.
Valve #1 - When casing fluid level drops below this valve gas will be injected into the
tubing and gas lifting will commence through this valve only.
Casing level will continue to drop until it uncovers valve #2.
('z
10 - 17
GAS OPERATED VALVES (cont)
()
Valve#2 - When the gas begins to inject through this valve there will be a drop in the
casing pressure at the surface. The amount of this pressure drop will depend
on the orifice size and the gas injection rate.
(i) If the pressure drops below 4785 Kpa valve #1 will close.
(ii) If the pressure remains above 4785 Kpa gas will continue to be in-
jected through valve #1 and #2.
Casing fluid level will drop until it uncovers valve #3.
Valve #3 - When gas begins to inject through this valve there will be a further drop in
the casing pressure.
Valve #1 will now close (if it did not previously) and Valve #2 may close,
depending on the size of the pressure drop.
Casing fluid level will continue to drop to uncover valve #4.
Valve #4 - Gas will be injected through the valve and the casing pressure will again
n
drop. If the casing pressure is now below 4560 Kpa (the #3 valve setting)
valve #3 will close.
Casing fluid level will continue to drop to uncover valve #5.
Valve #5 - This orifice valve will become the "working" valve to inject gas at the
deepest possible point in the well - Provided that the pressure settings and
calculations are correct.
The casing gas pressure should now be below the 4490 Kpa setting on valve
#4 so valve #4 should now close.
Note: Casing pressure has been decreasing as each valve begins to gaslift the fluid
column in the tubing. Therefore a higher pressure is required to start (kick-
off) a well than is needed tf' maintain flow.
The gas injection rate is calculated so as not to circulate excess gas.
n
R-28 Valves - Operating and installation sequence are identical to the R-20 valves above.
The only difference is that the gas is injected down the tubing and flow is
up the casing.
t)
10- 18
R- 20 VALVE
(}
The R-20 is a 1 - 1/2" valve for MMG (RK Latch) and MMA (RA Latch).
O,geration : refer to p. 10-16,

Pressure from casing acts on bellows.
When force overcomes force of internal nitrogen pre-charge the valve opens
and admits gas to tubing.
Silicone oil is injected into the bellows during manufacture to provide

dampening effect. This prevents rapid oscillation which would damage stem and
seat.
Port Sizes: 3/16", 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 7/16", 1/2".
t" Check valve to prevent backflow from tubing to casing has resilient and
metal to metal seat.
~unninw..Pulling.in MMG Mandrel- Attach to ~ Latch.
(1) Using OM -1 Kickover tool:
Running tool = 1 -7/16" RK -1

Pulling tool = 1 - 1/2" SB - 11 - 1/4" spacer
1 - 5/8" JDS (- Core ext) - 11 - 1/4 Spacer
(11)Using L Kickover tool:
"""
Running tool = 1 - 7/16" RK -1

Pulling tool =1-1/2" SB
1 - 5/8" JDS (- Core ext) 4 - 3/4 Spacer
n (111)Using R Kickover tool:

=1-7/16" RK - 1
Running tool
= 1 -1/2" SB + 20 - 9/16" spacer
Pulling tool
1 -5/8" JDS (+Core ext) +20 - 9/16 Spacer
Runninw.PullinKin MMA Mandrel - Attach to M Latch
(1) Using ~ Kickovertool:

Running tool -JC -3
Pulling tool =2" SB + 4 -3/4 Spacer
~ .. 2" JDC + 4 - 3/4 Spacer
(11)Using R Kickover tool:
Running tool = JC -3
Pulling tool = 2" SB +20 - 9/16" Spacer
(' = 2" JDC+ 20 - 9/16" Spacer
...,
10 - 19
R -28 VALVE
,-----
n
The R-28 is a 1 - 112" valve for MMG (RK Latch) and MMA (RA Latch).
This valve is used in CASING FLOW wells Le. Gas is injected down tubing and produ-
ction flows from casing.
OQeration: -
Tubing pressure acts on nitrogen pre chargedbellowsvia. a crossover seat.
Casing pressure acts only on stem area.
Increase in tubing pressure causes valve to open permitting gas flow from tubing
to casing.
Port Sizes: 3116", 114", 5116"
~unninglPu~ procedures - identical to R 20 on p. 10-17.

()
R.D. VALVE :
1 - 112" dummy for MMG (RK Latch) and MMA (RA Latch).
Used to block off communication between tubing and annulus in flowing situations.
(1) for production until well requires gaslifting.
(11)prior to pressure testing tubing or setting hydraulic packer.
RunninglPulling.procedures - identical to R-20 on p. 10-17.
R.D.O. VALVE:
n
1 - 112" 0.0. Orifice valve for MMG (RK Latch) and MMA (RA Latch)
Available with fixed orifices in following sizes:
3116",114",5116",3/8",7116",112".
Has a check valve in nose to prevent back - flow from tubing to casing.
~ Running/Pulling procedures - identical to R-20 on p. 10-17.
10 - 20
R 28 VALVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
()
CASING FLOW
Tailplug (TUBING PRESSURE OPERATED)
Copper Gasket
Dill Valve
Nitrogen Pressure
('
Stem
Check Valve
-
I
~
Tubing Pressure
0
10 - 21
~
BKF-6 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
n
TUBING FLOW
(TUBING PRESSURE OPERATED)
Locking Screw
Adjusting Screw
Spring
n
Stem
- Check Valve
~
Tubing Pressure
0
~-~-~-"-
10 - 22
FLUID OPERATED VALVES - BKI1-6/BKF-3
"..
()
Description - Sens\tive to (ie: operated by) pressure in the tubing which acts against
the pre-set spring through a "cross-over seat". When the tubing pressure
exceeds the spring force the opens and permits gas from casing to enter the
tubing.
Casing pressure will not open these valves.
Installation - The lowest pressure valves are nearest to the surface, ie: Each deeper valve
has a higher pressure setting than the valve above. The orifice is installed
at the bottom and this becomes the "working" valve. The upper valves are
used to "unload" the column of fluid in the well only.
Running - On the surface, and while running in, these valves will be closed. The valve
will only open when the hydrostatic pressure in the well exceeds the pre-set
spring tension. Therefore all the valves should be open when set at their
(, correct depths.
Example: Valve Set Pressure Depth (m)
1. 1400 Kpa 349
2. 1860 Kpa 812
3. 2760 Kpa 876
4. 3250 Kpa 11 UI 1087

('\,../
5. 6.3mm orifice 11 UI 1241
6. Dummy * 1337
.- ,
Explanation - As soon as gas is injected into the casing, fluid will be displaced through
the valves and into the tubing.
(' ~
10 - 23
, AYLOR
~
"
RAINING
I cONSULTANTS
FLUID OPERATED VALVES (cont) LIMITED
#"
~,
Valve #1 - When casing fluid level drops below 349m gas will be injected into the
tubing and gas lifting will commence.
Casing level will continue to drop as fluid passes through the lower valves
into the tubing.
Valve #2 - When the casing fluid level falls below 656m gas will pass into the tubing
and gaslifting will start from this point.
This will cause a pressure drop in the tubing at 349m (valve #1) which may,
depending on the amount of pressure drop, cause valve #1 to close.
Casing fluid level will drop as fluid passes through valves #3, #4 and the
orifice in valve #5.
Valve #3 - These valves will commence gaslifting as the fluid level reaches 876m and
and Valve #4 1O87mrespectively.
As the hydrostatic pressure in the tubing is reduced by the gaslifting valves n
#2 and #3 will close.
Valve #5 - When the casing fluid levelreaches this valve at 1241mgas will pass directly
into the tubing at a rate determined by the gas injection pressure and the
I I orifice size. (in this example the diameter of the orifice is 6.3 mm)
As the well stabilises under gaslift conditions at this levelall the upper valves
should be closed.
Valve #6 - Dummy. Used to plug the side pocket mandrels that are not currently
required. To allow for future injection of gas at a deeper point as the reser-
voir pressure drops, extra mandrels are installed at the time of the com-
pletion. When required the dummy is pulled and a gaslift valve installed.
. I Note: The gas injection rate is calculated so as not to circulate excess gas.
n
I I I
I I I
- II .
~I
10 - 24
BKF-6 VALVE
('\
This valve is designed for the KBUG and KBMG Mandrel and
uses a BK-2 latch.
Qp.eration : Sensitive to tubing pressure via. cross - over seat.

Pressure acts against non -charged bellows and pre - set spring tension.
Non sensitive to changes in temperature.
Port Sizes: 1/8",3/16",1/4"
Check valve in nose prevents backflow from tubing to casing.
Running/Pulling.Procedure.
n Kickover tool =OK -1 / OK - 5
Running tool = JK - 2
Pulling tool 1 -3/16 SM 11Y4 JDC
CAUTION: When pulling remember that there is a possibility of being blown up

the hole by fluid level differences between tubing and casing.
(refer to p. 10-14 (iii)
(' =-
0~~
10- 25
BKF-3
[)
BKF - 3 1" valve for KBUG and KBMG run on BK - 2 latch (p 9-23) BKF - 3 is for
use in hostile environments such as H2S, high temperature, and CO2
It is operated by casing pressure acting on the area of the stem against a

spring (adjustable) and a sealed bellows.
~unning/~K Procedure:
Kickover tool = OK - 1/0K -5

Running tool = JK
Pulling tool =I -3/16 SM

=I -1/4" JDC f)
This valve has no replaceable seat insert. When seat is worn lower section
must be replaced.
The BK valve is being used to replace the BKF - 3.
EDUMMY
E Dummy: fitted with a BK - 2 latch it is used to plug KBMG and KBUG side pocket
mandrels
RunninglPull!ng.Procedures: as for BKF- 6/ BKF -3. (\
..
n
10- 26
J
~
'; AYLOR
',RAINING
, ONSULTANTS
BKF-3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM LIMITED
n""
TUBING FLOW
Plug (TUBING PRESSURE OPERATED)
Plug
Bellows
(\
Adjusting Nuts
Stem
- Casing Pressure
Check Valve
~
Tubing Pressure
('
10 - 27
I
--1
LK-3 VALVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
---
n
CHEMI CAL IN JECTI ON
Locking Sleeve
(FROM CASING)
Adjusting Screw
f}
Stem
- Casing Pressure
"
- Check Valve -
~
Tubing Pressure
')
10 - 28
-
LK 3 CHEMICAL INJECTION VALVE
()
Refer p. 10-24
I
1" Chemical injection valve run with BK-2 latch into KBMG and KBUG mandrels.
I
I °p.eration : Valve is actuated by differential pressure between tubing and annulus.
Spring rate can be altered and adjusted to set required injection pressure.
Check valve in nose to prevent reverse flow.
Port Sizes: 1/8", 3/16"
~unninw.Pu~Procedures -as for BKF -6, BKF-3.
n ~p.llim. : Chemicals, such as inhibitor, are injected down casing. The

production is treated at valve depth which reduces the amount of tubing subje-
cted to corrosive fluids.
DCK -2 DIFFERENTIAL KILL VALVE
1" Valve with BK-2 Latch is used for KBMG and KBUG Mandrels.
°p..eration : Designed to hold pressure from tubing, but can be "pumped" out with
pressure from casing. Must be retrieved to be reset.
Pressure at which internal sealing plug moves to permit annulus pressure

to enter tubing is pre-determined by the number of shear screws
r, inserted in the valve. This can be varied from 931
7400 psi.
psi to
Wh.en this valve is opened (sheared) the piston remains in the

locked open position
RunninglPullinK Procedure: as for BKF -6, BKF - 3.
- I
(\,
10 - 29
I
---I
VALVE SIZE I LATCH I S.P.M. I USE I CHECK REF.

VALYE P.NO.
RD DUMMY - 10-18
RDO
I
(1) RA
1(1) MMA I
Orifice 3 I 16 to 1 I 2" (11 16" increments)
I
/ 10-18
1 - 1/2" I
R20 Casingoperated.Nitrogenchargedbellows 10-17

(11)RK - 1 1(11)MMG I
3/16 - 1/2" ports. Tubingflow. I

I I I I
-<
R28 Tubingoperatedvia. crossoverseat casingflow. / 10-18
3 I 16 to 5 I 16 ports I I I I:
-
0
-
E DUMMY I 10-22
I (inverted)
w
0 Spring operated (not affected by temperature) Z
BKF- 6 Non - charged bellows / 10-21 ('1
tubing operated - cross over seat
KBMG ('1
BKF- 3 1" I BK-2 I As for BKF - 6 but for HOSTILEENVIRONMENT
KBUG I / 10-22
I I
DCK-2 Kill Valve - from annulus. Variable by No. of shear screws I X I 10-25
Holds from tubing.
LK-3 ChemicalInjection.Crossover seat.

Adjustable spring tension. Tubing sensitive. I / I 10-25
I:J ) j )
-, ,------ --~--""--- '--~ ~-
- -----------.
TYPE 'R' ~
>
1J1
~
OM-2 ~
""3
(4W')
t.'I'j
cs ,0
e.....
-
w "'=
~
t.'I'j
Z
""3
--.,I ~
H*,' ==
I >
I SPACER
00
~ .'.'.,.~..~
~
...~ '.,' ],,$
I ~~>~o
"', I '-'
I : ;"-;"-'-"1 "
2" SB
lW' JDC
-. 1%"JDS
-.-
-
'.~rn..~OO' .. Pulling Tool
L . ..
.-
. . ""'" T,.;
1 .. RK.-
.
RunningTooF
~ _
'RA' Latch 'RK'Latch
'BK- 2'.Latch
IW'Valves 1" Valves
R-20 BKF- 6
R-28 BKF.:3
RD DCK- 2
RDO LK-3
E Dummy
BKO-
MMG
~ 2Ys"
PROJECT 30 - GASLIFf
J)
1. Why is gaslift used in a well?
2. How does the addition of gas to the oil cause the well to flow?
<' 3. Why are side pocket mandrels the most common piece of gas lift equipment?
4. What type of kickover tools can be used in the following side pocket mandrels.
(1) MMA ......................................................................................
(n) MMG .............................................................................
(nl) KBUG .....................................................................................
('. (iv) KBMG : .................................................

5. What type of latches are used in the following side pocket mandrels?
(1) MMA ................
(11) MMG ... ...................................................................................
(111) KBUG .................................
(IV) KBMG.....................................................................................
., 6. If the latch profile in a KBUG and KBMG wears out what type of latch can
be used?
n Continued overleaf
10 - 32
PROJECT 30 - Contd.
rr
7. What running tools are used with the following latches?
(1) RI( ...........................................................................................

(n) RA ..........................................................................................
(In) BK .........................................................................................
8. What are the two sizes of gas lift valves?
(1)
(n)
9. On the R - 20 valve is it casing pressure or tubing pressure which causes

valve to open? r
10. On the BKF - 6 is the gas injected through the tubing or the casing?
11. What is the size of fishing neck that the I - 1/4" JDC wi11latch?
12. What is the size of the fishing neck on the 1 - 1/4 JDC?
f\
13. Can the 1-3/16" Oris SM pulling tool be used in place of the 1- 1/4". J.D.C.?
r)
10 - 33
SECTION 11 - B.H.P I AMERADAS
,~ ,
Bottom Hole Pressure Recorders 11- 2
Recording Section 11 - 6
Pressure Element 11 - 9
Calibration Theory 11-11
Running Procedure 11- 14
Specifications 11 - 15
Trouble Shooting guide 11 - 16
Otis Soft Set Hanger 11- 18

f\
Baker Soft Set Hanger 11- 20
Data Recording 11- 21
Example Charts 11- 22
PROJECTS
Project 31 - BHP 11- 24
('
('.
11- 1
AMERADA BOTTOM HOLE RECORDER
n
ROLE
The Amerada bottom hole recorder is designed to enable bottom hole pressures or
temperatures to be taken in a well, either flowing or shut-in.
DESCRIPTION (p. 11-6)

The Amerada has four main parts:
(a) Pressure or temperature element,
(b) Chart holder and stylus assembly,
(c) Lead screw assembly,
(d) Clock.
(a) Pressure element and temperature element

The pressure element consists of a bellows and a helically wound Bourdon tube,
0 filled with a liquid manufactured under the trade name of Ucon. The well pressure,
which is in contact with the bellows, compresses it, forcing Ucon into the Bourdon
tube. The increase in pressure in the Bourdon tube makes it unbend, causing the free
end, to which a pin is attached, to rotate. .
The use of unbellows is recommended for H2S service (p. 11-10)

The temperature element consists of a cylinder containing a volatile liquid in
connection with a helical Bourdon tube. Variations in well temperature change the
vapour pressure of the liquid, and thus the pressure inside the Bourdon tube, causing
rotation of the free end.
(b) Chart holder and stylus assembly

Attached to the pin, on the free end of the Bourdon tube of either element, is a
stylus arm which rotates with the pin. This arm is given a small amount of freedom
of movement by means of a support spring. The stylus, which is fastened to the free
end of the stylus arm tension spring, can be raised into the operating position or
lowered by means of the stylus lift.
(' The charts, are thin sheets of brass, which have a non-reflective coating on one
side. There are two types, the one normally used by Flopetrol, is flanged; the other,
which is flat, requires the use of a special guide in the chart holder.
The chart holder is a stainless steel cylinder, through the centre of which passes
a steel rod, acting as a styllJSguide. The outside of the holder has guides to prevent
rotational movement, and a small spring to prevent lateral movement.
The top of the chart holder assembly fits into a cup between two push rods. The
linear movement of these rods is controlled by the lead screw assembly.
(c) Lead screw assembly

~ The lead screw assembly converts the rotational movement of the clock into
linear movement of the chart. The lead screws, fixed at each end by bearings, may
be single pitch or double pitch (double pitch will run full chart length in half time of
clock).
11- 2
~
AYLOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
AMERADA GAUGES LIMITED
()
(d) Clock
The clock, which is the extreme upper element of the Amerada, is the basic
timing unit. The range of the clock is defined as the time required for fifteen complete
revolutions which, applied to a single pitch lead screw, will drive the chart holder
exactly five inches.
SELECTION OF ELEMENTS
Apart from the chart holder and stylus assembly, each of the elements of the
Amerada may be varied to suit the job.
The pressure element gives the most accurate and repeatable readings when the
pressure to be read lies in the region between t and! of the nominal pressure of the
element. The elements used by Flopetrol range between 500 and 15 000 psi but
occasionally 25000 psi elements are used.
Temperature elements exist to give temperature measurement between 0 and 650°F
in the normal range provided by the manufacturer G.RC. (Geophysical Research I)
Corporation), but Kuster manufactures high temperature elements with a range up to
750°F.
The lead screw assembly may be used either with a single or a double pitch lead
screw.
For temperatures above 140°C the clocks used by Flopetrol are manufactured by
Kuster. The following range of clocks are normally used: 3, 12, 24, 48, 72 and 120 hours.
-
~
f}
CC_-
11 - 3
AMERADA GAUGES
n
STRENGTH OF HOUSINGS
MODEL MAXIMUM W.P. COLLAPSE STRENGTH
RPG-3 or
22 000 psi 24-25 000 psi
RT-7 with K Monel bulb
RT- 7 with Copper alloy 12000 psi

bulb (old type)
15000 psi
RT- 7A 10000 psi
RPG-3/age hardened 25 000 psi 29-30 000 psi

housing stamped "28 K"
(', RPG-4RT-8 18000 psi 20-21 000 psi
RT-8A 12000 psi 15000 psi
RPG-4/age hardened 25 000 psi 28-29 000 psi

housing stamped "25 K"
RPG-5 20 000 psi 23-24 000 psi
KPG-K3 22 000 psi
K2 20 000 psi
K4 12000 psi
TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
(' Recording section (without clock) 345°C 650°F
Diagrams 345°C 650°F

Clocks Standard 150°C 300°F
High Temperature 260°C 500°F

Very High Temperature 345°C (Kuster 370°C) 650°F (Kuster 700°F)
Pressure sensors GRC with bellows 150°C 300°F
.
with unbellows
or filter 345°C 650°F
Pressure sensors Kuster 370°C 700°F
n
11 - 4
AMERADA GAUGES
f)
USE IN HOSTILE ENVIRONMENT (H2S-CO2)
The bellows is the most delicate part and the most affected by corrosive environments.
All other parts of the Amerada gauges, that are exposed directly to well fluids, are made
of materials known to be most resistant to the severely corrosive conditions -that can occur
in an oil or gas well.
At temperature < 300°F (150°C):

. Use teflon coated bellows.
. Before each run, fill the oil trap with clean oil or an inhibitor such as Kontol liquid.
. After each run, clean the bellowsthoroughlyto removetraces of contaminatingfluids.
. If, after the above precautions, bellows failures occur, additional precautions may be
taken by using a capillary oil trap together with teflon coated bellows.
At temperature> 300°F (150°C):

. Use unbellows insteadof bellows. ()
. Make sure the oil trap is completelyfilled with cleanoil or an inhibitor beforerunning in.
PERFORMANCES GIVEN BY MANUFACTURER
MODEL ACCURACY SENSITIVITY REPEATABILITY
APG 3 0.05% FS
0.20% Full Scale
APG 4 0.055% FS
APG 5 0.25% Full Scale

0.1% FS
AT 7 0.05% FS
AT 7A
:!:2°F (1°C) 'I
AT 8 0.055% FS
AT 8A
KPG P 0.20% Full Scale

T :!:3.5°F (2°C)
K2, K3 P 0.25% Full Scale

T :!:3.5°F (2°C)
11- 5
RPG 3 RECORDING SECTION
~
JEWELHOLDERASSY. 1
COUPLER CLOCK
D
D
ELEMENT HOUSING
I
,s . "j ."CLUTCH
....
r!) Z
'" ~
D~
~ t
~
LEAD SCREW
.....
:E
.....
-'
CC
.....
....
\:1
lA ..... .....
..... :E
CC 0
I LEADNUTCUPASSY =
en
:E
OUTER ~ en
CC
.....
HOUSING COVER ..... :z:
CC ....
~ ~
......
CV)
....
~ CC
~
CC
ID rJ
CtlART HOLDER
THERMOMETER
BULB
n STYLUSASSY
BELLOWSASSY
CHAR' IL TRAP
-
~ INNER HOUSING
rJ
THERMOMETER
WELL
n
11 - 6
CRITICAL MEASUREMENTS
f)
1mm (.04")
COVER
1:,I:::I~I::I::I~I:::.::::::::::::::::::::~I;]Jf:':::::,:::':':::,:::':~':;::;:':;.:'~:':.::'.~::':~:.:::':':::::::.: .:::~.:..::::::::::;:::.:.:::~:
~:::~:::~:
::::::::::::::~::::::::::::::::;::::::::::::::I;:::::::::::::::::::::::::iiiii::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::;ti:~j
INNER HOUSING
2.3mm(.OB..1")
n
OFF ON
(
A
TYPE B.111
4.5mm!.15..2")
"
',',',',',',','"","'.',',',
"""'I!:i!~ljllillillllli~I!!!!!III!IIIIIII~
TYPE B.191 & 229
n
. RPG 3 - 152mm (6")
. .. RPG 4 : - 165mm( 61/2")

~
n
I
I 11 - 7
I
...
RECORDING SECTION SCHEMATIC
>"~-
n - ----
Clock
Coupler spring
Clutch
Upper bearing
Lead screw (single or double)
() Lead nut
Outer housing
Inner housing
Lower bearing
Push rods
Lift
Chart holder
Chart
('. Stylus
Stylus assembly
J On-Off switch
Flexible joint
~ Stylus shaft
Jewel assembly
a-Ring seal
" NOT TO SCALE - Items shortened to show relative positions
---~o.~
11 - 8
RPG-3 PRESSURE ELEMENT
-,~.._,."..
Jevveli\ssen1bly
0- Ring
Stylus shaft
Collar c1an1p
Bourdon tube
Stylus shaft support
Welded connection
Connection betvveen bellovvs &

bourdon tube
t\
4 WELL PRESSURE INLET
Isolation device
Bellovvs(shovvn)or Unbellovvs
-
~
NOT TO SCALE - Items shortenedto show relativepositions
Cl
11 - 9
_L 1- -- ----- ----
') ') ') ~
Y-3110 Adaptor Gasket
Retaining Ring No. 3000-X25

Silver Solder Tube to Unbellows Adaptor
At Top and Bottom-Open n Dia. Hole
In Tube-Both Ends As Shown. 10mm Gasket ~
=
~
~
~
.....
.....
0
~
rJ'J.
......
0
>
rJ'J.
rJ'J.
~
3:
=
C-473 Plug Assembly ~
Y-7069 Unbellows E.nd ~
Silver Solder After Hole is Drilled in Tube
CALIBRATION THEORY
n
When pressure is applied to the bellows of the pressure element, the resulting
increase in pressure in the Bourdon tube causes rotation of the pin and stylus. The
degree of rotation is a function of the applied pressure. The problem of calibration is to
find the movement of the stylus over the chart for a number of known pressures; and to
measure the corresponding deflections produced by the pressure.
There are a number of different methods of interpolation, the method used depends
on the client. The following method is normally used by Flopetrol, based on the
assumption that the element is linear Le. equal changes in pressure give equal
deflections.
This method may not be used Viith temperature elements because the calibration
curves are noticeably curved. The only method available for these elements is to use a
calibration curve, and to read the temperature directly from the curve.
(a) Least square method
I)
Pc"'"-- -- -- ---
Pc: calculated pressure'
Pr
Pr: real pressure
Cl..
W
cc
::::>
en
en
w
cc
Cl..
DEFLECTION Y
"
Assuming that the calibration curve of a pressure element is a straight line, there
must exist a formula for it of the type:
P = KY:ta
Where: P is the pressure
~ Y is the
K is the
corresponding deflection
gradient of the line (slope)
a is the point at which the line cuts the pressure axis (positive or negative).
The least square method is a method of determining "K" and "a" to a high degree
of accuracy, allowing values of pressure to be determined from a known deflection.
It is a mathematical method of finding the line which best fits the calibration points. f)
11-11
CALIBRATION THEORY (Continued)
()
5. CALmRATION
(a) At ambient temperature

- Manufacturer's calibration cell
- Dead weight tester
(b) At bottom hole temperature

- Flopetrol temperature calibration cell
- Dead weight tester
- Clock or crank
6. BOTTOM HOLE PRESSURE CALCULATION

- After surveythe chart is read with a chart scanner
- The deflection Y is carefully measured for all significant points of the recording
and the corresponding pressure calculated by using the general formula P -KY
() a, where ..K".and" a" have been determined by using the adequate steps of the
calibration
- Although the principle of chart reading and pressure calculations is simple,

numerous slight errors or inaccuracies could be cumulated (i.e. time scale, zero
on base line etc ) and lead to false results.
This is only overcome by taking general care and by experience.
- With 20 years' experience in using Amerada gauges all over the world, Flopetrol
has proved that it is possible to obtain results with an accuracy of o. I % of the
full range.
"
11 - 12
CALIBRATION HARDWARE
n
CALIBRATIONBENCH-TYPICAL SET-UP
Pr"'lIr. GIII,I
11ft. WW,lIt
St...
Mlllltlctllrlr CIU
MANIFOLDSCHEMATICS
n
rn Itlllllel c !:rr:~ r_rwir
b 8 plllllP
f ) ,Iugl
BEFORE USE. MAKE SURE THAT CONTROL BOX. HEATING CELL AND
CABIN ARE ALL CONNECTED TOGETHER AND PHYSICALLY GROUJIIDED.
Do not touch inside the Control Box without disconnecting the mains
plug, even if the Power switch is in "OFF" position.
DIRECT HEATING CALIBRATING CELL:

Working Pressure 10 000 psi (700 kg/cm2)
Test Pressure
Temperature Range
15 000 psi
80°F to 350°F
(1050 kg/cm2)
( 25°C to 150°C)
n
Accuracy ::to.5°F (::to.25°C)
Power Supply 220 V150-60 Hz
Recommended Oil Teresso 43 or equivalent
Dimensions Single Cell Triple Cell

M 801135 M 801134
Height 7'1" (2.15 m)
Body diameter 8" (20.5 cm) 11" (28 cm)
Base diameter 13" (35.5 cm) 16" (40.6 cm)
~ Weight 250 Ibs (115 kg) 520 Ibs (235 kg)
Power requirements 2 kVA 3 kVA
Q
11-13
RUNNING PROCEDURE
()
STANDARD WIRE LINE
- Follow the safety instructions. SOCKET
- VBefore running in with Amerada, a control run is compulsory.
- Standard practice is to run Amerada in tandem.

SIIIIKER BAR
- Make up the tool as shown on the left.
Connect first the top Amerada to the wire line string. Note exact time stylus is
engaged and all serial numbers and ranges of the elements.
Connect the bottom Amerada to the crossover. Note exact time stylus is engaged SINKER BAR
and all serial numbers and ranges of the elements.
Remark: A knuckle joint can be used between Amerada especially in deviated wells. This
('\ practice is however not recommended in high rate producing wells, particularly CROSS OVER
in gas wells, because of vibrations.
- Running in is made at a speed not exceeding 10,000 ft I hr or (50m I mm) Slow

down through crossover, nipples... etc., in the tubing string.
- Make gradient steps while running in, not pulling out, to avoid hysteresis
effect. TOP
GAUGE
- Note time of all events which can affect recording.
- Slow down 300ft (or 100 m) above logging depth and stop at this depth. Note the
exact time. If logging depth is accidentally passed, come up 300 ft above this
depth and go down again to logging depth. This eleminates hysteresis effect.
- Come out of the hole at the running speed 10,000 ft I hr or 50 m I mn.

C
.
OIL TRAP
- After recovering the chart, write ON THE CHART the serial numbers of clock
CROSS OVER
('\ and gauge. Specify also 'TOP" or "BOTTOM" gauge.
- Note the maximum thermometer reading.
- Stops at each depth should be 1min for every 1hour on the clock (eg 3 hr clock _.
3 min stops).
8.0TTOM
- Remove clocks and put them back in clock cases immediately after pulling out of GAUGE
the hole.
- Avoid rough handling. Treat as instruments.
- Use lubriplate grease on all threads.

~ - Do not overtighten. 0 - Ring seals will hold pressure
OIL TRAP
- NEVER use pipe wrenches on cases THERMOMETER CARRIER
~
- REMEMBER to make a BASELINE
0 - TURN ON STYLUS BEFORE RUNNING.
11 - 14
SPECIFICA TIONS
n
DOWNHOLEEQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
OD LENGTH WEIGHT
MANUFACTURER MODEL SENSOR
(in) I (mm) lin) I (m) (Ibs) I (kg)
0 Standard devices
RPG 3 Pressure 73 or 77 1.8or 1.9 15 6.8

RT 1
GRC
RT 1A *
Temp. 11;4 32 66 1.7 13 5.9 n
Pressure 66 1.7
KUSTER KPG 15 6.8
Temp. 68 1.7
0 Slim hol e devices
RPG 4 Pressure 75 or 79 1.9or2.0 11 5.0
GRC RT B 1 25
Temp. 66 1.7 10 4.5
RT BA*
Pressure 42 1.
KUSTER K4 3/4 19 5 2.3
Temp. 43.5 1.1
0 Short d Ivices
GRC RPG 5 Pressure 11/2 38 20 0.5 6 2.7 n

Pressure 44.5 1.1
K2 1 25 6 2.7
Temp. 51.5 1.2
Pressure 46.5 1.1

KUSTER K3 11/4 32 9 4.0
Temp. 52.1j 1.3
Pressure 42 1.0
K4 19 5 2.3
3/4
Temp. 43.5 1.1
~ *The Model A is a fast response type. It responds to temperature changes, 10 times quicker
than the standard type.
()
11- 15
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE
(,
1. TRACE FAILS TO RETURN TO BASE LINE:
(a) Element has not been pre-pressured before use.
(b) Leaking of gas into bellows during survey.
2. TRACE RETURNS BELOW BASE LINE:

(a) Leaking Bourdon tube.
(b) Leaking Q-ring.
r,
3. JAGGED TRACE WHILE GAUGE NOT MOVING:
(a) Dirty stylus shaft bearing.
(b) Stylus spring too far out.
(c) Abnormal friction on chart holder.
4. STOPS MUCH LONGER THAN EXPECTED:

-Clock slippage.
('
5. GRADIENT STEPS SMALLER THAN EXPECTED:

-Shortened bellows.
.-
('
11 - 16
TROUBLE SHOOTING GUIDE (Contd.)
I~,
6. STOPS SHORTER THAN EXPECTED:
Chart holder not moving down freely but
being driven down by the clock.
7. ERRATIC TRACE:
(a) Stylus shaft broken loose from Bourdon tube.
(b) Stylus arm assembly loose around support spring.
r~
(c) Stylus loose on stylus arm.
(d) Loose stylus tension spring.
8. CROOKED BASE LINE:

(a) Improperly drawn base line.
(b) Crooked or twisted inner housing.
'n
n,
~-
11-17
SOFT SET BOMB HANGAR
('
Olis SoUsel Bomb Hangeris designed to set instruments significant savings: (l) when several wells in a field are to
virtually anywhere you have installed an Otis Landing be surveyed; and (2) in fields where a highly corrosive
Nipple (Types X, XN, R and RN). It is designed to carry environment requires the wireline to be removed from
up to 140 pounds of temperature-and-pressure survey the well during prolonged testing.
instruments and to eliminate the need for jarring to set,
NOTE: Use OR ONLY. If OS is used there is insufficient
aiding in assuring that charts show true well conditions,
rather than the effect of jarring. Additionally the hanger space to shear downwards to release if it becomes necessary.
can be set in one of many Otis Landing Nipples so that
you can run surveys at known locations downhole,
allowing reliable comparisons of results at different
depths.
Hangers can be run in either standard or heavy-
weight tubing with only one hanger required for
installation in either selective or no-go type nipples of
comparable size. The latch on the hanger is designed to
be tripped (see following page) by the restricted hone
bore of the landing nipple, permitting the dogs in the
hanger to locate in the nipple profile and lock in place as
the fish neck is pushed down by tool string weight.
(. An Olis Hydraulic-TypeRunning Tool is designed to be
used to run and set the Softset Bomb Hanger. Hanger
weight is balanced hydraulically in the running tool by
the tool's spring force (see following page). The load
carrying capacity of the running tool is adjustable using
washers, with the number of washers being determined
by the weight of the instruments attached. The running
tool is designed to gently release within 30 to 60 seconds
after the wireline is pulled to a minimum of 150 pounds
over tool-string weight.
All Otis Softset Bomb Hangers are designed to be run
and retrieved under pressure, using conventional
wireline methods. And with this hanger, surveys can be
Type XNS Otis
made with the wireline out of the hole. This can mean Selective
Softset Bomb
Hanger
GUIDE TO OTIS SOFTSET BOMB HANGERS
Auembly Number NippleI.O./In. Running PullingTool Pulling Maximum Bottom

Tool GS O.O./In. Thread
(\ H,S
33XNS18730
Std.
33XNS1871O'
HoneBore
1.875
No-Go
1.791 41HR1871O' 4O6S187oo
GUAdapter'
4OGU18700
Prong
49P1211
Length/In.
15.5 1.865 3/4-16
33XNS23130 33XNS2311O' 2.313 2.205 41HR23110' 4O6S231oo 4OGU23100 49P1212 15.6 2.303 3/4-16
33XNS2753O 33XNS2751O' 2150 2.635 41HR27510 4O6S275OO 4OGU31200 49P1213 17.0' 2.740' 3/4-16
33XNS2813O' 33XNS28110 2.813 2.666 41HR2751O' 4O6S275OO 4OGU31200 49P1213 17.0' 2.806 3/4-16
33XNS3313O' 33XNS3311O' 3.313 3.135 41HR33110 406531200 4OGU31200 49P1380 18.4 3.303 3/4-16
33XNS3813O' 33XNS3811O' 3.813 3.725 41HR3811O' 4OGS36800 4OGU31200 49P1231 19.2 3.807 3/4-16
33RNS21630 33RNS2181O' 2.188 2.0'10' 41HR2311O' 4O6S218oo 4OGU21800 49P1212 16.2 2.178 3/4-16
33RNS4123O' 33RNS4121O' 4.125 3.913 41HR3811O' 406538800 4OGU31200 49P1231 19.2 4.115 3/4-16
-
'GU Adapter must be run with TypeGS Pulling Tool.
GUIDETO HYDRAULICRUNNINGTOOL FOR SOFTSET BOMB HANGERS WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
~ AssemblyNumber Maximum
O.O./In. Length/In. ThreadConnection Fish Neck/in. Washer' Weightof Bomb/lb.
41HR18710 1.859 19.0 15/16-10' 1.375 Min. Max.

41HR23110 2.000 20.0 15/16-10' 1.750 None 15 35
41HR27510 2.530 20.2 1-1116-10 2.313 1 36 70
41HR33110 3.090 23.5 1-1/16-10 2150 2 76 105
41HR38110 3.780 23.7 1-1/16-10' 2.750 3 106 140
Minimum pulling force to release-15O pounds "Use only necessaryamount of washers

Maximum bomb weight - 140 pounds.
n,
11 - 18
SOFT SET RUNNING TOOL
~
I
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
Ease of running and setting the Otis Softset Bomb profile. Tool-string weight is designed to force the
Hanger is illustrated. hanger fishneck down, causing a spring-loaded lock to
Schematic No. 1 - When running in with running tool, force a set of balls against their retainers. This is
the hanger is extended to keep selective locking keys in designed to lock the hanger in the nipple and allows for
their retracted position. The running tool/ bomb retrieving the running tool.
assembly is run below the landing nipple or to the no-go Schematic No. 4 - No jarring is required to release the
shoulder. The hanger is now in position for locating in hanger. An upward pull on the wireline (also an
the landing nipple profile. indication to operator that hanger is locked in place) of
SchematicNo. 2 - Pulling the assembly back through 150 pounds over tool-string weight is designed to release
the landing nipple's restricted bore trips the hanger's running tool within 30 to 60 seconds.
keys. Continued pulling a few feet above the nipple A Type GS Otis Pulling Tool with shear-up adapter
places the hanger in its locate position. and pulling prong are used to retrieve the hanger. The
Schematic No. 3 - Upon setting down, the hanger is prong is designed to move the hanger's lock down,
designed to be set and locked in the matching nipple releasing balls, allowing the fish neck to engage and keys
to retract. Assembly may then be pulled.
fJ
WASHERS
SPRING
BALANCE PISTON
LANDING NIPPLE
PISTON
LUG
FISHNECK
LOCK
BALLS
n
LATCH LOCATOR
SELECTIVE
LOCKING
KEYS
TUBING
Schematic 1
-
Schematic 3 Schematic 4
~
Schematic 2 It Moving Parts
0 Hydraulic Pressure
in Running Tool
11 - 19
BAKER SOFT SET SYSTEM
n
Designed to set in the Baker 'R' (bottom no-go nipple) this soft set system is used to set
instruments such as Ameradas & Electronic Memory Recorders in a well without any jarring
action.
The 'RZB' Instrument Hanger is run on the Baker 'Soft

Release Running Tool" (No 811-40) plus 'C-l' Running
Prong (No 811-06).After attaching the instruments to the SOFT RELEASE R
hanger and running tool the complete assembly is run in RUNNING mOL
the hole to the 'R' nipple no-go. The keys on the hanger Product No. 811-40
will engage the nipple profile and an upward strain can be
applied. The tools are then "slacked off' and the running BOTTOM
tool should release as the collet fingers should now be NoG 0
expanded. If the tool has not released the strain should be BASE
reapplied in increasing increments until the collet expands.
To convert the ID of various 'R' nipple bores to suit the

(' RZB Hanger a range of "Nipple Inserts" are available.
These are run into the 'R' nipple on an Otis OS tool (shear
down to release).
The insert becomes locked in place when the RZB Hanger

is positioned inside the insert.
T!1: ~ZB Hanger is pulled with an Otis RB* or Cameo

JUC* or Cameo JDC* Oar up to shear), Otis SB* Oar
down to shear).
The nipple insert is recovered with an Otis OS*.

"RZB"
* Refer to chart for correct tool size and part number. Instrument
Hanger Nipple Insert
(\
SPECIFICATIONGUIDE
SealingNipple NippleInsert 'RlB" InrumenlHanger
Tubing Seal Max Max ToRun ToPull
00 Bore Size 00 Running!
and Size PuUing Size Pu"ing@ "B"Probe
In. In. In. RunningTool Tool.Prod. Tool Prod.No.
Model Toof
mm mm mm mm Prod.No-811-40 No.811-16
SoftRelease01 "C-I" Running 812.()7
2.25R 2.25Rx 1.43R 2.240
2-TIB 2.250 '6.90 1.437 4ORB14or
406521800 1.43
~
73.02 57.15 2.25F 2.302 36,50 4OSB6or
2.25Fx I.4JR
58.47 JUC15174or
1.900 1.900@
2.75R 2.740 JtlC15154
3-112 2.750 2.75Rx I.56R
69,60 1.56 1.562
68,90 69,85 2.75F 2.B02 39,67
2,75Fx I.56R
71,17
3.12R 3,115
3.125 3,12Rx 1.81R
79,12 406527500
79.38 3,12F 3,175 4ORB17or
4 3,12Fx 1.81R 4OSBIor
80,64
101,60 1.61 I.B12 JUC-TOI5185
3,31R 3.302 2.318
3.312 3,31Rx 1.81R
83,87 46,02 or
JOC-TOI5169
2.3/8
"RZB" Nipple Insert
84,12 3.31F 3,403
3.31Fx 1.81R
86,44 Instrument Landed in
n Hanger
Installed
"R" Nipple
11 - 20
DATA RECORDING
(\
The importance of supplying accurate data cannot be overstressed. The
charts are sent to the coast for interpretation so all relevant times and
depths must be recorded.
CHART - you should record the following data directly onto the top right
hand corner of the chart.
(1) Well No.
(11) Date
(m) Element No. and range
(IV) Clock No. and range

I)
(V) Upper/Lower (to identify which instrument chart is from).
CHART ENVELOPE - In addition to above information you should record:
(1) Ambient temperature
(11) Stops - depth and time.
FIELD RECORDING SHEET

This must be filled out as accurately as possible to enable the chart reader to determine the
exact sequence of events at the wellhead. Any changes in flow rate or flow conditions (such
as well shut-in) must be recorded at the time they occur. Any variations from original pro-
gramme, such as extended time at any depth should also be recorded.
f)
()
11 - 21
EXAMPLE CHARTS
n (1) ~alibration
Flex bourdon tube Repeat to check
-- 100% full range

r
repeatability ..
Baseline
(I- (11)Static Survey
Running In Final Stop

Running In.
~ 3rd Stop
4th Stop
Well Open
/~
Stylus on
\\ 1st stop
Baseline
\ Bleed off
Stylus Off
('
(m) Build -up' Survey.
Stabilized
Build Up
~ Running In
Well
Stylus
Open
on \ \ ---
Well Shut in
Pulling Out -
Bleed off -
(' Baseline" \ - S!yl~ Off
11 - 22
EXAMPLE CHARTS
n
(IV) Flowing Survey- :
~
/~
Stops
Well open Pulling Out
Stylus on
'"
\ Running In
Stylus off
/')
(V)Fall off survey:- water injection wells only:
~ 16hrs. r-
Stop Injection
Fall off
Open well
Stabilized
~I
"
\ Pulling out
Bleed off
--,f
/ Stylus off
Stylus On
11- 23
~
nOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
PROJECT 31 - B.H.P LIMITED
n
1. What information should be recorded on the top right corner of every chart?
(1)
(11)
(m)
(IV)
(V)
2. Why is it important that this information be recorded accurately?
t,
3. Why is a "base - line" important?
4. . What is the length of the two axis on the chart :
(1) Pressure deflection ....................................................................
(11) Time deflection ~ .
5. The total length of an RPG - 3 is inches
What is the accuracy of the RPG - 3 gauge.

<' 6.
7. Why is a ..double - pitch" lead screw used?
8.
~ Using a ..standard - pitch" lead screw how many turns are required for the
chart holder to move its full travel?
" ~"..
11 - 24
- Continued
PROJECT 31
-
.
9. How long should each stop be with a 3 hr clock and single pitch lead screw?
10. List 4 things which you should check on each chart to detennine if the
chart is acceptable:
(I)
(n)
(m)
r'~
(IV)
11. What is the difference between a "bellows" and "unbellows" ?
12. On the soft set Running tool what should be checked before running in the well?
(i)
(n)
13. (\
What is the correct pulling tool for the Soft Set Bomb Hanger?
- 14. What should be used with the tool in Question 13 to pull the bomb hanger?
~ 15, The Soft Set Bomb Hangar can be set in an X and an XN nipple profile.
I
TRUE I FALSE
I
I
n
I
11-25
I..
SECTION 12 - PERFORATOR/BAILER/B.P.V.
, .........
J
Type A Perforator 12- 2
Running Options 12 - 4
F collar stop 12 - 5
F tubing stop 12 - 6
F Perforator stop 12 - 7
T perforator stop I L Collar locator 12 - 8
Sand Bailing - Pump Bailer 12 - 10
1
......... - Hydrostatic Bailer 12 - 11
,
Back Pressure Valves 12 - 17
PROJECTS
Project32 - Type A Perforator 12 - 9
Project 33 - Sand Bailers 12 - 15
Project 34 - Back pressure valves 12 - 19

(\
f\,
12 - 1
~
:VLOR
RAINING
ONSULTANTS
OTISTYPE A PERFORATOR LIMITED
r APPLICATIONS: The Type A Otis Perforator is a mechan-

ically-operated perforator used to perforate standard and
heavy-wall tubing. Perforating procedures are carried
out under pressure with standard wire-line tools.
No explosives are used. The danger of premature perforating

is reduced and the possibility of perforating the casing
is eliminated. Applications have included perforating to :
(1) provide access to casing annulus to circulate or kill

the well.
(11) bring in additional production zones.
(m) permit production through tail pipe that has been

r, A plugged for remedial procedures and cannot be opened
by regular methods.
(iv) To gas lift old wells that do not have gas lift mandrels.
BENEFITS OF DESIGN PRINCIPLE
(1) Greater tubing penetration.
(11) Positive indication of perforation on removal of tool.
'(m) Safety release mechanism used for removal of perforator

from tubing without perforating.
Perforator is designed to withdraw punch and release
automatically after perforating.
(IV) Utilizes upward jarring for perforating action.

()
(Otis pre - fix (Part No.) is 62AO)
The standard size of hole punched by the perforator is

3/8" but this can be varied :!;1/16" (Le. 5/16 or 7/16) by changing the
punch and bushing.
B An alternative is to use the Kinley explosive perforator which can also

be used to install orfice inserts. Otis are licensed to run this device.
PART NAME
~ 1
2
3
Body
Shear Pin (2J
Bushing
4 Punch
5 Punch Holder
6 Housing Weld.
7 Catch
8 Spring
(\
,
9
10
Dowel! Pin
Soc. Hd. Set Sew.
11 Shear Pin
12 - 2
:vLOR
RAINING
ffiJ
.
... ONSULTANTS
.. LIMITED
TYPE" A" PERFO RATOR
~
Prep-aratioli :
1. Function test perforator by hand. Body should open and close freely. Check
bushing is tight on punch and moves with punch.
2. A ~ pin is placed hi the shear pin hole at the bottom to hold the "Punch
holder" and the "outer housing" together. The punch holder should be in the upward
position.
3. 2 . short ~ pins are placed in the yp'p'er shear pin hole to pin the ..Body"
to the "punch holder".
4. Ensure "wedge" is well coated with high pressure ,grease.
2Reration :
The perforator can be run with tubing or collar stops attached (See p 11-4) or the
"
stop can be set separately prior to running perforator. Assuming a stop has been set:
~. Make up perforator on standard toolstring.

2. Run down well to preset stop. At this point, provided you have not jarred
down, perforator can still be removed WITHOUT PUNCHING HOLE.
3. Jar down GENTLY - pick up each time after jarring. If top 2 pins are sheared
body will pick up, extend punch + bushing and push slips against tubing wall.
IF HOLE IS NOT REQUIRED -JAR DOWN HARD TO SHEAR BOTTOM PIN.
"Safety Catch" will lock in "Port BO'and lock perforator out of service.
Pick up (gently in case bottom pins are not sheared and pull out of hole.)
1'\
4. TO PERFORATE - Jar IIp-. Sit down slowly and jar u~ again. Continue
jarring up until perforator comes free. At this .point the "'Safety Catch" will
lock in "Port A" . Pull out of well.
Precautions:
1. The top pins do not take much jar force to shear. Check after ~ downward
.J lick.
2. DO NOT JAR DOWNWARD as

~ After perforation has commenced
this may break the punch.
3. Bushing must be a light fit on punch so that it moves to tubing wall and
supports punch.
4. Hydraulic jars £ill!be used. "
12 - 3
PERFORATOR: RUNNING OPTIONS
~
P) 5. While pressure should equalise as soon as hole is punched and before punch
is withdrawn the operator should be aware that it is P<2ssibleto be blown up
the hole. Keep a bind on wire after each upward lick.
6. Check'§p'ecifications of perforator match tubing weight prior to using.
1. Pre -setting stop 2. Running with stop' attached.
- TYPE "A"PERFORATOR-
('
.
. .
.
STEM SPACER
(Optional)
~
~- BIi"" Bo.
Knuckle -
Jom( ~
(\ I
"T" Perforator
Stop.
~ "P" Collar Stop. "P" Tubing Stop Perforator Stop "L" Collar
Locator.
Running Tool; S8
Pulling Tool; S8
()
12 - 4
F COLLAR STOP
n
The F Collar Stop is designed to be set in the collar
recesses of EU and NU tubing.
011Pin
It is run and pulled on an SB pulling tool.
To run, place collet in the lower position

(as shown) and squeeze together in a vice until
Body springs snap together.
This holds the shoulders" retracted.. during running.
Pin in the downward position.
Run into the tubing to below desired collar.

Pick-up, tripping springs, and set down into
collar. Jar down to lock and shear off. n
Latch with SB to pull by jarring upwards.
- Collet
Weldment
Roll Pin
n
Release Spring.
n
- -,<o>~ ~,~~-
12 - 5
lo~ f~
F TUBING STDP
(1
The F tubing stop is designed to set in all tubing
(except plastic coated) and hold force from the top.
It is run and pulled on an SB.
Run slowly to desired depth then over run slips

to grip tubing wall. If position is incorrect
pick up and re -position. Jar down to set tight
and shear SB.
('
Slip Mandrel
Slips
('
Band
- (Welded)
Slip Carrier.
('
12 - 6
F PERFORATOR COLLET STOP
n
This stop is designed to screw directly into
base of perforator (or via knuckle - joint).
It is set in the same manner as the F Collar
Stop but by attaching to perforator time
is saved setting and pulling collet stop.
fJ
Shear Pin
Collet Weldment
It
- Roll Pin
- Release Springs.
~
12 - 7
~
AYLOR
~ RAINING
ONSULTANTS
T PERFORATOR STOP / COUPLING LOCATOR LIMITED
:)
. T p'erforator stop- is attached to the perforator.

Running in slowly the whole assembly can be
lowered to perforating depth. Rapid downward
movement "over-runs" slips. Stop then
Mandrel provides firm base on which to trip perforator.
Coupling
()
Slips
Latch
Band
-
Latch Pin
Spring -
Slip Carrier
(\
Latch
Carrier
L collar locator is screwed onto T perforator

stop. It is pinned to extend latch for correct .
.. tubing size. Upper end of latch carrier keeps
slips disengaged until upward movement locates
collar and trips latch, shears pin and releases
Housing.
slips. This tool ensures perforator does not

punch hole in collar. This would be too thick
and would damage perforator.
0
12 - 8
PROJECT 32 - TYPE A PERFORATOR
-,(')
1. List 2 uses of the type" A. Perforator.
(1)
(n)
2. What size hole does a standard perforator punch make?
3. What are 3 different sizes most frequently used.
(1)
(n)
f)
(111)
4. Know how to dis - assemble and assemble this tool and indicate what
componentsare held togetherby :
(1) The top shear pins a) .....................................................................
b).....................................................................
(n) Bottom shear pin a) "",,""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""'"
b).....................................................................
5. If we decide to set a stop' fIrst then run the perforator which two stops
can we use:
(1) , ,....
(n) .................................................................................... n
6. What are the running/pulling tools for the stops in Question 5 (1)and 5 (n)
7. If we wish to run the stops attached to the perforator which two stops
can we use
(1) ...................................................................................
~ (n) ....................................................................................
8. What is the purpose of the L collar Locator?
9. Why do we sometimes include a stem as spacer below perforator? n
12 - 9
SA~ BAILING
h""
Occassionally wireline service involves sand bailing prior to the actual pulling
or setting of subsurface flow controls. Techniques vary, but the operation of sand
pumps are very much the same. After a few trips, the operator should know what
he will have to do to get a bailer full each trip; that is, how long he must stroke
the pump, whether it is necessary to drive down on the bailer (this seldom helps)
or how fast he must work the plunger.
Short bridges in the tubing will require some more precautions due to the
possibility of pressure trapped under a bridge. The most important of these precau-
tions is that the operator should never stroke the pump and stop at the top of the
stroke. He should keep the tools moving on up the tubing until he is sure there is
no pressure, then set the pump back down to make another stroke.
n When the bailer falls through a bridge, the tools should be pulled back up
several feet above the point where the bridge was fIrst encountered to make sure
the bridge of sand is completely clear before going deeper.
Sand is prone to become packed tight on the top when pressure has been applied
to the tubing above, which is very often done to keep the pressure equalized
above and below the sand bridge. This makes it difficult to pick up with the sand
pump. In this case, it might be necessary to run a tool to loosen it. This'
could be a pointed tool with barbs weldcil on it to drive down into the hard
sand and pull back out. A round tool with teeth cut around the bottom edge will
sometimes loosen it enough for the pump to pick it up. (eg. Serrated gauge cutter).
Sand Bailers are of two basic designs
(' (1) Pump Bailers
(11) Hydrostatic Bailers.
('
12- 10
SAND BAILERS
(1) THE PUMP BAILER (50 MO ) is used to remove the bulk of the sand n
above the wireline tools/equipment.
Description: It is a hollow tube with a check valve (ball or flapper) at its lower
end which is usually. muleshoed (cut at 45 degree). It contains a piston
and valve attached to a rod which passes through a loose hole
(for fluid by-pass) at the upper end of the tube. This rod is attached
to the toolstring (See p 11-8)
Operation: As the bottom of the bailer sits on the sand the weight of the toolstring
pushes piston to the bottom of the tube. As this piston is picked up it
sucks sand and debri into the bottom of the bailer. This slow" stroking
process" continues until the bailer is full.
(11) HYDROSTATIC BAILERS (50 BO )
A hydrostatic bailer consists of a chamber sealed at atmospheric pressure.

When the bailer reaches the top of the sand and is jarred
ruptured, and the bottom hole pressure surging into the
down, a shear disk is
chamber sucks up the
n
sand. A ball check in the bottom serves to trap the sand in the chamber.
These bailers are used to clean off sand or foreign materials from around a
fishing neck very successfully and are not recommended for normal bailing
operations. In soft sand, this bailer will bury itself each time it goes off.
It usually requires a hard object against which to shear the disc.
ALWAYS use pump bailer to remove bulk of sand etc. until the pump bailer is
resting on plug or whatever is to be removed. THEN a hydrostatic bailer can
be used to clean around the fishing neck.
Hydrostatic bailers are not recommended for normal bailing operations because:
(a) Too slow.

n
(b) High possibility of sticking in sand due to the suction action when the
sealed chamber is opened.
CAUTION
Sand pumps and hydrostatic bailers can be dangerous after pulling them to the surface
and when unloading the sand, due to .pressure trap.ped inside the chamber. Caution
should be taken when removing the check valve on bottom to make sure there is no
pressure inside. This can be determined usually by how hard the bottom is to unscrew.
., You should never completely remove the bottom while the bailer is pressured up.
Do not hammer on a bailer to remove sand. These bailers are subject to bottom
hole pressure. It is a good idea to visually inspect these bailers for wear and
wall reduction.
Hydrostatic bailers have pressure relief valves, and some have an automatic
pressure relief valve. These become plugged easily and can be dangerous to handle, f)
so observe the above caution when unscrewing bottom.
12 - 11
BAILERS
n
top sub Fishing neck
ball l
manual pressure Piston Rod
alIen screw S relief
Safety Plug automatic

cap } safety release
Top Sub
<'
Upper Barrel
cylinder
Valve
Piston (loose fit)
(' shear disc

Adapter
roll pin
Lower Barrel
0 - Ring
ball check valve.
Pin Retainer
lower housing
plunger
Check Valve
~ skirt (size variable to suit tubing)
Nose (Shoe)
by -pass opening
n HYDROSTATIC BAILER PUMP BAILER
12 - 12
HYDROSTATIC BAILER - OPERATION
-"--
n
Jar down
~
----- -----
Manual pressure relief

(open carefully)
,., Pressure Automatic pressure

equalized relief
Atmospheric
n
Pressure
n
Press ball off
seat with rod before
opening to check
pressure zero.
~ -----
(i) Strike against (ii) Sucking sand/fluid (iii) Bailer on surface

hard surface into cylinder after
shearing disc ()
12 - 13
HYDROSTATIC BAILER - OPERATION
('
Before runninK check the following points:
(I) Upper Manual pressure relief closed (fully IN)
(11) Automatic Pressure relief - check O-Ring and that disc is in position.
(111) Insert shear disc - to ensure 100% sealing it is helpful to wrap teflon
(P.T.F.E.) tape around edge or grease disc.
(IV) Check skirt is tight.
Seguence of °p.erations : Refer to diagram 12 - 9.
(I) Hydrostatic is run to solid obstruction. Tubing pressure outside is

() much greater than the atmospheric pressure inside. Downward jar action
shears the disc.
(11) The disc is forced inside the cylinder as the sand, scale and fluid rushes in
to fill the cylinder. The pressure inside and outside is now equalised.
(111) As the bailer is pulled out of the well the tubing pressure decreases near the
surface. Pressure trapped inside by check valve is now greater than tubing
pressure. Automatic relief valve should release excess pressure.
CAUTION: This relief valve can be easily blocked by sand.
(IV) On the surface the maqual relief valve should be loosened (do not remove
completely) and the ball check pushed off lower seat by a brass rod to ensure
no pressure is trapped inside. Remove lower housing.
NOTE: Clean threads and grease before re - assembling.
c
12- 14
PROJECT 33 - SAND BAILERS
n
1. Describe the difference between a ..pump bailer" and a "hydrostatic bailer..
2. When do you use:
(1) A pump bailer
(11) A Hydrostatic bailer. ")
3. What precautions must be taken when using. and ~p'!y'ing. sand bailers?
(1)
(11)
4. Describe operation of ..pump bailer..
5. Describe operation of ..hydrostatic bailer"

f)
/
6. Why must the hydrostatic bailer only be used against a solid object:
(1)
~ (11)
7. Why is an ..extension.. used on a pump bailer?
()
12 - 15
PERSONAL NOTES
. {0)
('
('
-
~
12- 16
BACK PRESSURE VALVES
Back Pressure Valves are installed in the tubing hanger during the following
n
operations.
MaxO.D. Mm.Bore
B.P.V. Hangar
(1) Nipple down drilling B.O.P. (or nipple up B.O.P.) I ..
2 -.J 2.020" I. 940

8
(n) Nipple up Xmas tree (or nipple down Xmas tree)
2 -1. 2.485"
8
(111) Test Xmas tree (2 way check)
31-
- 2 3.030" 2.950
(IV) Replace Master Valve.
4 _1 3.980" 3.900
2
The two main types used by P.D.O. are
(1) 3 - 1/2" Cameron Ty.p.s:"H" B.P.V. - max 0.0. = 3.030"

min bore through hanger = 2.950"
(n) 5 - 1/2" Otis "SA' Wellhead P.1ug- max 00=4.825',/ 5.250 keys expanded
hangar ID'"' 4.680" ')
(1) Cameron TY-p'e "H" B.P.V. (refer to p 12 - 18).
Cameron Type "H' Back Pressure Valves are used extensively in Cameron
Hangers to safely seal well pressure to 20,000 psi during removal of the blowout
preventer and installation of the Christmas Tree. Fluid may be circulated down
the tubing through the Back Pressure Valve with assurance of automatic reclosure
against well pressure at all times. If the tree above the tubing hanger is to be
pressure tested, the Type "H" Two Way Check Valve may be landed in the tubing hanger for
pressures to 20,000 psi.
The Cameron special shallow threads on Type "H' Back Pressure Valves and Plugs
provide strength for extreme pressures and long service life, with minimum reduction
in bore through the threaded portion.
If during the life of the well it becomes necessary to remove the Christmas f)
Tree or repair the lower master valve, the back pressure valve can be reinst--
alled in the hanger without killing the well. The "Lubricator" consists of
a rod which works through a yoke provided with two stuffmg boxes. By
closing the vent valve and opening the equalizing valve, well pressure acts
on both the top and bottom of the rod. The rod can then be moved up or down by
means of a friction wrench. Experienced operators can utilize the well pressure
- in moving the rod by manipulation of the valves.
~ (n) Otis "SA" Wellhead plug_- used in 5 - 1/2" LD.O. Hangers.
Running Tool = 41 CO 29
Pulling Tool =40 CO 6
Installed and removed using convention wireline rig up.

This plug holds pressure from both directions. n ""
12 - 17
CAMERON TYPE "H" BACK PRESSURE VALVE
;;:cS
-
~
12- 18
r---
PROJECT34-BACK PRESSURE VALVES
.-,
1. What are the 2 main types of B.P.V:
(I)
(11)
2. In what sizes of tubing hanger are each of the above B.P. V. used?
(I)
(11)
3. When is a B.P.V. Installed in the tubing hanger?
(I)
~
(11) ,
(m)
(IV)
4. Can a B.P.V. be installed and removed with full pressure on the well ?
5. What is the maximum O.D. of the 3 - 1/2" Cameron Type "'H"B.P.V.?
6. What is the ID of the hanger for the 3 - 1/2" Cameron Type "'H"'B.P. V.?
I)
7. What is the maximum OD of the 5 - 1/2" Otis "SA"' wellhead plug?
8. What is the I.D. of the 5 - 1/2" L.D.O. Hanger?
12 - 19
.;r. -
SECTION 13 - FISmNG
r--..
,
Introduction 13 - 2
Fishing Wire 13 - 3
Wirefall Calculations 13 - 4
Wirefall Formula 13 - 9
Wire Finders 13-10
Wire Grab 13- 12

Centre Spear 13-13
r Tubular Jars/Stretch Simulators 13 - 14

I
Wire Cutters 13 - 15
Cutter Bar 13 - 16
Sidewall Cutter 13 - 17
Go-devil 13 - 18
Kinley Snepper 13 - 19
Flopetrol Cutter 13 - 20
Overshots 13 - 22
Flopetrol Releasing Overshot 13 - 23
Magnet 13 - 26
(\
~
Broach 13 - 27
Tool Summary 13 - 28
General Fishing Guidelines 13 - 29
~ PROJECTS
Project 36 - Fishing 13 - 30
r'
13- 1
FISmNG - INTRODUCTION
Fishing techniques are extremely varied and depend largely on the circum-
n ~"
stances and well conditions for each individual situation.
The aim of wireline is to complete the set programme as 5l~y and- safely as possible
without getting the tools stuck or breaking wire. Towards this objective the
following practices should be observed.
(1) Check and maintain equipment regularly...
(u) Function test hydraulic jars and equipment to be run.
(m) Check pulling/running tools move to sheared position by removing shear

pins and testing.
(IV) Run gauge cutter -larger than tools to be run - before running tools.
(v) Always be sure to run a tool with OD larger than the rest of the toolstring
BELOW jars. "
(VI) Observe load limitations on wire - DO NOT OVERPULL.
(vu) Keep wire oiled - to reduce wear and friction.
(vm) Avoid kinking.wire.
(IX) Check counter correctly threaded and zeroed (odometer re-engaged)
(x) Keep hydraulic pressure relief valve correctlY.adjusteq.

(Xl) Use correct equalising .Rrocedures - correct prongs
- wait until equalisation is complete
(xu) Concentrate on what you are doing.
(xm) Try to "visualise" (i.e. sense) what is occurring downhole, as wire 1\

is manipulated on the surface. ~
(XIV) If you are unsure - ask for assistance.
(XV) Keep a careful record of toolstring lengths and O.D. 's.
(XVI) Think AHEAD - prepare for the unexpected!
(xvu) Check well records for previous problems encountered.
Unfortunately, however careful an operator is, fishing jobs will still occur.
~ The following section describes the fishing tools, their uses and limitations.
Practical fishing exercises will be set on the training well by your instructor.
REMEMBER: The .p'ractical skills of fishing are the most difficult, but the most
important, that you can learn. f
(\
Discuss a fishing programme with your supervisor and consider all possible results
of a run and plan for the various possibilities.
13 - 2
FIsmN G WIRE
c'
Of all the possible fishing situations broken wire is the most common and
for this reason it will be discussed fIrst.
The two possibilities are :
(1) Wire broken ~l!_surf~~, and remaining visible.

(11) Wire broken downhole.
(1) Wire remains visible: The wire is reconnected, using a nut, link from
chain, or disc from rope socket (see sketch below) and spooled back onto drum.
Hay Pulley may have to be repositioned to permit knot to pass. Wire can be removed
from counter head. If toolstring is stuck refer to cutting wire (p 13-14).
('
(11) Wire broken downhole : The fIrst objective is to locate the top of the WIre
but first we must estimate its position to provide a starting point.
The following factors must be considered.

(' (1) Size and age of wireline (wire becomes less flexible with age)
(11) Tubing LD. (bigger the ID - greater the fall)
(m) Well fluid (oil, water, gas etc.)
(IV) Strain (load) on wire when it broke.
(v) Where it breaks (near surface or near bottom)
~ (VI) Whether tools were stuck or free to fall.
While the effect of all of these factors cannot be accurately determined the following
..Rules of Thumb" allow on ~p-p'roximation of the position of the wire.
n
"
13 - 3
WIREFALL CALCULATIONS
'1
The amount of fall is measured from the level where the wire would be if it
was standing straight.
The following table is for 0.092 Nitronic 50.
Approx wirefall (relative to wire remaining.in hole)

Tubing size
per lOOm per 1000' %
2 - 3/8 0.9m 9' 0.9

/}
2 - 7/8 1.Om 10' 1.0
3 - 1/2 1.2m 12' 1.2
4 - 1/2 lAm 14' 1.4
5 - 1/2 1.6m 16' 1.6
Wire remaininK in the well is what is important and this can be determined by the
reading on the counter when the broken end returns to the surface.
e.g. Wire breaks! When the broken end appears on the surface the counter reading
is 960 meters. Allowing for the distance from counter head to zero (tubing
hangar) via hay pulley and lubricator (40) the wire remaining in the well is 1000 f\
meters. i.e. : Another 1000 meters of wire would be needed to return the counter
to zero.
,....
- -
itOm
~
0 'l//:;; I ~//////////////////////////////////////////////,
()"
13 - 4
WIREF ALL CALCULATIONS (Cont.)
()
To detennine the actual depth of the top of the wire we must fmd the following
infonnation in this order:
(1) How much wire remains in the hole (p 13-4):
(11) Where the top of wire would be if it was standing straight:

(depth of toolstring - wire remaining in hole =top of wire)
(m) How much the wire will fall:
(IV) Where wire actually is :
Straight depth - approx. wire fall =actual wire depth
4 Where top of wire would be

if it was straight.
(\
WIREF ALL
Actual wire depth
("
~
These principles are now going to be applied in the following examples:
Example I. The operator has Amerada gauges hanging at 25OOm. The wire is acci-
dentally cut at the master valve and the Ameradas drop lOOmto sit at H.D.D.
r (Total depth of well).
Estimate actual wire depth (tubing is 3 -1/2" and wire 0.092)
13 - 5
WIREF ALL CALCULATIONS - EXAMPLES
()-~
ExamRle 1 ( continued)
(1) Draw a sketch and fill in known infonnation including height of

lubricator and distance from unit to hay pulley as shown below.
7m 7m counter reading = 2500m.
20m 0 ~
cut here-
0
3.5"tubing
~////// 2600m
I~
(11) Detennine how much wire remain$ in the well.
Ameradas were at 2500m (this depth shown on counter)

Cut was Im above Zero therefore wire in hole:
2500
+1
2501 m
~ (m) Where would wire be if it was straight?
Initially it was Im above tubing hangar. However Ameradas
fell lOOmso the wire would be at 99m below tubing hangar.
This is the point from which the wire fall is measured. n .

-../
13 - 6
WIREFALL CALCULATIONS - Examples (cont.)
(\
(IV) To calculatewirefall : 0.092 wire in 3 - 1/2tubing.
(Refer to table p 13-4)
Wire will fall approx. 1.2m for everY.lOOmof wire in the hole.
Wire remaining = 2501m" (from (n) above).
Wirefall =2501 x 1.2

100
=30.012 m
(v) From this information we can determine approximately
where to start searchin~ for the top of the wire:
From (1l1)above: If wire was straight it would be: 99m below tubing hangar.
('f
If it falls 30m the top of wire will be 129m below tubing hangar.
Examgle 2 : Operator is latched into a plug at 1950m when wire breaks (Assume no
strain on wire - which is DQ!likely but must be assumed to enable calculation
to be made.) Wire is 0.092 in 2 - 7/8" tubing. Operator pulls broken end back
to counter head and counter reading is 485m (Same lubricator height and
distance. as Example 1)
(1) Fill in known information on sketch.
f' ,.
7m 7m count~r reading = 485 m
20m
0
,"
~ 2i tubing
wire br~aks here
r ,-
~
1950m
Latched on plug
13 - 7
WIREF ALL CALCULATIONS - Examples (cont)
I)
(11) Oetennine how much wire remains in the hole.
Counter reading - 485m (with broken wire at counter)

If we were to pull wire back to zero we would require
20 +7 +7 =34 m of wire.
Therefore counter depth (with wire at zero) =485 +34 ...519m.
We would need to pull another 5l9m of wire from the we1lto reach zero.
Wire left in hole is therefore 519m
(m) Where would wire be if it was straight? r) -'

Plug and toolstring are at 1950m
Wire remaining in hole - 519m (subtract)
=1431
This is the point from which wirefa1l will be measured.
(IV) To calculate the wirefall: 0.092 wire in 2 -7/8 tubing wire will fall approx
1m per lOOmof wire in hole.
Wire remaining -519m
Wirefa1l-519 x 1 -5.19m
100
As our counters only read in whole meters we will make this 5m.
t)
(v) To establish the point at which we can start searchin&.for the top of
WIre:
If wire was straight top would be at 1431m.
It falls back approx 5m from this depth.
Therefore top of wire should be at approx 1436m.
n~
13 - 8
WIRE FALL FORMULA
~
To calculate approximate top of wire:
T = [D - (C + d)] + (C+d x f) + H
100
I
T = estimated top of wire.
f = wirefall factor for wire/tubing size (p 13-4).
D = depth of toolstring in hole (when wire broke)
C counter reading with broken end spooled back to counter.
d = distance from counter to zero point.
H = distance toolstring falls back down the hole.
('J
Example (refer to Example 2, page 13-7).
f = (0.092 wire in 2 7/8" tubing).
D = 1950 (toolstring depth when wire broke)
C 485 m.
d = 20 + 7 + 7 = 34 m.
H 0 (if tools did not drop when wire broke)
T [D - (C + d)] + (C + d x f) + H
100
[1950 - (485 + 34)] + (485 + 34 x 1) + 0

(' 100
(1950 - 519) + (519 x 1) + 0

100
1431 + 5.19
1436.19m.
- Wire will be at approx. 1436m, so this becomes the starting point with the wire finder.
r'
~
13 - 9
WIRE FINDERS
I\.
It is important to estimate the approx. depth of the broken wire to have a . I
STARTING POINT to look for the wire. It is very easy to .l>y-=p~ the end with
the wirefinder, especially if broken end is tucked in a collar recess, mpple
bore, SSD etc. For this reason we must continue to search either side of the calcu-
lated depth. It is not good practice to continue running in the hole past the top of
the wire.
The two main types of wirefinder are:
(1) Bowen Wire Finder (p 13-10)
(11) Wire Scratcher (p 13-10)
(1) The Bowen Wire Finder has a flexible spring steel skirt which is changeable
to suit the tubing size (I.D.). The fingers of the skirt can be flexed
gently to a ..snug" fit in tubing. However if the wire is below a nipple
~
care must be taken not to jar down against nipple I.D. as it is possible
to bend, or break, the fmgers of the skirt.
The jJltemal taper is designed to grip the wire but in practice this rarely
occurs. However this tool is an efficient method of finding the top of
the wire.
(11) A Wire Scratcher is fabricated by passing wire through holes in a bar (or
old piece of stem or sucker rod) until a loops form a ..snug" fit in the
tubing size in which fishing is to be performed.
This type of wire finder can be used in any tubing at any depth (nipple
profiles, SSD cause no problem). However exercise caution near Side
Pocket Mandrels as a loop of wire can get caught around latch. ~
NOTE: With both designs of wire finder run in the well to approx. 50m above estimated
wire depth. Run slowly to 50m below wire depth - carefully observing weight
indicator, for drop in weight. Continue covering this area until wire is
located.
Make a ball of approx. 3' ONLY.
~ Too large a ball will cause problems later.
't
13-10
WIRE FINDERS
(\
PIECE OF
SUCKER ROD
(or old stem).
r~
Loops of
wire to fit
tubing I.D.
firmly.
0
r:
0
Inside taper
Flexible
skirt -
~
WIRE SCRA TCHER
(1) Running In (ii) Picking Up
n BOWEN WIRE FINDER
13-11
WIRE GRAB
The wireline grab is used to retrieve ':1

broken wireline from the wellbore after
making a small "ball" with a wire
finder.
When a wireline breaks and a consi-

Fish Neck derable length of it is left In the
wellbore, the upper section of the
line tends to coil and conform to the
Dim. A
I.D. of the well-bore, creating fri-
ction or resistance which prevents
the entire length of the line from
dropping.
WHEN AITEMPTING TO RETRIEVE
.Guide THE WIRELINE, IT IS IMPERATNE
f)
THAT THE TOP OF THE WIRE
FIRST BE LOCATED AND BALLED
WITH A WIRE FINDER BEFORE
RUNNING THE WIRELINE GRAB.
Barb It this is not done, the wire grab

may miss the top of the wireline and
bypass several feet of wire before
engaging it. Once this happens the
wireline that is above the grab will
tend to ..stack" around the grab as
Dim. B it is being retrieved and, if more than
.a few feet of line has been bypassed,
it will foul the grab to the extent that
it cannot be retrieved short of further
1'\
fishing operations.
Prong
CAUTION: ALWAYS RUN AIT ACHED TO
A ROPE SOCKET LATCHED
INTO AN RB PULLING
TOOL. in case grab
becomes entangled RB can be
sheared.
PART NO.OF NO.OF LENGTH PULLING
SIZE NUMBER
~
PRONGS GUIDES 'DIIMI.A DIM. B (INCHES) FLANGE 0.0. THREAD
IV," 52P54 2 2 1.375 1.49 22.0 !.I 87 15/16-IOUNS
2" 52P46 2 2 1.375 1.86 26.0 1.38 15/16-IOUNS
2" 52P56 3 0 1.375 1.86 26.0 1.38 15/16-IOUNS
2V2" 52P53 2 2 1.80 2.30 26.0 1.750 15/16-IOUNS
3" 52P59 3 0 2.25 2.74 26.2 1.750 15/16-IOUNS
3V2" 52P71 4 0 2.80 3.30 26.5 2.313 I I/16-IOUNS
4" 52P72 4 0 3.30 3.80 '!6.5 2.750 I I/I6-IOUNS
5" 52P73 4 0 3.61 4.II 26.5 3.125 I 1/16-IOUNS
5V2" 52P74 4 0 4.05 4.55 26.5 3.125 1 1/16-IOUNS n
13- 12
CENTRE SPEAR
n
CENTER SPEAR - This tool is not
recommended for general wire fishing
operations. It is made by welding barbs
on a pointed rod, staggered around the
outside and vertically. This tool can
be very difficult to move up the
tubing should it be run too far below
the end of the line and become engaged
in the wire. The wire above it will
ball up and become tighter as it is
jarred up the tubing until it is
(\ impossible to move it. It cannot be
released from its bite once the wire is
~.
wrapped around it. About the only time
this tool should be used is in a case
where the wire is balled up so badly
that it is impossible to get hold of it
with a two-prong grab. The pointed
spear can sometimes be driven into such
a ball and break off a small piece at a
time until the ball has been loosened
enough to be able to move it up the
tubing. In this case, it is recommended
that the two - prong grab then be used
since it will come nearer to straigh-
tening out the wire, making it easier
0 to pull.
This tool should also be run with a

rope socket and latched into an RB in
case it becomes entangled.
n
13-13
TUBULAR JARS/ACCELERATORS
r
These are two useful additions to the toolstring when fishing for
wire or when a heavy impact is required at a shallow depth.
Tubular jars - used in place of

Top Sub mechanical jars when fishing for
wire. As these jars are enclosed
there is less likelihood of wire
becoming entangled and jamming jar
action.
Link Body
: I
Link Mandrel
i
I
i .
I
Stretch simulators or Accelerators

I
are made by Otis and Flopetrol. They
are installed. in the toolstring
°. immediately below the rope socket
when hydraulic jars are to be used
at shallow depths Le. less than 300m.
The spring replaces the ..stretch..
n
of the wireline which exists when
jarring deep.
They reduce the shock loading at

the rope socket and cause the stem
- to ..accelerate" faster when the
hydraulic jars go off. This creates
a more effective impact.
~
Bottom Sub
r)
t 13 - 14
WIRE CUTTERS
n
Cutting of the wire can be made necessary in the following circumstances:
(1) Loss of jar action when - toolstring gets blown up ~ole

-,jars get fouled with wire
- toolstring gets buried in sand/scale.

- toolstring gets stuck above jars
- latched and cannot shear off.
(11) When toolstring is in casing and will not re-enter tubing wire can be cut
to abandon toolstring but recover wire.
(' (m) When wire is broken further up the well but toolstring is stuck.
Consider cutting wire BEFORE running wire finder to ball up wire.
Tools used to cut wire can be divided into two categories:
A) - To cut wire at rope socket after wire is broken higher up the well.
B) -To assemble around wlreline above the B.O.P. and drop using wire to guide
cutter to rope socket then cut.
In group A we have two types of tool:
(1) Cutter Bar.
(' (11) Side Wall Cutter.
In Group B we have three types of tool.
(1) BevelledGo - Devil.

(11) Flop.etrolCutter
(m) Kinley' Snep'p'er.

-
13- 15
CUTTER BAR
rt
The purpose of the cutter bar is to cut the wire at the top
of the rope socket of a tool string which cannot be
retrieved.
It is made up of a rope socket, stem and a blind box

and is dropped from the surface.
Stem: Length to suit well conditions.

Heavy oil will require a long length of
stem where as extreme caution must be
ROPESOCKET
taken in gas wells as very short
lengths of stem (or just rope socket
and blind box) will travel very quickly.
Excessive weight can cause problems
f)
"--
Blind Box: OD to suit ID of tubing and OD of rope
socket.
STEM
(I) Minimum size determined by distance
from tubing wall to completely cover
wire diameter.
CAUTION: Ensure blind box cannot QY..:P~
toolstring (e.g. in 4-1/2 tubing)
and become wedged beside toolstring
(11) Maximum size determined by fluid
by-pass round blind box and by nipple
I.D.'s.
Problems: Cutter bar may cut against X-over,
BLIND BOX tubing hanger or side pocket mandrel.
Not assured of successfully cutting n
at rope socket.
Wire Diameter (W)

Blind Box
Minimum Diameter (B)
STUCKTOOLSTRING
~ Toolstring O.Q. (t)
Tubing.I.D. (T)
,- Of/:'If-Ci -
) ~-( 7 . d D 9 Uf:,
. ., t W ~J
.. ~
()
Mmlmum Bhnd Box Diameter (B) ~<G~-fJ + 2 ~
'/-,
13 - 16
SIDE WALL CUTTER
~
,)
The . Sidewall cutter is designed to run

down the well beside the broken wire and
cut against the tubing wall.
This tool can be run on a sheardown
tool (SB) or on a C running tool.
The cutters have a shear pin which
Mandrel prevents them expanding prematurely.
Cut wire must be recovered before any

Upper cutter attempt is made to pull this cutter as
Lower Cutter the loose end of the wire would bail up
(': ABOVE the cutter.
When running it is advisable to use

a rope socket knot with only 1 - 1/2
wraps. It is possible for the cut end
Collet Retainer
of the wire to become entangled in the
I toolstring and the use of this "weak"
Guide rope socket knot will allow the tool-
Shear Pin string to be left behind.
Split ring
Set Screw
rl
(1
13-17
GO - DEVIL
(\ ~
The go-devil is similar in appearance to stem. It is available in 1-112" and

1-7/8" sizes in lengths from 18" to 60" (5'). It has a slot milled along
its length and a filler plate which is held in position with roll pins, leaving
a hole in the centre to run smoothly down the wire.
There are two major types of go-devil.
(1) Bevelled
(11) Flat - bottomed."
(1) Bevelledgo - devil is used to slide down wire

and cut at the rope socket by a ..slicing ..
action.
Length is determined by well content: I]
LonR in heavy oil
~ in light fluid.
rn
This tool is not recommended in gas.
Ensure diameter is sufficient to prevent go-devil

wedging alongside toolstrong.
(11) Flat bottomed - used to :
(a) trip Flopetrol cutter (p 13-19)

and Kinley (p 13-18)
(b) Provide cutting base on sand/wire

n
(c) Add weight to toolstring to Jar
down
Flat bottomed
(d) Assist toolstring back into
-
~
tubing (past muleshoe)
NOTE: When assembling Go - devil above B.O.P.
or tree connection pack Quick Union
~ with rags to prevent pieces being
dropped inside.
Bevelled f}.......
13 - 18
KINLEY SNEPPER
0
The Kinley Snepper is assembled on the
wire above the B.O.P. All pieces
are split to enable assembly around
the wire.
Top Cap Plunger
This "upside down'" version is used ,Retaining Screw
to prevent cutting on the fluid level,
at restrictions and side pocket mandrels.
A flat bottomed go-devil is dropped to

strike the Top Cap Plunger. This causes Knife
the "Knife" to slide the ..Slipper"
r. sideways which slices the wire.
Slipper
Go-devil and Kinley Snepper are
usually recovered in separate runs.
Crimper
CHECK OD's of Go-devil, cutter and
Crimper Screw
toolstring to ensure they cannot by-
pass or become wedged in tubing I.D.
REMEMBER: Cover hole when assem-
bling to prevent pieces falling down
the well.
Body
(\
- Retaining Pin
~
r
13 - 19
FLOPETROL CUTTER
r.
The Flopetrol Cutter (p 13-20) is a highly effective method of cutting the wire
close to the rope socket and returning to the surface attached to the cut end of the
wire. By changing the components it can cut all sizes of slickline and braided liner up
to 114" diameter.
°p.eration : Diagram (I) : The interface version is more common: It is dropped

fIrst then followed by a flat-bottomed go-devil. (as
for Kinley).
Diagram. (n) : When the go-devil strikes the hammer the impact
force slides the rotating knife against the
stationary knife.
Diagram (m) : When the knife rotates it cuts wire, bends

end of wire and drives tapered wedge upwards. The action ')
of bending and gripping the wire holds wire cutter
and go-devil above it, onto the wire.
Diagram (IV) Shows the knife detail. It is ESSENTIAL that

the slots are assembled facing in opposite directions
or wire will not be cut.
Advantages: - Will not cut at interface or restriction in tubing.
-cutter andgo-devil recovered with the wire.
- clean cut, close to the rope socket.
-can be used in oil or gas (v~ length of go-devil)
NOTE: With all cutters/go-devils dropped

precautions should be observed.
down the well the following n
1. ALWAYS COVER HOLE WHEN ASSEMBLING TOOL ON WIRE
2. CHECK tooUtubing sIzes to ensure tools cannot by-pass

wedge.
3. Pull a light bind on wIre during dropping I cutting (Equal
to jars open weight).
~ 4. Depending on fluid - allow approx. 1 min per 300m. for cutter

to drop.
G
-' /
13 - 20
FWPETROL WIRELINE CUTTER
0
t
Go - devil dropped separately (H) RunninK
-
(Hi) After go - devil
has hit hammer.
('
Wire
Extension
" hammer
hammer impact here
body
straight key
tapered key
rope socket
~ .
shear pin
rotating knife
stationary knife
knife holder
locator pin (iv) Knife Detail
guide pin
0
(for 3/16 line only)
13 - 21
\
O'BANN 0 N OVERSH or
()
rope socket used here
'"...---.." ".---.. ....

/' , /'
'
I
I ,\ I
I
\
r I , \
I I I I
. I
I I I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I I I
I I
I I
fluid by - pass 11
\
, 'I \
\ I
' ')
'... '--~'" ",/" ---"'" ". /
upper slip spring

spacer
upper slip holder
skirt
lower slip spring
split ring ,/ - -....."

/ \
lower slip I \
,
I I
I I
J I
I
I
~
\
(i) Dual Catch Overshot \ (ii) Modified skirt
, ,
," '"
'--- ...
bell guide
('.
13 - 22
OVERSHOTS
r1'"
Overshots are used to grip downhole tools when:
(i) Fishing neck is worn or broken
(ii) There is no fishing neck (eg : on Bowen jar body)
(ill) When a larger upward force is required than could be pulled on
standard pulling tool.
(iv) Upward jar action only is required.
The main types of overshot, and those used by P.D.O. are :
(i) O'Bannon (p 13-22)

(ii) flQp~ Releasing Overshot (p 13..24)
r (ill) Bowen
The principle of all overshots is the same. A set of hardened steel slips with
sharp upward facing teeth grip the "fish" . A spring assists these slips to
engage initially. However the upward pull, and upward jarring set the slips tighter
because of the tapered I.D. in the skirt. This moves upward against a matching
taper on the slips increasing the ..grip"force.
See diagram of O'Bannon p 13~22
Bowen and O'Bannon overshots cannot be released once they are latched so they
must be run attached to a rope socket. This is latched into a shear down tool (SB)
so that the overshot may be released and the toolstrlng returned to the- surface
to tie a new rope knot, redress hydraulic jars or add stem etc.
(' "'=--
The slips are available in a range of sizes. Choose the slips required and
CHECK BY LATCHING SAME SIZED OBJECT ON THE SURFACE prior to running.
- I
(\ ...-
13 - 23
......
FLOPETROL RELEASING OVERSHOT.
f)
The Flopetrol Releasing Overshot will retract the slips and release the
fish by jarring down. It has a wide range of slips from 1/2" to 2-7/8" to
fit 2 different sizes of overshots.
Operation: refer to diagram p 13-25.
(I) Read,};,to run. CHECK - Steel shear pin

- correct slip size
- correct core extension (long or short)
(11) LatchinK: - Slips move upwards and slide over fish until core extension hits
top of fish.
- Spring then pushes slips down and taper causes an initial grip.
(m) Pulling, : - an upward pull sets slips tighter. '1
- Upwards jar force is transmitted through the skirt and slips.
- No tendency to shear pin.
(IV) ShearinK: - downwards jar action forces core upwards against the
spring. (Considerable jarring is sometimes required).
- Once pin is sheared the two pawls hold the core in the upward
position which keeps the slips retracted.
Self-Releasing Overshot Specifications

Body assembly Coupling Skirt Slips Tool
For Fish 0.0., assembly
tubing Pin Part Maximum Part Maximum Part part
0.0. 0.0.
I I thread number 0.0. number 0.0. number minimum Imaximum number
2%" I 1:Y4"IW16"-10 1%" IM808413 no coupling 1:}'4" M802872 1;2" :}'4" M802875 M808433
:}'4" 1" M802874 M808434
1" 11/4" M802873 M808435 I)
17A!" M8028771 FA!" M803989 :}'4" 1" M802879 M808436
7;8" 1W' M802876 M808437
11A!" 1%" M802878 M808438
27A!" 11:Y4" IW16"-10 1%" IM808413 21A!" M8039901 2W' M802880 7A!" 1W' M802884 M808439
1W' 1%" M802883 M808440
1%" 1%" M802882 M808441
1%" 111/16" M803995 M808451
11;2" 1:}'4" M803988 M808452
31;2" I 2%" 111/16"-10 1:Y4" IM808271 1%" 1%" M802888 M808442
1%" 1W' M802887 M 808443
FA!" 2W' M802886 M808444
21:Y16" IM8028901 21:}'16" IM802889 1%" FA!" M802893 M808445
~ 4" 2%" 11/16"-10 1:}'4" M808271 3!V16" M802895 3!V16" M802894

17A!"
2W'
21;8"
21;8"
2%"
2%"
M802892 M808446
M802891 M808447
M802898 M808448
2%" 2%" M802897 M808449
2%" 27A!" M802896 M808450
tl
.. .. ,<>
13 - 24
Io'!'j
S
"'=
~
~
0
t""
~
t""
~
tI'j
t:>
>
00
~
body
IV
Z
Cl>
shear pin C
retainer
limit stop ~
tI'j
guide pin ~
shear pin 00
=
pawl spring
.~
I1
01
"'=1
pawl tl'jl
stop pin ~'
~
~
Z
core C
guide pin 00
tI'j
,0
skirt ~
tI'j
Z
~
main spring tI'j
core
core
extension
slips
taper
(i) Ready to Run (ii) Latching - slips (iii) Pulling.. Slips are (iv) Sheared.. downward
engage fish until core ..squeezed" onto fish jarring shears pin and
extension contacts fish by taper pawls latch core slips
are retracted from taper.
~~~~
o~a
~-----------
MAGNET
,-,-,-
{"'I
The magnetic fishing tool is designed to remove small pieces of ferrous metals
from the top of tools in the well. This tool does not have a hole through it for fluid
by -pass as do other tools. The magnet is fitted with a sleeve on the outside and a
spring which compresses the sle~ve to keep it below the end of the magnet. Upon
reaching the depth of the fish the operator sets the tool string down gently
on top of the fish. The weight of the tool string then forces the magnet down inside
the sleeve to pick up small pieces of wire or ferrous metals that might be lying
on top or around the fish. This is to be retrieved from the well slowly so as not to
lose the particles that have been retrieved.
r'J
('
GUIDE TO OTIS TYPE 'M' FISHING MAGNETS

Nominal Assembly Maximum FishingNeck
Size/Ins. Number O.O./Ins. O.O./Ins. Threads length
1-1/4 52MO7 1.23 1.00 5/8-11 13.12
1-1/2 52MO8 1.43 1.188 15/16-10 10.38
~ 2 52MO1 1.87 1.375 15/16-10 15.81
2-1/2 52MO12 2.18 1.375 15/16-10 15.81
2-1/2 52MO2 2.29 1.375 15/16-10 15.81
3 52MO5 2.84 2.313 1-1/16-10 12.00
3-1/2 52MO9 3.50 2.313 1-1/16-10 13.00
n 3-3/4 52MO6 3.75 2.313 1-1/16-10 13.00
13- 26
YLOR
f@i RAINING
.ONSULTANTS
TUBING BROACH . LIMITED
n
The tubing broach is made up of three major parts - (1) Mandrel, (2) Nut and (3) A
set of 3 pools. The spools are tapered and are used to cut burrs in the tUbing LO.
caused by perforation, rust, bent tubing etc. A small 0.0. spool is run - fIrst
followed by the next larger size and fmally one corresponding to the original
LO. of the tubing.
It is good practice to include hydraulic jars m the toolstring m case

broachis tight to remove.
()
GUIDE TO OTIS TUBING BROACHES
TubingSIll Mlndl'll11l" 8I'1IIeIIl3)' Nut111" Broach Mlx.!Mln. TubingSIzI IMlndl'll111" Bmell 13)' Nut111" BrDlch Mu.!Mln.
0.0. PertND. Plrt ND. PertND. 0.0. 0.0.
0.0. Plrt ND. Plrt ND. PertNo. 0.0. 0.0.
2.7/8" 65852 65832 65853 2.000 2.007/2.005
1.660" 65850 6587 65851 1.000 1.007/1.005
n
2.718" 65B52 65833 65B53 2.200 2.207/2.205
1.660" 65850 65B8 65851 1.265 1.292/1.290
2-718" 65B52 65856 65853 2.250 2.257/2.255
1.660" 65850 6589 65851 1.300 1.307/1.305
2-7/8" 65B52 65834 65B53 2.300 2.307/2.305
1.900" 65850 65810 65851 1.350 1.357/1.355
2.7/8" 65852 65835 65B53 2.320 2.32712.325
1.900" 65850 65811 65851 1.400 1.40711.405
2.718" 65852 65836 65B53 2.330 2.337/2.335
1.900" 65850 65812 65851 1.405 1.457/1.455
2-718" 65B52 65837 65853 2.340 2.347/2.345
1.900" 65850 65813 65851 1.500 1.507/1.505
2-718" 65852 65833 65853 2.350 2.357/2.355
1.900" 65850 65814 65851 1.515 1.522/1.520 2.360 2.367/2.365
2-718" 65852 65839 65B53
1.900" 65850 65815 65851 1.525 1.532/1.530
2.718" 65852 65840 65853 2.400 2.407/2.405
1.900" 65850 65816 65851 1.550 1.557/1.555
2-7/8" 65852 65841 65853 2.410 2.41712.415
2-1/16" 65852 65817 65853 1.600 1.607/1.605
3-1/2" 65854 65842 65855 2.750 2.757/2.755
2-1/16" 65852 65818 65853 1.650 1.657/1.655
3-1/2" 65854 65843 65855 2.800 2.807/2.605
2-1/16" 65852 65819 65853 1.655 1.662/1.660
3-112" 65854 65844 65855 2.850 2.857/2.855
2-1/16" 65852 65820 65B53 1.665 1.672/1.670
3-1/2" 65854 65845 65855 2.875 2.882/2.880
2-1/16" 65852 65821 65853 1.675 1.662/1.660
4-1/2" 65854 65846 65B55 3.700 3.707/3.705
~
2-1/16" 65852 65822 65853 1.700 1.707/1.705
4-1/2" 65854 65847 65855 3.800 3.807/3.605
2-1/16" 65852 65823 65853 1.750 1.75711.755
4-1/2" 65B54 65848 65B55 3.850 3.857/3.855
2-3/8" 65852 65824 65853 1.800 1.807/1.605
4-1/2" 65854 65849 65855 3.875 3.882/3.880
2-3/8" 65B52 65825 65853 1.850 1.857/1.855
65B52 1.900 'Assembly consists of one mandrel. one nut and three broach spools in sizes of your choice within
2.3/8" 65826 65853 1.907/1.905
the mandrel size.
2.3/8" 65B52 65827 65853 1.910 1.917/1.915
2-3/8" 65852 65828 65853 1.925 1.932/1.930
2-3/8" 65852 65B29 65853 1.940 1.94711945
2.3/8" 65852 65830 65853 1.960 1.967/1.965
2.3/8" 65B52 65831 65853 1.980 1.987/1.965
n
13 - 27
TOOL SUMMARY
~...
Tool Use Comment

Bowen Wire Finder Difficult to pass,nipple I.D.
Locate top of broken wire Care required near Side
Wire Scratcher
Pocket Mandrels.
Wire Grab To latch ball of wire

Run on rope socket +RB
Centre Spear To pierce thick ball of wire
Tubular jars When broken wire is in hole Reduces hazard of fouling jars
Consider blind box size
Cutter Bar To cut broken wire.
0 carefully
Go-devil: Bevelled To cut wire at rope socket Do not drop in gas.

Flat As cutting force for Flopetrol Check sizes
Kinley Snepper To cut wire Does not return on line usually
Flopetrol Cutter Cut wire close to rope socket Returns on line.
Side Wall Cutter To cut broken wire Leaves long piece above rope
socket.
Magnet To recover small pieces Magnetic steel only.

Overshot Run on rope socket + SB
To latch worn smooth items
Flopetrol Overshot Can be released by jarring
(\ DOWN
Broach To increase tubing I.D. Use with care
[mpression block To obtain "picture" Smooth before use.
..
('
13- 28
GENERAL FISIDNG GUIDELINES
1. records of (length/ diameters) and tools run

n
Keep accurate toolstrings
in the well.
2. Prior to running a fishing tool carefully consider the oRtions.

3. Think of two other tools which could be run if the fIrst is not succesful.
4. Carefully consider what action can be taken if the result of a run is not the expected!
desired outcome.
5. Attempt to remove broken wire first - then tools. (Unless you know tools have
been blown above wire).
6. Use an impression block when necessary to check downhole situation.
7. Keep all wire recovered from well until fishing job is complete. Record length
n
of pieces as they are recovered. This method will provide check on wire remaining..
in well.
8. Discuss operation with several operators/supervisors to gain as many

ideas as possible.
9. Carefully CHECK fishing tools and equipment on surface to ensure they will
latch the tool/equipment you wish to latch downhole.
10. Add up toolstring length and length of tools to be recovered.

ENSURE SUFFICIENT LUBRICATOR LENGTH TO GET COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
ABOVE MASTER VALVE.
(\
-
..
0
J
~
I
I
13 - 29
I
I
.:0
PROJECT 36 - FISHING
(': 1. Name 2 purposes of a flat bottom Go Devil: -
(I)
(11)
2. What is the "rule of thumb" on 0.092 wirefall estimation in the following

tubing.
(I) 2 - 3/8 ..........................................................................

(11) 2 - 7/8 ..........................................................................
(Ill) 3 - 1/2 ..........................................................................
0 (IV) 4 - 1/2 ..........................................................................

3. It is not recommended practice to drop a bevelled or tapered bottom Go-Devil
in large I.D. tubing.
Circle One: True False
4. Name the two tools you could run if the wire breaks and goes back down the hole?
(Assuming you have already made th~ wirefall estimation).
(I)
(11)
5. Explain the procedure for installing a Go-Devil on the wireline.
(\
6. What size line will a Flopetrol Cutter cut?
7. After the Flopetrol Cutter cuts the line, do you have to fish it from the well?
Circle One: Yes No
~ 8. Describe how the Flopetrol Cutter operates:
13 - 30
PROJECT 36 (continued)
tl
9. List the components of a Cutter bar.
(1)
(11)
(111)
10. Side pocket mandrels can cause premature cutting of wire by the cutter bar.
11. Explain why stretch simulators (accelerators) are used with hydraulic jars at
shallow depths.
r')
12. Tubular jars should be used while fishing wire.

13. Why would you use tubular jars?
14. You are using Q.092 wire in 3 - 112" tubing to pull a plug from 2150m when
wire breaks at the hay pulley. Hay pulley is 1 meter above the tubing hangar.
Tubing hangar to stuffing box is 8 meters. Unit is 20 meters from wellhead. At what
depth would you expect to locate wire (Assume: no strain on wire and that wire does
not stop in stuffing box). "
(write answers on a separate sheet- complete with sketch).
15. While pulling out of the hole your tools hang up at 1800m and wire breaks. Tools drop
back to an XN nipple at 2260m. When the wire is spooled to the counter head the counter
reads 165Om. Wire is 0.092 in 2 - 7/8" tubing. Surface measurements are the same
~ as in Question 14.
Where would you expect top of wire to be found?

(write answers on separate sheet - complete with sketch).
13 - 31
SECTION 14 - PACK OFFS
r)
Introduction 14 - 2
G Pack-off Assembly 14 - 3
Installation Options 14 - 4
G Pack - off element 14- 5
D Collar Stop 14 - 6
G Tubing Stop 14 - 7
('
PROJECTS
Project 37 - Pack Offs 14 - 8
14- 1
PACK - OFFS : INTRODUCTION
~
Pack-offs are designed to "straddle.. or pack off holes and any other communi-
cation in the tubing, while still permitting production to pass through the hollow
centre of the pack - off.
A pack - off is made up of the following components:
Upper Hold down
('
[TI -
Upper Seal
t -
Spacer Pipe
IT] Lower Seal

('
.I -.
I
I I
- I Lower Anchor Stop
- -
- I I
I
.
I
The Pack off is installed with the upper and lower seals on either side of the leak
in the tubing. The spacer pipe length is limited by the lubricator length and the devia-
tion of the tubing. If spacers longer than approx 6' - 8' are required a seal extension
is used and spacers are ..assembled.. downhole.
14 - 2
TYPE G PACK-OFF
l,
The most common and reliable pack - off is the QtlliJn>e- G:
It has the following design advantages:
(I) Internal running/pulling neck permits large flow bore.
(n) Proven G Element seals (used in D Collar locks)
(m) Can be set in collar type or smooth joint tubing
using 2 different bottom stops.
(IV) Upper and lower seal assemblies are identical.
(v) Straight forward running and pulling procedure.
CENTRALlZERS ()
'..
The bottom stop is run fIrst. The type is determined by the type of tubing:
(I) EU or NU tubing (with collar recess) - - Type D Collar Stop.
(n) Smooth joint tubing (e.g. H.CS or VAM) - G tubing stop.
The bottom stop must be run fIrst, seperately.

The remainder of the pack-off is run onto this
stop either in one piece or with the pack-off
and upper hold down run seperately. Upper
hold down is also a G tubing stop and both of
these components are run and pulled on a GS. n
BOTTOM
TYPEG
OriS
PACK-OFF
ASSEMBLY
CENTRALlZERS
TYPED
OrIS
~
COlLAR
STOPlOCK
n .
----
14 - 3
G PACK - OFF: INSTALLATION OPTIONS
~-~
n
G
(ii) Thread directly
(i) Run stop after Tubing onto upper
pack - off assembly Stop seal assembly.
stop" sits" on top.
-.
===-
Threadprotector--'-- 0
F;,hmg nook - [J
r Upper Seal Assembly
Spacer Pipe
Lower Seal Assembly

(identical to upper seal - inverted)
(\
~ - Collet L"ch
0 Collar Stop - - G Tubing Stop
~ g
" [J- Thread protector
14 - 4
-
G PACK OFF ELEMENT ASSEMBLY
n
The G Element Assembly is used on both ends of the spacer pipe. It is shown in the upper
position but by inverting the complete assembly it can be used as the lower seal.
After setting the lower stop the pack-off

assembly is lowered into position using a GS
running tool. Downward jar action compresses
Locking Sleeve the elements and they expand against the
tubing wall.
Spacers (*") can be added beneath the expander
to alter the expanded OD of the element to suit
Centering Lugs (3)
the tubing weight. n
~~
f
As a lower seal: Collet is screwed into
lower end. This latches into fishing neck
of D Collar lock or G Tubing Stop. When pulling
Element Expander the pack off this collet ensures. both elements
0 - Ring are fully-retracted before the pack - off
Split Ring is pulled.
Element
0 Ring + Split Ring

Expander
'*
Mandrel
As an upper seal: G tubing stop can be directly attached or a fishing neck can be
attached to the internal thread.
14 - 5
D COLLAR STOP
n
The D Collar stop is run on a C running tool which is pinned to the lower end of
the mandrel. It can be located in any EU or NU tubing collars.
Sleeve
It is lowered to below the collar and then
picked up until the dogs latch in the collar
Mandrel Cap recess. Jar up to shear the pin and pull
A running tool to the surface. .
(')
A
Mandrel
C RUNNING
Dogs TOOL
(\
0
Pin Running Tool Here
- DET PART NAME The collar stop is pulled on a GS.

1 Sleeve
~ 2
3
Mandrel Cap
Mandrel
Holes marked ..A" are lined up and locked
with a punch to unscrew mandrel cap when
4 Dog Segments stripping this tool.
('-..J
.
14 - 6
G TUBING STOP
n
The G Tubing stop can be run, and pulled on a GS. To set, the assembly is run in
the hole slowly. At the depth at which tubing stop is to be set the rate of descent
is increased until slip mandrel over-rides slips. If position is incorrect pick up and
re-position. Jar down to set.
Slip Mandrel
r)
Slips
Retainer Wire
([)
0
-
~ An alternative running tool is the Type G Quickset. This permits accurate positioning
and setting.
t}
14 - 7
PROJECT 37 - PACK OFFS
f\
I) What is the purpose of a pack - off?
2) Name the main components of the pack - off.

(1)
(11)
(111)
(IV)
(V)
3) To set a pack -off in EU tubing what type of lower stop is required?

(I
4) What are the running and pulling tools for the" stop" in Question 3.
(1) Running ..................................................
(11) Pulling.-:................................................................
5) If the pack -off is to be set in H.CS tubing what type of lower stop is required?
6) What type of stop is used as a "hold - down" ?
7) Why do the pack - off components all have internal fishing necks?
(\
8) Why is a running prong not required to run a pack - off?
9) Is a pulling prong required to pull a pack - off? Explain your answer.
~ 10) What is the purpose of the collet on the lower pack off assembly?
('
14 - 8
SECTION 15 - CALCULATIONS & CONVERSIONS
0
Introduction 15 - 2
Units - Metric & US. 15 - 3
Basic Formula - Area 15 - 4

- Volume
- Pressure
- Force
(\ Force 15 - 5
Hydrostatic Pressure 15 - 6
Conversion Factors 15 - 7
API Tubing Data 15- 8
Stem Wt V's Well Pressure ; 15 - 9
(\
'" J
.I
r..
15 -1
INTRODUCTION
"-
\ )
While the need for accurate "on the job'?calculations can be kept to a minimum it isnecessary for
the wireline operator to be aware of the following basic concepts.
As most wireline work is conducted with the wellunder pressure an understanding of the basic
laws of fluids is essential. The consequences of neglecting to consider the forces created by a
downhole pressure differential can be severein terms of lost production, lost equipment and
reduced safety.
The following section is not intended as a complete reference for oilfield calculations and topics
will be restricted to those relevant to wireline operations.
(', Despite an international trend to metrication and S.l. units the oil industry uses many Imperial
and us. measurements. To simplify this section metric and us. units have been favoured with
common variations in S.l. and Imperial units noted where appropriate (See page 15 - 3).
In addition to these units it is an advantage to be aware of the following basic laws of Physics
concerning fluids.
Within the limits of practical wireline applications we assume the following to be true:-
1 - Liquids are not compressible
2 - Gases are compressible
3 - Liquids and gases are both FLUIDS
4 - Pressure in a fluid is transmitted equally in all directions

(\
-
~
('
15 - 2
UNITS
()
The basic units, in the Metric and US. Systems pertaining to Wireline Operations are listed
below:-
METRI C UNIT US. UNIT
Length Millimetre (mm) Thousandths (1/1000)

Centimetre (cm) inch (in, ")
Metre (m) Foot (ft, ')
Area Square Millimetre (mm2)

Square Centimetres (cm2) Square inches (in2)
Square metres (m2) Square feet (ft2)
Volume Millilitres ()
(ml) Cubic inches (in3)
Litres (L) Cubic feet (ft3)
Cubic Centimetres (cc) (cm3) *Gallons (gal)
Cubic Metres (m3) Barrels (bbl)
Pressure KiloPascals (KPa) Pounds per square inch (psi)

Bar Amospheres (Atm)
Force Newtons (N) Pounds force (lbf)

DecaNewtons (DaN)
Kilogram force (kgf)
Weight Gram (g) Ounce (oz)

Kilogram (kg) Pound (lb)
n
Density Grams per cubic centimetre (glcm3) Pounds per cubic foot (lb/ft3)
Kilograms per cubic metre (kg/m3) Pounds per gallon (lb/gal)
Gradient KiloPascals per metre (KPa/m) Pounds per square inch

kgcm2/m per foot (psi/ft)
Temperature tDegrees Centigrade (OC) Degrees Fahrenheit (OF)
~ Variations
* Imperial Gallon = 20 fluid ounces (i.e. 125 0J0of US. Gal)
US Gallon = 16 fluid ounces (i.e. 80070of an Imp. gal)
tS.I. Temperature Unit = Degrees Kelvin (OK)
oK = °C + 273
n
"'--
15- 3
BASIC FORMULA
(,
Area (A) L
Square: A = Lx W
Dw
L
I IW Rectangle A = L x W
VD Circle A = 7rR2
~ Diameter (D) = 2 x Radius (R) pi (7r) = 3.14(and is constant)
Volume
Tank = LxWxD
0---
L
-w W
D
D Cylinder (tubing/casing) = 7rR2 x D
('
Pressure Force per unit Area =£
A
Hydrostatic Pressure = Pressure created by a column of fluid.

Density x VerticalDepth of Column
.I Force = Pressure x Area

-
Impact Force = Mass x Acceleration
0
15 - 4
FORCE
(I
Twotypes of Force are relevant to wireline operations:
(1) Force created by a pressure acting on an area.

Whenever a pressure differential downhole acts on a cross-sectional area the force created
is directly proportional to the pressure and the area.
FORCE = PRESSURE x AREA
Example: The forceof 3.Yz"x plug (2.750"packing bore) with a 5000psi pressuredifferential
IS:
Area = 1fR2
= 3.14x (2.~50Y
= 5.94in2
l')
Force = Pressure x Area
= 5000x 5.94
= 29,700lbf.
(2) ImpactForce created during downhole jarring action.
This impact force is critical to achievethe desired movement and shearing action in down-
hole tools and equipment. The amount of force created is directly proportional to the mass
of the stem and the speed at the point where jars are fully opened or closed. -
IMPACT FORCE = MASS X ACCELERATION
Downward Jar Action Upward Jar Action
Acceleration due to gravity only More acceleration available from

Wireline unit speed on surface. n
Limited by:
- Fluid viscosity Stem can be accelerated through heavy
- Hole deviation fluid and in deviated holes by wireline
from the surface.
Result:
Lessimpact available More impact available

Smaller shear pin diameters in shear Larger shear pin diameters in shear up
~ down tools
Stem Weight Calculation (approximate)

tools
Stem Weight (lbs) = Stem OD2(inches) x length (ft)
()
15 - 5
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE
I'
I c'
A calculation of the approximate downhole differential pressures is recommended prior to the
following wireline operations:
Pulling a plug
Retrievinggas lift valves
Opening an S.S.D.
As these pressure differentials are often influenced or created by hydrostatic pressure the fol-
lowing information is useful.
Hydrostatic Pressure is the pressure created by a column of fluid. the amount of pressure is
directly proportional to the fluid density and vertical depth (Note: True VerticalDepth (T.V.D.)is
important in calculations in deviated wells).
(' Hydrostatic Pressure = Density x Depth
To calculated hydrostatic pressure it is necessary to have an understanding of the following

terms, in addition to the basic pressure formula on Page 15 - 4.
~RecificGravity - is a ratio of the density of a fluid compared with the density of water. The
specific gravity of water is 1in all systems (no units as this is a ratio).
Density - Weight of a fluid per unit volume.

(Units = Ib/gal, Ib/ft3, Kg/m3, Kg/L)
Gradient - Rate of pressure increase per unit of depth.

(Units = psi/ft, kpa/m)
As pure water isused as a standard of comparison the following facts about water are necessary:
US. METRIC
(\
Density 62.41b/ft3 Ig/cm3
8.33 Ib/gal 1000kg/m3
Gradient 0.433 psi/ft 0.1 kgcm2/m
('
"-
15 - 6
CONVERSION FACTORS
Metric us.
Length cm x 0.3937 = inches inx2.54 = cm

m x 3.281 = feet ft x 0.3048 = m
Area cm2x 0.155 = in2 in2x 6.452 = cm2

m2x 10.76 = ft2 ft2 = 0.0929 = m2
Volume cm3(cc)x 0.06102 = in3 in3x 16.3871 = cm3

m3x 35.3147 = ft3 ft3x 0.02832 = m3
m3 x 6.29 = bbl bbl x 0.159 = m3
m3x 264.2 = gal gal x 0.003755 = m3
gal(US) x 0.83267 = gal(Imp)
ft3x 7.481 = gal ')
bbl x 42 = gal
bbl x 5.6146 = ft3
ft3x 0.1781 = bbl
ft3x 1728 = in2
Pressure kglcm2x 14.2234 = psi psi x 0.07031 = kglcm2

bar x 14.50 = psi Atmx 14.70 = psi
bar x 0.987 = atm Atm x 1.013= bar
kpa x 6.895 = psi psi x 0.145 = kpa
bar x 1.02 = kglcm2 psi x 0.6804 = Atm
Force Newtons x 0.225 = lbf lbf x 4.448 = N

kgfx 9.81 = N
kgf x 2.205 = lbf lbf x 0.454 = kgf
Weight/Mass g x 0.03527 = oz ozx28.35 = g n

kg x 2.205 = lb lb x 0.43536 = kg
.
Density g/cm3x 62.4 = lb/ft3 lb/ft x 0.01602 = glcm3

kg/m3 x 0.001 = glcm3 lb/ft x 16.02 = kg/m3
tb/gal x 0.1199= glcm3
gal/ft x 7.49 = lb/ft3
Gradient kgcm2/m x 0.231 = psi/ft ft of water x 0.0295 = Atm

ft of water x 0.433 = psi
~ psi/ft x 4.33 = kgcm2/m
Temperature (OC+ 17.78)x 1.8 = of (OF - 32)x 0.5555= °C

°C + 273 = oK
15- 7
API TUBING TABLE
()
Threaded and Coupled

Nominal Weight Joint Yield Strength
-.-.- - -
_-
Tubing Size
Nom. 0.0.
T &C
Non-
Up.
T&C
Upset
In!.
H.
Wan
ThiCk- Inside
ness Dia.
Drift
Dia.
~
Coup.OutsideDia.
Non-
Up.
Upset
Reg.
Upset
Spec.
IntegralJoint
Drift
Dla.
Box
0.0.
Col- Internal-
lapse
Resis-
tance
Yield
Pres-
sure
T&C
Non-
Up.
T &C
Upset
In!.
Jt.
Fill-Up
Volume
bbl/
In. In. 1 I Ib/ft Ib/It Ib/It Grade I in. in. I
in. I in. I in. I in. in. in. psi psi lb. lb. lb. ' 100It
-,-,-,--,-,-,-,--,-,-,--,-,-,-,-,-,-,-,--,- I 1 1
1.050 1.14 1.20 H-40 .113 .824 .730 1.313 1.660 7,200 7,530 6,360 13,300 .080
% 1.050
1.050
1.14
1.14
1.20
1.20
)-55
C-75
.113
.113
.824
.824
.730
.730
1.313
1.313
1.660
1.660
9,370 10,360
12,250 14.120
8,740
11,920
18,290
24,940
.080
.080
1.050 1.14 1.20 N-80 .113 .824 .730 1.313 1.660 12.970 15.070 12,710 26,610 .080
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -,-
1.315 1.70 1.80 1.72 H-40 .133 1.049 .955 1.660 1.900 .955 1.550 6,820 7,080 10,960 19760 15'970 .107
1 1.315
1.315
1.70
1.70
1.80
1.80
1.72
1.72
)-55
C-75
.133
.133
1.049
1.049
.955
.955
1.660
1.660
1.900
1.900
.955
.955
1.550
1.550
8,860
11,590
9,730
13,270
15,060
20.540
27,160
37.040
21960
29,940
.107
.107
1.315 1.70 1.80 1.72 N-80 .133 1.049 .955 1.660 1.900 .955 1.550 12,270 14,160 21,910 39,510 31,940 .107
-, -, -, -, -, --, -, -, -, -, -,~, -, -, -, -, -, -, -,-
1
1.660 2.10 H-40 .125 1.410 1.286 1.880 5,220 5.270 22,180 .205
1.660 2.30 2.40 2.33 H-40 .140 1.380 1.286 2.054 2.200 1.286 1.880 5,790 5,900 15,530 26,740 22,180 .185
1~ 1.660
1.660 2.30 2.40
2.10
2.33
)-55
)-55
.125
.140
1.410
1.380 1.286 2.054 2.200
1.286
1.286
1.880
1.880
6,790
7,530
7.250
8,120 21,360 36,770
30,500
30,500
.205
.185
1.660 2.30 2.40 2.33 C-75 .140 1.380 1.286 2.054 2.200 1.286 1.880 9,840 11,070 29,120 50,140 41,600 .185
1.660 2.30 2.40 2.33 N-80 .140 1.380 1.286 2.054 2.200 1.286 1.880 10,420 11,810 31,060 53,480 44,370 .185
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, ~,-,~, -, -, -, -
n lYz
1.900
1.900
1.900
1.900
1.900
2.75
2.75
2.75
2.90
2.90
2.90
2.40
2.76
2.40
2.76
2.76
H-40
H-40
)-55
)-55
C-75
.125
.145
.125
.145
.145
1.650
1.610
1.650
1.610
1.610
1.516
1.516
1.516
2.200
2.200
2.200
2.500
2.500
2.500
1.516
1.516
1.516
1.516
1.516
2.110
2.110
2.110
2.110
2.110
4,450
5.290
5,790
6,870
8,990
4,610
5,340
6,330
7,350
10.020
19,090 31,980
26,250 43,970
35,800 59.960
26,890
26,890
36,970
36,970
50,420
.264
.252
.264
.252
.252
1.900 2.75 2.90 2.76 N-80 .145 1.610 1.516 2.200 2.500 1.516 2.110 10,680 38,180 63,960 .252
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, 9,520 -, -, -, -,- 53,780
2.063 3.25 H-40 .156 1.751 1.657 2.325 5.240 5,290 35,690 .298
21l 2.063 3.25 )-55 .156 1.751 1.657 2.325 6,820 7,280 49,070 .298
lJ161 2.063 3.25 C-75 .156 U51 1.657 2.325 8,910 9,920 66,910 .298
2.063 3.25 N-80 .156 U51 1.657 2.325 9,440 10,590 71,370 .298
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, - ,-
2.375 4.00 H-40 .167 2.041 1.947 2.875 4.880 4,920 30,130 .429
2.375 4.60 4.70 H-40 .190 1.995 1.901 2.875 3.063 2.910 5,520 5,600 35,960 52,170 .387
2.375 4.00 )-55 .167 2.041 1.947 2.873 6,340 6,770 41,430 .429
2.375 4.60 4.70 J-55 .190 1.995 1.901 2.875 3.063 2.910 7,180 7,700 49.450 71,730 .387
2.375 4.00 C-75 .167 2.041 1.947 2.875 8,150 9,230 56,500 . .429
2% 2.375 4.60 4.70 C-75 .190 1.995 1.901 2.875 3.063 2.910 9,380 10,500 67,430 97,820 .387
2.375 5.80 5.95 C.75 .254 1.867 1.773 2.875 3.063 2.910 12.180 14,040 96,560 126,940 .338
2.375 4.00 N-80 .167 2.041 1.947 2.875 8,660 9,840 60,260 .429
2.375 4.60 4.70 N-80 .190 1.995 1.901 2.875 3.063 2.910 9,940 11,200 71,930 104,340 .387
2.375 5.80 5.95 N-80 .254 1.867 1.773 2.875 3.063 2.910 12,890 14,970 102,990 135,400 .338
2.375 4.60 4.70 P-1O5 .190 1.995 1.901 2.875 3.063 2.910 13,250 14,700 94,410 136,940 .387
2.375 5.80 5.95 P-1O5 .254 1.867 1.773 2.875 3.063 2.910 17,190 .338
-, -, -, --, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -,19,650 -,135,180-,177,710-, -
2.875 6.40 6.50 H-40 .217 2.441 2.347 3.500 3.668 3.460 5,230 5,280 52,780 72,480 .517
2.875 6.40 6.50 )-55 .217 2.441 2.347 3.500 3.668 3.460 6,800 7,260 72,580 99,660 .517
2.875 6.40 6.50 C-75 .217 2.441 2.347 3.500 3.668 3.460 8,900 9,910 98,970 135,900 .517
2.875 8.60 8.70 C-75 .308 2.259 2.165 3.500 3.668 3.460 12,200 14,060 149,360 185,290 .496
81
27/.
11 2.875 6.40 6.50 N-80 .217 2.441 2.347 3.500 3.668 3.460 9,420 10,570 105,570 144,960 .517
2.875 8.60 8.70 N-80 .308 2.259 2.165 3.500 3.668 3.460 12,920 15,000 159.310 198,710 .496
2.875 6.40 6.50 P-1O5 .217 2.441 2.347 3.500 3.668 3.460 12,560 13,870 138,560 190,260 .517
2.875 8.60 8.70 P-1O5 .308 2.259 2.165 3.500 3.668 3.460
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -,17,220 -,19,690 -,209,100-,260,810--,- .496
(' 3.500
3.500
3.500
3.500
7.70
9.20
10.20
7.70
9.30
H-40
H-40
H-40
)-55
.216
.254
.289
.216
3.068
2.992
2.922
3.068
2.943
2.867
2.797
2.943
4.250
4.250
4.250
4.250
4.500 4.180
4,070
5,050
5,680
5,290
4,320
5,080
5,780
5,940
65,070
79,540
92,550
89,470
103,610
.999
.869
.829
.999
3.500 9.20 9.30 )-55 .254 2.992 2.867 4.250 4.500 4.180 6,560 6,980 109,370 142,460 .869
3.500 10.20 )-55 .289 2.922 2.797 4.250 7,390 7,950 127,250 .829
3.500 7.70 C-75 .216 3.068 2.943 4.250 6,690 8,100 122,010 .999
3.500 9.20 9.30 C-75 .254 2.992 2.867 4.250 4.500 4.180 8,530 9,520 149,140 194,260 .869
3Yz 3.500 10.20 C-75 .289 2.922 2.797 4.250 9,660 10,840 173,530 .829
3.500 12.70 12.95 C-75 .375 2.750 2.625 4.250 4.500 4.180 12,200 14,060 230,990 276,120 .779
3.500 7.70 N-80 .216 3.068 2.943 4.250 7,080 8,640 130,140 .999
3.500 9.20 9.30 N-80 .254 2.992 2.867 4.250 4.500 4.180 9,080 10,160 159,090 207,220 .869
3.500 10.20 N-80 .289 2.922 2.797 4.250 10,230 11,560 185,100 .829
3.500 12.70 12.95 N-80 .375 2.750 2.625 4.250 4.500 4.180 12,920 15,000 246,390 294,530 .779
3.500 9.20 9.30 P-1O5 .254 2.992 2.867 4.250 4.500 4.180 12,110 13,330 208,800 271,970 .869
3.500 12.70 12.95 P-1O5 .375 2.750 2.625 4.250 4.500 4.180 17,200 19,690 323,390 386,570 .779
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -,-
4.000 9.50 H-40 .226 3.548 3.423 4.750 3,580 3,960 72,000 1.222
4.000 11.00 H-40 .262 3.476 3.351 5.000 4,420 4,580 123,070 1.173
4.000 9.50 )-55 .226 3.548 3.423 4.750 4,650 5,440 99,010 1.222
4 4.000
4.000 9.50
11.00 )-55
C-75
.262
.226
3.476
3.548
3.351
3.423 4.750
5.D00 5,750 6,300 169,220 1.173
1.222
~
5,800 7,420 135,010
4.000 11.00 C-75 .262 3.476 3.351 5.000 7,330 8,600 230,750 1.173
4.000 9.50 N-80 .226 3.548 3.423 4.750 6,120 7,910 144.010 1.222
4.000 11.00 N-80 .262 3.476 3.351 5.000 7,780 9,170 1.173
-, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -, -1-1-1-' -,246,140 -,-
4.500 12.60 12.75 H-40 .271 3.958 3.833 5.200 5.563 3,930 4,220 104'360 144'020 1.521
4.500 12.60 12.75 )-55 .271 5.563
4Yz 4.500 12.60 12.75 C-75 .271
3.958
3.958
3.833
3.833
5.200
5.200 5.563
5,100
6,430
5,800
7,900
143,500 198,030
195,680 270,040
1.521
1.521
4.500 12.60 12.75 N-80 .271 3.958 3.833 5.200 5.563 6,810 8,430 208,730 288,040
1
1.521
n
15 - 8
STEM WEIGHT V's WELL PRESSURE
-.--
INFORMATION SUMMARY
n
Area Weight(for LP.S.)
Dia
In' cm' tb/IOOO kg/lOGOm.
kg Ibs 1/4" 0.049 0.316 125.7' 187.0'
g 400 . 3/16" 0.027 0.174 72.38' 107.7'

180 . 0.125" 0.0123 0.079
'.1:3
<J 36.0 53.57
;S 0.108" 0.0092 0.059 31.11 46.30
IS 380
.... 170 0.105" 0.0087 0.056 29.00 43.15
~ 260 0.092" 0.0066 0.043 22.58
11)
33.60
~ 160 . 0.082" 0.0053 0.034 17.93 26.68
c:>.
!i I
"d 340
,;1(\
.
/
"d
150 + approx 20070for Dyform
$
12
I
ii 320
2 I
c:>. 140 I
'" I
~
S
e
0
<J
..
'" 130
I
.
300
280
/ r,
I
Q 120
"'I 260
ca::
;)
Cl 110
"'I
ca::
240 To Calculate approx Stem Wt:
r= D2 x 8
-
'"
"'I
100 220 3 = lbs/ft.
~
;,s
"'I
(for steel stem only.)
Eo-<
9O 200
en
180
80 0.125"
160
70
I
140
60
I
I
120
I 0.108"
0.105"
.0
I
50
I
100
I 0.092"
40
80
0.082"
30
60
- 20
40
~ 10 20
psi x 1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
.., kpa x 100«1

0 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 84 91 98
SURFACEPRESSURE
15 - 9
SECTION 16 - BAKER EQUIPMENT
('.
General Description 16-2
Nipple Bore Sizes 16-3
Tool Size Reference 16-5
Plugs 16-6
Flow Controls 16-7
Instrument Hanger 16-8
r Running Tools/Accessories 16-9
L-Sliding Side Door 16-11
D-2 Shifting Tool 16-13
Sur-Set System 16-15
Lock Mandrel - Running/Pulling Chart 16-17
Equipment Summary Chart 16-18
-
~
('"
16 - 1
loo
BAKER FLOW CONTROL EQUIPMENT
(\,
TTC Ltd wish to thank Baker Oil Tools Asia Pacific and specifically Mr Bob Shanks for the
assistance, and for the use of artwork from the Baker Sales cata10g in presenting this chapter.
Seating Nipples: The Baker "Top No Go" or "Selective Nipple" is the F, which is the profile
which also appears in the top of the L sliding side door. Consequently
the same lock mandrels fit in both.
The "Bottom No Go" Nipple is the R.
Refer to the foldout chart on p.16-18 for a quick reference to these

C' products and their respective locks/plugs/devices.
Lock Positioning
Method: Will be one of the following:
Top No Go - an enlarged OD above the V-Packing Assembly on the lock. This shoulder
located on a shoulder above the seal bore of the F nipple and L-SSD.
Bottom No Go - a reduced OD below the V-packing assembly on the lock. This shoulder
locates on a reduced ID below the seal bore of the R nipple.
Selective for "Top No Go" equipment only. Positioning and locking is achieved
by use of various sized locatings rings on the running tools (C-1) or by
using the selective (G and E) running tools to "selectively" expand locking
dogs.
Running/Pulling
Tools Have been specified by their Baker, and Otis and Camco designations.
-
('\ Refer to Section 4 for Otis/Camco equivalents. However, it should re-
membered that Baker fishing necks have a 20° undercut which matches
Otis Tool dogs. Camco dogs have a 90° shoulder. Use of Camco tools in
this application will place additional stress on the outer fishing neck profile.
- Note: The O.D. of an SB increases as dogs expand after shearing. Cameo tools do not. CHECKCLEARANCES.
For this reason the Cameo equivalents RB = JUC, SB = JDC have been omitted from the reference charts
~ but may be substituted directly if desired.
()
16 - 2
NIPPLES
1)
F Nipple (Profile also machined in L-SSD)
Top No Go (Selective) Nipple
Accepts the following locks:
- S
-w
-G
- F, F-l
- M,M-l
Locking grove/No Go shoulder

Sizes: 1.18-3.81 Sizes: 3.12, 3.31 and 4.00-5.95 above seal bore.
(except 3.12 and 3.31)
Sizes: Refer to chart P. 16 16 - 4

W NIPPLE - High pressure version of F profile
- Acceps M-2 lock mandrel
R NIPPLE
Bottom No-Go
Accepts the followinglocks:
- Z
-R n
- E,E-l
~
-K
- The location, size and number of R

~ Nipples can be varied to provide
optimum versatility in any given
well completion.
Sizes: 1.18-3.81 Sizes: 3.12, 3.31 and 4.00-5.95 Sizes: Refer to chart p. 16 - 4
(except 3.12 and 3.31)
(\
16 - 3
NIPPLE BORE SIZES
~
F Profile:
SPECIFICATIONGUIDE
Tubing Nipple Tubing Nipple Tubing Nipple
00 Seal Bore Min 00'" 00 SealBore Min00'" 00 Seal Bore Min 00'"
In. In. Size,A) In. In. In. Size'" In. In. In. Size'" In.
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
1.187 1.18 2.250 2.25 4.000 4.00
1.660 30.15 1.875 2-7/8 57,15 3.109 101,60
42.16 1.250 1.25 47.53 73.02 2.312 2.31 78,97 5 4.125
4.12
31,75 58,72 127,/10 104,78
1.437 1.43 2.562 2.56 4.312 4.31
1.900 36.50 2.109 55,07 109,52
48,26 1.500 1.50 53,57 3-1/2 2.750 2.75 3.687 4.562 4.56
38,10 88,1/0 59,85 93,55 5-1/2 11587
1.562 1.56 2.812 2.81 13!/,70 4.750
4.75
2-1/16 39,87 2.250 71,42 120.55
52,37 1.625
1.62 57,15 3.125 3.12 5.250 5.25
4U8 6-5/ Coupling
79,38 133,35
3.250 00
1.781 1.78 4 3.25 158,28 5.500 5.50
45,24 1O1,50 82,55 139.70
1.812 2.560 3.312 5.750
Cl 2-3/8
511.33 45,112
1.875
1.81
55,02 84.12
3.688
3.31
Coupling
00
7
177.8/1
146,G5
5.953
5.75
1.87 3.68 5.95

47,53 93,58 151,21
2-7/8 2.062 2.06 3.109 4-1/2 3.750 3.75 6.125
6.12
73,02 52,37 78,1/7 114,30 95.25 7-5/8 155.58
3.812 3.81 Ig3,58 6.375 6.37
(A) Othersizesfor heavyweight tubingare available 95,82 151,g2
un request.
i'i Nipplesare normally manufacturedto tubingjoint ODor couplingOD. Nipplescannotbe manufacturedwith smaller DOsthan indicatedi.nthe chart above.
SPECIFICATIONGUIDE
Tubing Nipple
00 Seal Bore No-Go10 Min DO'"
In. mm In. mm Site'" In. mm In. mm
1.660 42,15 1.187 30.15 1.18 1.135 1.875 47,83
1.437 1.43 1.385 53.57
1.900 48,25 2.109
1.500 1.50 1.447
2-1/16 53,37 1.562 1.56 1.510 2.250 57,15
1.781 1.78 1.728
2-3/8 5/1,33 1.812 1.81 1.760 2.560 55,/12
1.875 1.87 1.822
2.062 2.06 1.978
(: 2-7/8
3-1/2
73,02
88,110
2.125
2.250
2.312
2.562
2.12
2.25
2.31
2.56
2.035
2.197
2.259
2.442
3.109
3.687
78,g7
113,55
2.750 2.75 2.697
2.812 2.81 2.259
3.125 3.12 3.072
4 101,50 3.312 3.31 3.242
3.688 3.68 3.625
4-1/2 114.30 3.750 3.75 3.700
3.812 3.81 3.759
4.000 4.00 3.910
5 127.00 4.125 4.12 4.035 102.49
4.312 4.31 4.223 Coupling
107,25 00
-
4.562 11587 4.56 4.472 113.59
5-112 1311.70
4.750 4.75 4.660 118.35
I 5.250 5.25 5.150 130,81
6-5/8 158.28
5.500 5.50 5.400 137,16
5.750 5.75 5.625 142,88
7
5.953 5.95 5.828 148,03
6.125 6.12 6.000 152.40
7-5/8 193,58
6.375 6.37 6.257 158,03
~ (A)Othersizesfor heavyweight tubing are availableon request.

IB, Nipplesare normally manufacturedto tubing joint ODor couplingOD. Nipplescannotbe manufacturedwith smaller DOsthan indicatedin the chart above.
('
16 -4
I
~
I
~' AYLOR
RAINING
\;
TOOL SIZE REFERENCE ".
"ONSULTANTS
LIMITED
Tool sizes specified in Baker Charts are as follows: /\

Otis O.D. Cameo O.D. Nominal Size Will Engage:
40 RB 11 1.177 1.3/16" 0.875

40 RB 14 1.427 JUC 15174 1.422 1.1/2" 1.187
40 RB 21 1.484 JUG 15174 1.422 1.1/2" 1.187
40 RB 17 1.770 JUG-TO 15185 1.775 2" 1.375
40 RB 18 2.180 JUG-TO 15189 2.240 2.1/2" 1.750
40 RB 19 2.740 JUG-TO 15191 2.740 3" 2.313
40 SM 4 1.177 1.1/4" 0.875

40 SB 6 1.427 JOG 15154 1.422 1.1/2" 1.187
40 SB 8 1.484 JOG 15154 1.422 1.9" 1.187
40 SB 1 1.771 JOG-TO 15169 1.775 2" 1.375
40 SB 2 2.240 JOG 15171 2.240 2.1/2 1.750
40 SB 9 2.734 2.740 3" 2.313
f)
JOG-TO 15181
40 SB 10 3.670 JOG-TO 15183 3.678 4" 3.125
Lock Mandrels - classified in the following manner:
Non-Flowing Applications Flowing Applications

(eg Plugs) (eg Safety Valves)
Top No-Go W G,F,N,M
Bottom No-Go Z R,E,L,K
Selective S -
,.,.
Variations such as F-l, M-I denote variations on the basic lock design. Refer to individual
lock explanations.
Assembly Description
- Nipple Profile/Lock/Flow Control Device combinations are generally* described by using the
letter for each device in this order:
e.g. FSB = To suit F Nipple Profile

S Lock
B Circulating Blanking Plug
I
RZG = To suit R Nipple Profile
Z Lock
G Bypass Blanking Plug
* Note: These are some exceptions to this general rule.

f')
16 - 5
PLUGS
()
Bypass Blanking Plug
R Run as FSR, on S lock to set selectively in an F Nipple profile.
Fluid bypass during running is achieved by holding the By-Pass Valve open with the "B"
Running Prong.
Running:
(i) No-go: C-l - using seal bore locatorring to suit nipple bore.
Plus: A Shank (811-80)

Plus: B Prong (811-72)
n (ii) SELECTIVE E Selective or G Selective

plus B Prong plus B Prong
Pulling Equalise using "A guide (811-71) + C Prong (811-73)

Then pull lock with RB (or SB) + A probe
Model "FSR"
-
()
G Bypass Blanking Plug - Run as FSG, with inner mandrel held in
fluid by-pass position by running tool. Upward jarring shear~ running
tool off lock, shifts inner prong to plugging position and running
tool shear off inner prong.
Running:
(i) No-go: C-1 using seal bore locator rings to suit nipple bore
(ii) Selective: G Running Tool (remove core)
Pulling: Recover "Removable Mandrel" with SB or JDC then pull

~ lock with RB (or SB) + A probe.
Model "FSG"
0
16 - 6
FLOW CONTROLS
Equalising Check Valves (Standing Valves) n
Prevent downward flow while allowing upward flow.
Used For:
- Testing tubing
- Setting hydraulic packers
- Non return of fluid in Electric Submersible Pump Completion
Running Tool: C-I,SB,JDC
Pulling Tool Otis RB, SB

Camco JUC or JDC
()
to fit : F Nipple, L SSD to fit : R Nipples

Model"FB-2" Model"RB-2"
F G D (Top No Go) to suit F Nipple profile
Used to restrict flow in tubing when required.

n
,=-,;
Available with orifices 4/64 to 28/64

(1.18 and 1.225 : 15/64 maximum)
RRD Bottom No Go
To suit R Nipple Profile
~ Model "FeD" Model "RRD"
n ,..,.
16 - 7
~
"- ,AYLOR
" RAINING
'.,' '-c ONSULTANTS
INSTRUMENT HANGER ""," LIMITED
(' RZB can be set directly into an R nipple of the correct size or a nipple insert can be run to
reduce R nipple bore to suite RZB. This is important where:
(I) Maximum ID through R nipple is required for max flow.
(11) If bottom hole recorders and RZB hanger are to be run through a retrievable safety valve.
In this case the nipple insert is installed during the completion or by wireline before
running safety valve. Valve must be pulled to recover nipple insert.
RZB is run on (or C-l *) Soft Release Tool. This permits setting without jarring by pulling
upwards, closing jars gently and picking up to release. Ensure that sufficient stem weight is
used to force inner taper downwards. Difficulties in obtaining a smooth release are most often
due to insufficient weight.
*While the RZB can be run on theC-l running tool, upward jarring is then required, which may
affect instrument performance. "RZB"
Instrument Hanger
B instrument hanger can also be used on W or S

()
If running RZB or FWB on soft release tool with up facing dogs trailing, these dogs should be
'taped in' to avoid catching in lubricator/BaP & prematurely cocking soft release tool.
SPECIFICATIONGUIDE
SeatingNipple Nipple Insert "RIB" InslrumenlHanger
Tubing Seal Max Max To Run To Pull
OD Bore Size DD Runningl DD Pulling'" "B" Probe
and 51ze f----- Pulling Size - RunningTool ToolProd. Tool Prod. No.
In. In. Model In. Tool In. Prod. No. No.811-06 812.07
mm mm mm mm 811-40
SofiRelease I"C-I"Runnlng
2.25R 2.240
2-7/8 2.250 2.25R x 1.43R 56,90 1.437 40RB14or
73.02 57.15 2.25F 2.302 400521800 1.43 36,50 40SB6or
."
2.25Fx 1.43R 58,47 l.g00 JUCI5174 1.900
2.75R 2.740 JDC15154
3-1/2 2.750 2.75Rxl.56R 69,00 1.56 1.562
88.90 69.85 2.75F 2.802 39,67
2.75Fxl.56R 71,17
3.12R 3.115
3.125 3.12R x 1.81R 79.12 400527500
79.38 3.12F 3.175
4 3.12Fxl.81R 80.64 "RZB" Instrument Hanger
3.31R 3.302
('
101.60
3.312 3.31R x 1.81R 83.87
84,12 3.31F 3,403
3.31F x 1.81R 86.44
3.68R 3.678 Nipple Insert
3.688 3.68R x 1.81R 93.42
9368 3.68F 3.740
4.1/2 3.68F x 1.81R 95.00
114,30 3.81R 3.802
3.812 3.81Rxl.81R 96,57
96.82 3.81F 3.835
3.81Fxl.81R 97,41
4.O0R 3.U90
4.000 4.00Rxl.81R 101.35 40RB17 or
-
101.60 4.00F 4.090 405B1or
400Fxl.81R 103.89 400536800 1.81 1.812 2.318 JUC-TOI5185 2.3/8
4.12R 4.115 45.02 or
5 4.125 4.12Rxl.81dR 10452 JOC-TDI5169
127,00 104.78 4.12F 4.215
4.12Fxl.81R 107,06
4.31R 4.302
4.312 4.31Rxl.81R 109.27
~
I
109,52
4.562
4.31F
4.56R
4.31Fxl.81R
4.56Rxl.81R
4.385
111,38
4.552
115,62
I
115,87 4.56F 4.653

5.1/2 4.56Fxl.81R 118.19
139.70 4.75R 4.740
4.750 4.75Rxl.81R 120,40 400545600
120.55 4.75F 4.840
4,75Fxl.81R
",SeeRunningand Pulling Toolspecificailonsfor requiredOD's.

(' "'When orderingspecifyPinThd. 3/6-16NPin for "SB" and "RB" Tools, 112-13NPinfor "JUC" and"JOC"Tools. "RZB" Instrument Hanger
Installed
Nipple Insert
Landed in "R" Nipple
"R"
Nipple
16 - 8
RUNNING TOOLS
n
MODEL "M" MODEL "G" RUNNING TOOL
RUNNING/PULLING TOOL Product No. 811-08
Product No. 811-50 The Model "G" Running Tool
The Baker Model "M" Running is used to run wireline acces-
and Pulling Tool is a jar-down- sories equipped with Model "S"
release device used to run and Selective Lock (up facing locks
pull wireline equipment equipped trailing) in selective Model "F"
with internal fishing necks. Seating Nipple.
Model "M"
Running Tool n;-
Model."G"
Running Tool
SOFT RELEASE RUNNING MODEL "E"

TOOL SELECTIVE RUNNING TOOL
.- Product No. 811-40
The Baker Soft Release Running
Tool is an upstrain, slack-off
Product No. 811-17
The Model "E" Selective Running
Tool is used to selectively run Model"E"
setting device to be used when Soft Release and land flow control devices Selective
it is not desirable to jar to release Running Tool
with Model "S" Locks (all Running Tool
the wireline equipment (geophy- locks retracted).

sical instruments).
C) .,.
16 - 9
A CCESSO RIES
()
MODEL "C-l"
RUNNING TOOL
Product No. 811-06
The Model "C-l" Running
Tool runs Baker Flow Control
devices that have external
fishing neck locks. A thread
protector, which is the same
OD as the tool body, makes
possible selective setting. A
seal bore locating ring
provides Top No-Go setting. A
box-down connection accepts
the "A" or "N-l" Shank.
"C-l" Running Tool

With locating Ring
"N-l" Probe
n "A" GUIDE
Product No. 811-71
The Model "A" Guide is basically a
Product
No. 812-13
The Model "N-l" is
prong carrier. It centers and limits used to retrieve "G"
Thread Protector
the prong penetration during equal- and "R" locks
izing operators.
"M" Probe
Product
MODEL "A" SHANK "A" prong is widely used in running and No. 812-11
Product No. 811-80 pulling operations. "B" prong runs "R" -' The Model "M"
The Model "A" Shank is used type blanking plugs. "C" prong equalizes "M-I" Probe is used to run
with the "C-l" Running Tool to "R" blanking plugs Product and retrieve "E"
run "S", "W" and "Z" locks No. 812-14 and F" locks.
(retractedrduring running, and The Model "M-l"
it can 'also be used as a prong is used to run and
carrier when prongs are re- retrieve "E-l" and
quired during running opera- "F-l" locks.
tions.
MODEL "MA"
ADJUSTABLE PROBE
Product No. 812-18
The Model "A" Adjustable
(\ "A" Shank Probe, in conjunction with
conventional running and
pulling tools, is used to both
run and pull Baker Flow
Control equipment having a
Baker "M-2" Lock.
MODEL "N-l" SHANK
-
Product No. 811-85
The Model "N-l" Shank is used
in conjunction with the Model "A" Prong
Product No.
"C-l" Running Tool to run and 811-70
land Baker Flow Control Equip-
ment having a "G" or "R" lock.
~ "B" Prong
Product No.
811-72 "A" Probe
"B" Probe
Product
Product No. 812-07
No. 812-06 The Model "B" is
The Model "A" is used to retrieve
Model "MA" Model "N-l"
"C" Prong used to retrieve "w" and "Z"
Product No.. locks.
Adjustable Shank 811-73 "s" locks.
('Probe
16 - 10
"L" SLIDING SIDE DOOR
n'
The Model "L" Sliding Side Door is run as an integral part of the tubing string.
It is opened by UPWARD jarring action using the D-2 shifting tool.Otis Type B shifting tools
with selective keys, can also be used.
Inverting the D-2 shifting tool and jarring DOWNWARD closes the SSD.
Uses for SSD
To provide communication with the tubing/casing annulus for the following purposes:
- Displacing tubing/annulus fluid after completion.

- Selective production, treating or testing of various zones.
- Production of multiple zones
- Circulating to kill a well.
- Gas Lifting (in the absence of suitable gas lift mandrels)
- Circulating corrosion inhibitors
- Positioning co-mingling chokes for dual zone flow
()
Design Features:
- Seals moulded directly onto sleeve.

- Multiple SSD's can be run and opened/closed selectively using D-2 shifting tool.
- No equalising position
- Lower seal bore to permit installation of following accessories:
- Integral 'F' Nipple profile of plugs and accessories such as :
- separation sleeves (LSE, LWE, LGE, LME)
- plugs (LSR, LWR)
- chokes (LSU, LWU, LGU)
Lock
S w M G
n
Accessory
u
E Spacer By Pass
Choke
.,j Assembly
.Name
(
LWE
! ! r
LGU
~ LSE
L
LME LGE
L
SSD
n.,.&'
16-11
()
Unique Model "L"

Sliding, Sleeve
Seal System
FINES AND SOLIDS CAN'T BUILD UP.

Seals are close to the ports, reducing the
r areas in which solids can build up to wedge

or bind the sleeve. As the closing sleeve
shifts, any build-up is sheared out.
Closing Sleeve
ROOM FOR GROWTH. Ordinary seals,
under heat and pressure, can swell with
enough force to bind the sleeve. The Seals
have a special profile that allows room for
growth without binding.
TRAPPED PRESSURE BLEED-OFF. As

the closing sleeve shifts, the area between
the seals tend to trap pressures that might
cause pressure lock, but the Seal design
assures bleed-off of these pressures.
("
SUPER-SMOOTH BORE. Seals tend to stick

to sealing surfaces during periods of heat
and pressure. The super-smooth bore
minimizes this possibility.
-
~
Sub
SEAL MOLDED TO CLOSING - SLEEVE

BODY. Damage caused by high-velocity,
I high-pressure flow across and behind non-
bonded seals is eliminated by these mole-
cularly-bonded closing sleeve seals.
In many field and laboratory tests, were
repeatedly open and closed at high diffe-
OPEN ClOSED rential pressures without seal damage.
0.
16-12
D-2 SHIFTING TOOL
n
Run in either the opening position (shifting dogs up-facing) or closing position by inverting
the tool.
The two critical dimensions - TO BE CHECKED BEFORE RUNNING are: (refer to chart
on p 16-14)
COLLET OD : To ensure sufficient friction to locate in seal bore to expand and engage
shifting dogs.
LENGTH : Collet to dogs. To ensure:
(i) Full movement of sleeve prior to release (dogs retracting)

Not achieved if length is too LONG.
(ii) Retracting of dogs to release D-2 shifting tool after full movement of sleeve.
Not achieve if length is too SHORT. r')
Operation:
A. If differential flow is encountered while opening SSD, flow across collet maintains dog
contact with sleeve to reduce change of tools being blown up the hole.
IMPORTANT: During equalisation MAXIMUM strain should be maintained on the wire

for two reasons:
(i) To assist in maintaining contact between dogs and sleeve.
(ii) To provide immediate rapid upward movement of the toolstring if the

dogs release.
B. Location of SSD is verified by the operator when he encounters two seal bores across
a two foot distance. (As opposed to the single seal bore of a nipple profile).
c. Verification that the sleeve has moved fully is achieved by attempting to re-latch after
F).l'
jarring is complete and tool has released.
(Assuming LENGTH has been correctly set).
D. D-2 shifting tool has 3 shear pins to permit dogs to retract in the event that the sleeve
will not move.
NOTE: This shear pin should be checked as tool is removed from lubricator. If sheared;
re-pin and rerun to verify that sleeve is fully shifted.
OPENING DIRECTION
~ An SSD with an upward opening direction has the following advantages:

-
-
Hydraulic or Spring jars can be utilized to increase upward impact.
In a thick, viscous fluid (heavy oil, drilling mud etc) a greater upward impact can be
achieved from any given toolstring weight/diameter.
()~
16 - 13
D-2 SHIFTING TOOL
r,
L-SSD SPECIFICATION CHART
Size 00'"
In.
1.18 2.187
1.25
1.43 2.375
1.50
1.56 2.500
1.62
1.78
1.81 2.910
1.87
-----j 3.410
2.31
2.75
4.500
2.81
3.12
4 3.25 5.000
() 3.31
-
3.68
3.75
3.81
4.00 5.500
4.12
4.31
4.56 I 6.050
7.390
5.50
8.500
D-2 SPECIFICATIONCHART
Dim "A" Dim "8"
Pin Thread
Size In. In.
1.18 1.213
14-17/32 .625 OD
1.25 1.281 I 11NThd
1.43 1.468
1.50 1.531
14-15/16
1.56 1.593
1.62 1.656 .937 OD
C' ill
1.81
1.807
1.843
10NThd
15-11/16
1.87 1.906
2.25 2.281 .n,",¥
2.31 2.343
I I 16-5/8
2.75 2.781 n..,v¥

17-1/8
2.81 2.843
3.12
3.25
3.31
3.68 3.743
3.75 3.805 22-11/16
3.81 3.867 1.062 OD
~
4.00 10NThd
4.12
4.31 4.406 19-718
4.56 4.656 19-5/8
OPENING ClOSING 5.50 5.575 23-5/8
"'This size designationMUSTbe sameas "L" Sliding Sleeve.
(t
16 - 14
SUR-SET SYSTEM
'l
This is a brief summary only. Running/Pulling details not presented.
General Design
Available in three basic versions depending on the profile type and required pressure rating.
Features:
. Can only be located and set in a proper nipple profile.
. Failure to fully set will cause lock to retu:p1 to surface with running tool.
. "Tell-tale" shear pin in running tool provides visual confirmation that lock is fully set.
. Sur-Set lock will not unseat in high vibration, high flow rate applications.
()
. Largecross-sectionload bearingareas to increasepressureratings from aboveand below.
This is designedto eliminate deformation of the No Go.
. Increased internal flow area, with smooth bore.
Selective Top No Go (F) Bottom No Go (R) Max. Pressure
Model: A AF AR 10,000 PSI
Model: H HF HR 15,000 PSI
Model: V VF VR Over 15,000 PSI

n_7..
Nipple profile and compatible lock have the same Model Identification (Le. AF Lock fits AF
nipple). Selective nipples (A,H.V) in 3.1/2 OD and smaller sizes will also accept Top No Go
Locks (AF, HF, VF) of same size.
-
~
f\ :/
16-15
SUR-SET SYSTEM
MODELS
TYPES "AF", "HF", "VF"
"AF", "HF", "VF" Locks
Seating Nipples
No-Go
TOP No-Go
BASE
('
I.
MODEL
(\ TYPES "AR", "HR", "VR"
"AR", "HR", "VR" Locks
Seating Nipples
- No-Go
BASE BOTTOM No-Go
16 - 16
LOCK MANDREL - RUN/PULL CHART
'J'
LOCK RUNNING RUNNING PULLING PULLING

TOOL ACCESSORY TOOL ACCESSORY
G Selective - AB
Selective E Selective - JUC A Probe

S C-1 SB
Locator Aing
+ A Shank JDC
:>
Top No Go AB
W C-1 Protector B Probe
(or Soft Set) I A Shank JUC
G C-1 Protector SB
+ N-1 Shank JDC N-1 Probe
F
M M M Probe M
M-1 M-1 Probe
F-1 M-1 Probe

GS GS
B BT + X to suit BT+X
..
M-2 MA Adjustable MA + Adjustable Probe
Z Soft Set - AB It
-'"
Protector JUC B Probe

C-1 + A Shank
SB
A Protector
+ N-1 Shank JDC N-1 Probe
-
I
K
E
M M Probe M M Probe
~ E-1 GS M-1 Probe GS M-1 Probe
r -
16-17
LOR
INING
'NSULTANTS
BAKER FLOW CONTROL EQUIPMENT SUMMARY LIMITED
-
--! G E RB G-1 M
SB GS Soft Set RB sa G-1 M GS
0 (JUG) (JOG) (JUG) (JOG)
0
.
f-
(')
Z locator Protector
_I to suit Only
boo< only
.-J I
~
g~t~e
I
III 11 ,.J
n
Il
"---
C) I rl
III -
Z
Z
Z
~ I~n -F--' ~ -- t A N-I
t tB t
:
sh~nk sh~nk N-1
t t
0::: shank shank shank
U
(dow~ do~s
retracted) (all dogs
A
probe probe
I
N-1
probe
,~ ~!
prooe probe prooe
I
I.IA
B
probe
N-I
probe
I
M
probe
M-I
probe
+-' retracted) I I
, adjustable
(]) I probe
;
(]) , (To suit
safety '
..0
0 I. device) i ,Ir-
n !
M
I
'- X
I
I
I
I
Il prong I I
"--- I ,
0"> ,II I
.I
C w
0
G f-1 F M M-1 B M-2 z R K E E-1
'-
Il
TOP
NO GO
--.J BASE
W
0:::
0
Z
<{
2
~
U
0 Note: F profde will also
accept G. F-I. F.
--! M, M-I, BLocks
but not commonly
utilized..
'W' 'R'
High Pressure NIPPLE
Top No-go
Nipple
W
--!
I LL
i 0
0:::
Cl. GLOSE
- RUNNING
no PULLING
..
16-18
I -.

D01 Deoiler Cyclones Rev 11-12

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

D01 Deoiler Cyclones Rev 11-12

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

~.

~ Projects to be completed prior to a test on each topic

Test after each chapter to verify the individuals level of understanding.

- to improve understanding and awareness of equipment operation and

to improve efficiency and to reduce downtime from insufficient

Each topic is presented in the following format:

Theory - classroom sessions

Test after each chapter to verify the individuals level of understanding.

Aims and objectives of the course are:

- to improve understanding and awareness of equipment operation and

to improve efficiency and to reduce downtime from insufficient

to improve on-site safety.

- to aid personnel involved in purchase and inventory control of wireline

If specific details or specifications for a piece of equipment are required it is recommended to

Section 1 Surface Equipment 1- 1

Section 16 Baker Equipment 16 - 1

ph: fax: telex:

D Direct Purchase D Company Issue

Are you interested in future manual updates 0 0

Thank you for your assistance.

Project Topic Page

- Projects to be completed during course.

The forerunner of the modern circular cross-section wireline was

Supervisors and operators should be fully aware of the various constraints

Many of these can be minimized through good planning and a professional

Efficient well records are essential

Wireline Service is a method whereby various well maintenance, remedial, control

Most wells upon which we perform Wireline Services will contain, or be

To enable the tools to be run into the well under pressure we

Each component on the following list can be identified on p 1-4:

GREASE INJECTOR HEAD

BLEED - OFF VALVE

TYPE '0' TYPE 'B'

Pressure Relief Valve

~ Internal RO.P. Retainer

,,- WIRE SEALING DEVICES " UMITED

!r-- Wireline Sealing Devices fulfil one of two functions:

(a) Pressure containment. (Sealing).

The essential function of the wireline stuffing box is to ensure containment

(b) Line wip.er(Wiper box, swabbing head)

- pressure. This prevents escape of well fluids.

In order to supply grease under pressure we require the following eqUlp-

2. What is the pressure rating of the standard stuffing box?

3. If we cannot satisfactorily contain well pressure which component must be

I. List equipment required to rig up grease injector head.

3. What are the disadvantages of this device?

Rocking lubricator to ensure it is perfectly straight will assist in loosening

NOTE: differences between Otis and Bowen (i) External - Holes

The pressure ratings of lubricator are:

Working press (psi) Test press (psi)

The lower section must be of sufficient diameter to accommodate tool 1 equipment

Maximum length recommended to be picked up with rope blocks on ginpoles are:

If diameters exceed these sizes a crane must be used.

Common sizes are:

2,2 1/2",3 1/2",4 1/2", and 5 1/2"

MANUFACTURERS- CAMCO, HYDROLEX, OTIS, BOWEN, ELMAR

2. What is the internal difference?

3. Can these quick unions be unscrewed by hand with pressure inside?

1. How many sections of lubricator should be used for each job?

1\\ 2. Why is there a bleed off valve in the lower section?

3. What is the working pressure of the standard lubricator?

- 5. . How often should lubricator be tested?

..i 6. Explain" Wire Tracking"

CAUTION: HOP's WILL ONLY HOLD PRESSURE FROM ONE :DIRECTION